JP6962393B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of game machine. These game machines include a control device having a CPU, a ROM, or a CPU, a ROM, or the like in a single chip, and the control device causes a display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device) and a light emitting unit (for example, an LED). ), A configuration is known in which an effect is executed by controlling an effect device such as a speaker (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

The control device controls the execution of the effect by reading the data that determines the content of the effect and executing the process corresponding to the read data. Specifically, in the display control of the display device, for example, data corresponding to the content of the effect to be executed by the control device is read out, and the read data is used to cause the display device to perform a predetermined display. , A configuration for controlling the display effect can be considered. Further, in the light emission control of the light emitting unit, for example, data corresponding to the content of the effect to be executed in the control device is read out, and the light emitting unit is made to emit light in a predetermined pattern by using the read data, thereby performing the light emitting effect. A control configuration is conceivable. Further, in the sound output control of the speaker, for example, the sound output effect is produced by reading the data corresponding to the content of the effect to be executed in the control device and using the read data to output a predetermined sound from the speaker. A control configuration is conceivable.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2011-110091

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, there is a demand for a configuration capable of suitably performing an effect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably performing an effect.

The invention according to claim 1 in order to solve the above problems includes a light emitting means capable of performing an effect using light and a light emitting means.
Information setting means for the emission pattern information used in order to execute the effect in the light emitting means is set to be available in the case of performing the execution control of the effect of the light emitting means,
When the control execution timing is reached, by using the information corresponding to the control execution timing in the light emission pattern information , the execution means for causing the light emission means to execute the effect during a predetermined period, and the execution means.
With
The information setting means is
The original information reading means for reading the original information used for setting the light emission pattern information from the storage means, and the original information reading means.
Derivation means for deriving the light emission pattern information by applying the setting information to the original information read by the original information reading means, and
With
The original information includes
Execution order information corresponding to the execution order of the effect in the light emitting means,
Correspondence information that is set in correspondence with the execution order information and is used by the execution means to control the execution of the effect of the light emitting means, and
Is set,
In the execution order information, a plurality of specific information including the first information and the second information are set in a predetermined order.
The execution means is set at the next control execution timing with respect to the control execution timing in which the effect is executed by the light emitting means using the correspondence information corresponding to the specific information set in the last order. , The effect is executed by the light emitting means by using the corresponding information corresponding to the specific information set in the first order.
The derivation means
By applying the first setting information as the setting information, the effect of the light emitting means is started from the content corresponding to the corresponding information set in the original information corresponding to the first information. And the means for deriving the light emission pattern information
By applying the second setting information as the setting information, the effect of the light emitting means is started from the content corresponding to the corresponding information set in the original information corresponding to the second information. And the means for deriving the light emission pattern information
With
The information used for controlling the light emission of the light emitting means includes information to be used in preference to the light emitting pattern information derived based on the original information.
The light emitting means is characterized in that the light emitting pattern information to be used for light emitting control is derived by using different original information in the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means in a predetermined period. And.

According to the present invention, it is possible to preferably perform the effect.

It is a front view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display surface of the symbol display apparatus (a)-(j). It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display surface of the symbol display apparatus (a), (b). It is a schematic diagram of the game board for demonstrating the curtain plate movable unit and the disk movable unit. (A)-(e) It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the operation of a movable curtain plate. (A)-(e) It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the operation of the disk movable object. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of various counters used for a winning or failing lottery. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric control process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure variation start processing executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed in the sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the main side command correspondence processing which is executed in the sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the V interrupt processing executed by the display side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the command correspondence processing which is executed in the display side MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an example of the pattern data table which can be selected when a high accuracy jackpot result is obtained. It is a flowchart which shows the other correspondence processing executed in the display side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the task processing which is executed in the display side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the command setting process which is executed in the display side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the display side command correspondence processing which is executed in the sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the operation system correspondence processing executed in the sound light side MPU. It is a timing chart for explaining the content of communication between the sound light side MPU and the display side MPU when the operation effect is executed. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the light emission data group, and (b) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the light emission data area. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining (a) a palette data group, (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining a start position data group, and (c) an explanatory diagram for explaining a list data group. d) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating group data group. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the data selection table. It is a flowchart which shows the reading process of the light emission data executed in the sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the data expansion process which is executed in the sound light side MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an example of light emission data. It is a flowchart which shows the light emission control processing which is executed in the sound light side MPU. It is a timing chart for demonstrating how light emission control is performed. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the sound output data group, and (b) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the sound output data area. It is a flowchart which shows the reading process of the sound output data executed by the sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the sound output control processing which is executed in the sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the movable object effect executed in the sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the movable object control processing executed in the sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st stage control process which is executed in the sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd stage control process which is executed in the sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the pair waiting control processing which is executed in the sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 3rd stage control process which is executed in the sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the return control process which is executed in the sound light side MPU. It is a timing chart for explaining how the 3rd stage production is performed. It is a flowchart which shows the single control process which is executed in the sound light side MPU. It is a timing chart for explaining how a disk effect is performed by a single control. It is a flowchart which shows the synchronization control processing which is executed in the sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the adjustment process for rotation stop executed in the sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the return process which is executed in the sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the rotation stop processing executed in the sound light side MPU. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the problem when the adjustment process for stopping rotation and the process associated with it are not executed. It is a timing chart for explaining how a disk effect is performed by a synchronous control process. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the operation contents at the time of receiving the command of a stop command in a limit range and a limit range. (A) is a flowchart showing the sensor monitoring process executed by the sound light side MPU in the second embodiment, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a movable object data area. It is a flowchart which shows the synchronization control processing which is executed in the sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the pair waiting control processing which is executed in the sound light side MPU in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command correspondence processing. It is a flowchart which shows the main side command correspondence processing executed in the sound light side MPU in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the display side command correspondence processing which is executed in the sound light side MPU.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, referred to as “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10.

The pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a game machine main body 12 that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 in the forward direction. Although detailed description by illustration is omitted, the gaming machine main body 12 has an inner frame rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 and an inner frame arranged in front of the inner frame and rotatably supported by the inner frame. It includes a front door frame and a back pack unit that is arranged behind the inner frame and rotatably supported by the inner frame. Further, the gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device (not shown) at the rotating tip portion thereof, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 so that it cannot be opened with respect to the outer frame 11. , It has a function to lock the front door frame so that it cannot be opened with respect to the inner frame. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 provided exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

The game board 20 shown in FIG. 2 is mounted on the game machine main body 12. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 20 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 20.

The game board 20 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 21, a special electric winning device 22, an upper operating opening 23, a lower operating port 24, a through gate 25, a variable display unit 26, a special drawing display unit 33, a general drawing display unit 34, and the like. ing. When a ball enters the general winning opening 21, the special electric winning device 22, the upper operating port 23, and the lower operating port 24, it is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) arranged on the back side of the game board 20. A predetermined number of prize balls are paid out based on the detection result. In addition, an out opening 27 is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 20, and game balls that do not enter various winning openings or the like are discharged from the game area through the out opening 27. Further, in the game board 20, a large number of nails 28 are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball, and various members such as a windmill are arranged.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through the predetermined opening, and when it passes through the opening, it passes through the opening as well as the mode in which the ball is discharged to the back side of the game board 20. It also includes a mode in which the flow of the game area is continued without being discharged from the game area later. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the ball from entering the game ball into the out port 27, the general winning opening 21, the special electric winning device 22, the upper operating port 23, the lower operating port 24, or the through gate 25 The entry of a game ball is also referred to as a prize.

The upper operating port 23 and the lower operating port 24 are unitized as an operating port device and installed on the game board 20. Both the upper actuating port 23 and the lower actuating port 24 are opened upward. Further, both operating ports 23 and 24 are arranged in the vertical direction so that the upper operating port 23 faces upward. The lower operating port 24 is provided with a general electric accessory 24a as a guide piece composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. In the closed state of the general electric accessory 24a, the game ball cannot win the lower operating port 24, and when the general electric accessory 24a is in the open state, the lower operating opening 24 can be won.

The special electric winning device 22 is provided with a large winning opening (not shown) leading to the back side of the game board 20, and is provided with an opening / closing door 22a for opening and closing the large winning opening. The opening / closing door 22a is arranged in either a closed state or an open state. Specifically, the opening / closing door 22a is normally in a closed state in which the game ball cannot win a prize, and is switched to an open state in which the game ball can win a prize when the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is won in the internal lottery. It has become. By the way, the open / close execution mode is a mode that shifts when a big hit result is obtained. It should be noted that, although it is not impossible to win a prize in the closed state, it may be configured in a state in which it is more difficult for the prize to occur than in the open state.

The special figure display unit 33 and the normal figure display unit 34 are provided on the lower side of the game area. In the special figure display unit 33, the variation display of the pattern is performed by triggering the winning of the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the winning of the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24 is performed. The result of the internal lottery conducted based on is clearly indicated by the display. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the winning of the upper operating port 23 and the winning of the lower operating port 24 are not distinguished in the internal lottery, and the winning is based on the winning of the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24. The result of the internal lottery is clearly shown on the special figure display unit 33, which is a common display area. Then, when the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, the special figure display unit 33 shows the predetermined stop result. Is displayed and the variable display is stopped, and then the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode.

The special figure display unit 33 is composed of a segment display device in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the liquid crystal display device and the organic EL display device are not limited thereto. , CRT, dot matrix, and other types of display devices. Further, as the pattern to be variablely displayed on the special figure display unit 33, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variablely displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed, or a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed. A configuration in which multiple types of colors are switched and displayed can be considered.

In the general drawing display unit 34, the variation display of the pattern is performed by triggering the winning of the through gate 25, and as the stop result of the variation display, the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 25 is displayed. Specified by. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the through gate 25 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the open state of the public power supply, the predetermined stop result is displayed on the general drawing display unit 34 and the variable display is displayed. After being stopped, it shifts to the open state. In the open state of the general electric power, the general electric accessory 24a provided in the lower operating port 24 is in the open state in a predetermined mode.

The variable display unit 26 is provided with a symbol display device 31 that variablely displays a symbol, which is a type of symbol. Further, in the variable display unit 26, a center frame 32 is arranged so as to surround the symbol display device 31. The upper portion of the center frame 32 extends forward of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, the game ball is prevented from falling in front of the display surface G of the symbol display device 31, and there is no inconvenience that the visibility of the display surface G is lowered due to the fall of the game ball. ing. Further, the center frame 32 is provided with a stage portion 32a below which the game ball can roll in the lateral direction. The game ball that has entered the entrance portion formed on the left side portion of the center frame 32 is supplied to the stage portion 32a by passing through the lead-out passage formed on the left side portion. Then, the game ball that falls downward from the position closer to the center in the stage portion 32a is likely to win a prize in the upper operating port 23.

The symbol display device 31 is configured as a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 31 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

In the symbol display device 31, the variable display of the symbol is started based on the winning of the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24. That is, when the special figure display unit 33 performs the variable display, the symbol display device 31 performs the variable display accordingly. Then, for example, in a game round in which the game result is a big hit result, the symbol display device 31 stops and displays a predetermined combination of symbols on a preset effective line.

The display contents of the symbol display device 31 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing individual symbols that are variablely displayed by the symbol display device 31, and FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a display surface G of the symbol display device 31.

As shown in FIGS. 3 (a) to 3 (j), a design which is a kind of design consists of nine main designs with numbers "1" to "9" and a shell-shaped design. It is composed of sub-designs. More specifically, the main symbols are constructed by adding numbers "1" to "9" to each of nine types of character symbols such as an octopus.

As shown in FIG. 4A, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row are set as a plurality of display areas on the display surface G of the symbol display device 31. Each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is configured by arranging a main symbol and a sub symbol in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in descending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. .. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol.

That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol string Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and then between the main symbol of "9" and the main symbol of "1". The main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged in the above, and one sub symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, 10 main symbols are arranged and composed of 20 symbols. Then, on the display surface G, the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity.

As shown in FIG. 4B, on the display surface G, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It has become like. Further, as shown in FIG. 4A, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right-down line L4, and a right-up line L5 are set on the display surface G. .. Then, the variable display is stopped in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and all the symbol rows Z1 are formed in a state where a combination of symbols with the same number is attached to one of the effective lines. When the variable display of ~ Z3 is completed, the jackpot moving image is displayed as the occurrence of the jackpot result.

The mode of variable display of symbols in the symbol display device 31 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, the number of symbols in each symbol row, and the like. Can be changed as appropriate. Further, the pattern to be variablely displayed by the symbol display device 31 is not limited to the above-mentioned symbol, and for example, only numbers may be variablely displayed as the symbol.

Further, based on the winning of any of the operating ports 23 and 24, the variation display is started on the special figure display unit 33 and the symbol display device 31, a predetermined stop result is displayed, and the variation display is stopped. Is equivalent to one game.

Returning to the description of FIG. 2, a special figure holding light emitting unit 35 corresponding to the special figure display unit 33 and the symbol display device 31 is provided at a position adjacent to the special figure display unit 33. The maximum number of game balls that have won a prize in the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24 is reserved, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the special figure holding light emitting unit 35. Further, at a position adjacent to the normal figure display unit 34, a normal figure holding light emitting unit 36 corresponding to the normal figure display unit 34 is provided. The number of times the game ball has passed through the through gate 25 is held up to four times, and the number of times the game ball is held is displayed by lighting the holding light emitting unit 36. It should be noted that the functions of the reserved light emitting units 35 and 36 may be fulfilled by the display in a part of the area of the symbol display device 31.

Here, in the variable display unit 26, in addition to the symbol display device 31, a curtain plate movable unit 51 and a pair of left and right disk movable units are used as a plurality of output devices used for executing an effect, a notification, and the like. 61a and 61b, a first light emitting unit group 71, a second light emitting unit group 72, and a third light emitting unit group 73 are provided. The curtain plate movable unit 51 and the disk movable units 61a and 61b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a schematic view of the game board 20 for explaining the curtain plate movable unit 51 and the disk movable units 61a and 61b.

The curtain plate movable unit 51 is arranged in front of the display surface G of the symbol display device 31, and is provided so as to cover a part of the display surface G from the front and to change the covering area. And a plurality of curtain plate drive units 53a and 53b for displacing the curtain plate movable object 52. The movable curtain plate 52 has a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is arranged so that the longitudinal direction thereof is the lateral direction.

A left curtain plate drive unit 53a is provided as a part of the plurality of curtain plate drive units 53a and 53b at a position closer to the left end portion of the curtain plate movable object 52 than the central position in the longitudinal direction. At the position closer to the right end of the movable curtain plate 52 than the center position in the longitudinal direction, the right curtain plate drive unit 53b is provided as the rest of the plurality of curtain plate drive units 53a and 53b. There is. That is, as the plurality of curtain plate drive units 53a and 53b, a pair of left and right curtain plate drive units 53a and 53b are provided.

The left curtain plate drive unit 53a and the right curtain plate drive unit 53b have the same configuration. Specifically, each of the curtain plate drive units 53a and 53b includes curtain plate rails 54a and 54b extending in the vertical direction. The curtain plate rails 54a and 54b are provided at positions above the upper edge of the exposed opening 32b that exposes the display surface G of the symbol display device 31 in the center frame 32. The vertical dimensions of the curtain plate rails 54a and 54b are set to be larger than the vertical dimensions of the curtain plate movable object 52, and the entire rails 54a and 54b are present on the back surface of the center frame 32. That is, the curtain plate rails 54a and 54b are provided so as not to project toward the exposed opening 32b.

Slide members 55a and 55b are provided so as to correspond one-to-one with the rails 54a and 54b for the curtain plate. The slide members 55a and 55b can be slidably moved in the vertical direction along the corresponding curtain plate rails 54a and 54b. Each of the slide members 55a and 55b is integrated with the curtain plate movable object 52 via a connecting portion (not shown). In this case, the left slide member 55a is integrated with respect to the region closer to the left end of the curtain plate movable object 52 than the central position in the longitudinal direction, and the right slide member 55b is the curtain plate movable object 52. It is integrated with respect to the region closer to the right end than the central position in the longitudinal direction in. The slide members 55a and 55b are fixed so as to project upward from the upper end of the curtain plate movable object 52. When the slide members 55a and 55b slide on the corresponding curtain plate rails 54a and 54b, the curtain plate movable object 52 integrated with the slide members 55a and 55b is displaced in the vertical direction.

A predetermined play exists in the connecting portion between the curtain plate movable object 52 and the slide members 55a and 55b, and the curtain plate movable object 52 has a rotation axis in the front-rear direction in the clockwise direction and the counterclockwise direction. Displacement is allowed. As a result, it is possible to make one of the slide members 55a and 55b different in height from the other within the range until the inclination angle of the movable curtain plate 52 becomes a predetermined angle.

Pinion gears (not shown) are provided on the slide members 55a and 55b, and racks (not shown) are provided on the rails 54a and 54b for the curtain plate. Further, each of the slide members 55a and 55b is provided with a curtain plate drive unit 56a and 56b for rotationally driving the pinion gear. When the left curtain plate drive unit 56a is in the driving state, the left slide member 55a is displaced in the vertical direction, the left region of the curtain plate movable object 52 can be displaced in the vertical direction with respect to the right region, and the right side is displaced. When the curtain plate drive unit 56b is in the driving state, the slide member 55b on the right side is displaced in the vertical direction, and the right side region of the curtain plate movable object 52 can be displaced in the vertical direction with respect to the left side region. Further, when both the left curtain plate drive unit 56a and the right curtain plate drive unit 56b are in the driving state, the left and right slide members 55a and 55b are both displaced in the vertical direction, and the entire curtain plate movable object 52 is displaced. Displaces in the vertical direction.

When the slide members 55a and 55b are present on the curtain plate rails 54a and 54b on the side farthest from the exposed opening 32b, that is, when they are present at the upper ends of the curtain plate rails 54a and 54b. Most of the movable curtain plate 52 is hidden behind the center frame 32, and only a small area exists in the exposed opening 32b. This position is the initial position of the curtain plate movable object 52, and in a situation where the effect using the curtain plate movable object 52 is not performed, the curtain plate movable object 52 is arranged at the initial position.

In the situation where the curtain plate movable object 52 is arranged at the initial position, the curtain plate movable objects 52 move toward the center side of the exposed opening 32b when the curtain plate drive portions 56a and 56b are in the driving state. .. Then, this displacement is performed with the position where each slide member 55a, 55b reaches the end portion of the curtain plate rails 54a, 54b near the exposed opening 32b, that is, the lower end portion of the curtain plate rails 54a, 54b. Will be. By lowering the curtain plate movable object 52, the area exposed from the exposed opening 32b in the curtain plate movable object 52 becomes wider.

In a configuration in which the curtain plate movable object 52 can be displaced between the initial position and the limit position, the curtain plate initial position sensors 57a and 57b for detecting that the curtain plate movable object 52 is arranged at the initial position are provided. Has been done. The curtain plate initial position sensors 57a and 57b are provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the slide members 55a and 55b. Optical sensors are used as the curtain plate initial position sensors 57a and 57b, but the type of sensor such as a switch type sensor or an electromagnetic type sensor is arbitrary.

In addition to the curtain plate initial position sensors 57a and 57b, adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b are provided as sensors for detecting the position of the curtain plate movable object 52. The adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b are provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the slide members 55a and 55b. More specifically, the adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b have the initial position and the limit position so as to detect that the slide members 55a and 55b are present at a predetermined position on the limit position side of the initial position. The slide members 55a and 55b are provided so as to detect the presence of the slide members 55a and 55b at an intermediate position. Optical sensors are used as the adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b, but the type of sensor such as a switch type sensor or an electromagnetic type sensor is arbitrary.

The operation pattern of the curtain plate movable object 52 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6A to 6E. A dot hatch is attached to a portion of the movable curtain plate 52 that is exposed to the front side of the game board 26 through the exposed opening 32b.

First, the first stage operation will be described. In the first stage operation, in a situation where the curtain plate movable object 52 is arranged at the initial position as shown in FIG. 6 (a), the drive for each curtain plate is performed so that both the slide members 55a and 55b are lowered together. When the portions 56a and 56b are brought into the driving state, the entire curtain plate movable object 52 is displaced downward (for example, the state shown in FIG. 6D). Then, this downward displacement is stopped when both slide members 55a and 55b are detected by the corresponding adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b, respectively. In the case of the curtain plate effect in which only the first stage operation is performed, the return operation is performed after the stopped state is maintained for a predetermined period.

In the return operation, the curtain plate drive units 56a and 56b are simultaneously driven in the opposite directions, so that the curtain plate movable object 52 rises while maintaining the horizontal state. Then, this rise is stopped when both slide members 55a and 55b are detected by the corresponding curtain plate initial position sensors 57a and 57b, respectively, and the return to the initial position is completed.

Next, the second stage operation that is continuously executed without returning to the initial position after the first stage operation will be described. After the first stage operation, the drive units 56a and 56b for each curtain plate are brought into a drive state so that the vertical positions of the slide members 55a and 55b change relatively, so that FIGS. 6 (b) and 6 (b) and FIGS. As shown in 6 (c), the curtain plate movable object 52 alternately repeats a state of downward inclination to the left and a state of downward inclination to the right with most of the curtain plate movable object 52 exposed through the exposed opening 32b. The operation of repeating this alternately tilted state is the second stage operation. As a result, as the operation mode of the curtain plate movable object 52, not only the mode of simply descending but also the mode of tilting to the left and right exists, and the operation mode can be diversified.

After that, the pair waiting operation is performed. In the pair waiting operation, as shown in FIG. 6D, the drive units 56a and 56b for each curtain plate move until the slide members 55a and 55b reach the positions detected by the corresponding adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b, respectively. It becomes a driving state. As a result, the movable curtain plate 52 is in a horizontal state at a position slightly returned to the initial position side. When only the first stage operation and the second stage operation are performed, the return operation is performed after the pair waiting operation is performed, so that the curtain plate movable object 52 returns to the initial position. Become.

Next, the third stage operation that is continuously executed without returning to the initial position after the second stage operation and the pair waiting operation will be described. In the third stage operation, after the pair waiting operation, the drive units 56a and 56b for each curtain plate are driven so that both slide members 55a and 55b are lowered together, as shown in FIG. 6 (e). In addition, the movable curtain plate 52 is an operation in which the entire movable object 52 is displaced downward while maintaining the horizontal state. After that, the return operation is performed, so that the curtain plate movable object 52 returns to the initial position.

As described above, there are a plurality of types of curtain plate effects using the curtain plate movable object 52. Specifically,
・ First-stage operation → Return operation, first-stage production,
・ First stage operation → second stage operation → pair waiting operation → return operation, and the second stage production
・ First stage operation → second stage operation → pair waiting operation → third stage operation → return operation, and the third stage production
Exists.

These multiple types of effects occur as effects during the game, and the expected degree of jackpot result when each occurs is different. Specifically, the third stage production occurs in a game that has a higher expectation of a jackpot result than the first stage production and the second stage production, and the second stage production has a higher expectation of a jackpot result than the first stage production. Occurs in high game times.

Next, the disk movable units 61a and 61b will be described with reference to FIG. 5 again.

The disk movable units 61a and 61b can be a pair of disks arranged in front of the display surface G of the symbol display device 31 so as to cover a part of the display surface G from the front and to change the covering area. It includes animals 62a and 62b, and a pair of disk drive units 63a and 63b for displacing the disk movable objects 62a and 62b. The movable disks 62a and 62b have the same configuration and have a circular shape when viewed from the front. Further, the same decoration is applied to the front surface of each of the movable disk objects 62a and 62b. The decoration has a shape having anisotropy that does not overlap between the case where the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are arranged at a predetermined rotation position and the case where the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are arranged at a specific rotation position different from the predetermined rotation position. There is. More specifically, the decoration has an anisotropy that does not overlap between the rotation positions of the movable disk 62a and 62b.

The decorations of the movable discs 62a and 62b may be shaped so as to have anisotropy that does not overlap between some predetermined rotation positions. Further, the outer edge shapes of the movable discs 62a and 62b may have anisotropy that does not overlap between some predetermined rotation positions, and the outer edges do not overlap between any rotation positions. It may have a shape having a property. In the case of a shape having anisotropy in this way, a decoration having no anisotropy, that is, a decoration overlapping between any rotation positions may be provided, and between some predetermined rotation positions. It may be configured to have an anisotropy that does not overlap, or it may be configured to have an anisotropy that does not overlap between any rotation positions.

The disk movable objects 62a and 62b are driven by the corresponding disk drive units 63a and 63b, so that they rotate and slide. The pair of disk drive units 63a and 63b have the same configuration. Specifically, the disk drive units 63a and 63b are disk rails 64a and 64b extending diagonally from the outside of each corner below the exposed opening 32b toward the center of the exposed opening 32b. It has. The disc rails 64a and 64b are provided so as to extend inside and outside the exposed opening 32b with reference to the peripheral edge of the exposed opening 32b. The length of the disc rails 64a and 64b is set to be larger than the diameter of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b, and a part of the disc rails 64a and 64b exists on the back surface of the center frame 32.

Guide members 65a and 65b with shafts are provided so as to correspond one-to-one with the rails 64a and 64b for each disk. The guide members 65a and 65b with shafts can be slidably slid along the corresponding disc rails 64a and 64b, and the rotating base, which is a part of the guide members 65a and 65b, can slide in the front-rear direction at an arbitrary slide position. Can be rotated around the axis of rotation. The guide members 65a and 65b with shafts are integrated with the movable discs 62a and 62b by inserting the rotating shafts into the corresponding movable discs 62a and 62b, respectively. The guide members 65a and 65b with shafts are provided on the back surfaces of the movable disk objects 62a and 62b, and the entire guide members 65a and 65b are covered from the front by the movable disk objects 62a and 62b. By sliding the shafted guide members 65a and 65b on the corresponding disk rails 64a and 64b, the disk movable objects 62a and 62b integrated with the shafted guide members 65a and 65b are displaced in the oblique direction. When the rotating bases of the shafted guide members 65a and 65b rotate, the disk movable objects 62a and 62b integrated with the shafted guide members 65a and 65b rotate.

The disc rails 64a and 64b are provided with a drive roller (not shown), a driven roller, and a transfer belt driven by these rollers, and the guide members 65a and 65b with shafts are connected to each other with the transfer belt (not shown). A part is provided. Further, each of the disc rails 64a and 64b is provided with disk slide drive portions 66a and 66b for rotationally driving the drive rollers. When the disk slide drive units 66a and 66b are brought into the drive state, the corresponding disk movable objects 62a and 62b are displaced in the oblique direction. Further, the guide members 65a and 65b with shafts are provided with disk rotation drive portions 67a and 67b (not shown) for rotationally driving the rotary base. When the disk rotation drive units 67a and 67b are brought into the drive state, the corresponding disk movable objects 62a and 62b rotate.

When the guide members 65a and 65b with shafts are present on the disc rails 64a and 64b near the center in the longitudinal direction, a part of the corresponding disk movable objects 62a and 62b is hidden behind the center frame 32, and one Only the region of the portion is the position existing in the exposed opening 32b. This position is the initial position in the sliding direction of the movable disk objects 62a and 62b. Further, in a situation where the effect using the movable disk objects 62a and 62b is not performed, the movable disk object 62a is provided so that the predetermined portion of the decoration attached to the surface of the movable disk object 62a, 62b is at a predetermined rotation position. , 62b rotation position is determined. This position is the initial position in the rotation direction of the movable disk objects 62a and 62b. The initial position in the slide direction and the initial position in the rotation direction is the initial position of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b.

When the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are arranged at the initial positions, the corresponding disk slide drive units 66a and 66b are brought into the driving state, so that the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are directed toward the center side of the exposed opening 32b. And move. The displacement is limited to the position where the guide members 65a and 65b with shafts reach the end of the exposed opening 32b near the center of the disc rails 64a and 64b, that is, the upper end of the disc rails 64a and 64b. Will be done. In the state of being arranged at this limit position, the entire disk movable objects 62a and 62b are exposed through the exposed opening 32b. Further, when the disk rotation drive units 67a and 67b are driven at an arbitrary position in the slide direction, the disk movable objects 62a and 62b rotate. The rotational operation is possible even while the movable disk objects 62a and 62b are sliding and moving.

A slide for detecting that the movable disk objects 62a and 62b are arranged at the initial positions in the sliding direction in a configuration in which the movable disk objects 62a and 62b can slide and move between the initial position and the limit position in the sliding direction. The initial position sensors 68a and 68b are provided so as to correspond one-to-one with the movable disk 62a and 62b. The slide initial position sensors 68a and 68b are provided on the back surface of the center frame 32. Optical sensors are used as the slide initial position sensors 68a and 68b, but the type of sensor such as a switch type sensor or an electromagnetic type sensor is arbitrary.

In a configuration in which the movable disk objects 62a and 62b are rotatable and the initial position in the rotation direction exists as the rotation position of the movable disk objects 62a and 62b, the movable disk objects 62a and 62b are arranged at the initial positions in the rotation direction. The rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b for detecting that the rotation is performed are provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the disk movable objects 62a and 62b. The rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b are provided on the corresponding shafted guide members 65a and 65b, and are provided so as not to follow the rotation of the rotation base and the disk movable object 62a and 62b. Optical sensors are used as the initial rotation position sensors 69a and 69b, but the type of sensor such as a switch type sensor or an electromagnetic type sensor is arbitrary.

The operation of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b will be described with reference to FIGS. 7A to 7E.

As shown in FIG. 7A, in a situation where the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are arranged at the initial positions, the disk slide drive units 66a and 66b are brought into the driving state, so that the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are moved. The sliding movement of the movable discs 62a and 62b is stopped by the sliding movement in the oblique direction and reaching the limit position as shown in FIG. 7B. In this case, the disk slide drive units 66a and 66b are driven so that the slide movements of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are synchronized. Further, while the slide movement is being performed, the disc rotating drive units 67a and 67b maintain the non-driving state, so that the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are not rotated.

It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not the limit position has been reached is determined by setting the disk slide drive units 66a and 66b in a drive state so as to have a predetermined slide speed. It is performed according to the measurement result of the duration in which is in the driving state. However, the configuration is not limited to this. For example, on the disc rails 64a and 64b, a sensor for detecting that the limit position has been reached at a position corresponding to the limit position is provided, and the detection result of the sensor is provided. Therefore, it may be configured to determine whether or not the limit position has been reached.

After that, when the disk rotation drive units 67a and 67b are put into a drive state, the disk movable objects 62a and 62b start rotating in a predetermined direction as shown in FIG. 7C. In this case, the initial positions of the movable discs 62a and 62b in the rotation direction are set so that the decorations attached to the fronts of the movable discs 62a and 62b have the same mode, so that the rotation start timing is set. The mode of decoration of the movable disk 62a and 62b in the above is the same. Further, the movable discs 62a and 62b start rotating at the same start timing and rotate in the same direction at the same rotation speed. Therefore, the movable disks 62a and 62b rotate in a state of being synchronized with each other.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable disks 62a and 62b may be configured to rotate in opposite directions to each other, and although they are basically configured to rotate in the same direction, the jackpot result In order to notify during the game rotation that the degree of expectation is high or that a jackpot result will be obtained, the configuration may be such that the game is exceptionally rotated in opposite directions.

After that, when the disk slide drive units 66a and 66b are driven in the opposite directions, the disk movable objects 62a and 62b start the slide movement toward the initial position in the slide direction, and FIG. 7 (d) shows. As shown in, it finally returns to the initial position in the slide direction. In this case, since the drive state of the disk rotation drive units 67a and 67b is maintained even while the slide movement toward the initial position is performed, the disk movable objects 62a and 62b slide and move while rotating. It will be. Further, these slide movements and rotations are also performed in a state of being synchronized with each other between the disk movable objects 62a and 62b. After that, as shown in FIG. 7 (e), the rotation position of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b becomes the initial position in the rotation direction, so that the rotation operation of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b is also stopped.

The effect using the movable disk 62a and 62b is used as an effect indicating that the expectation of the jackpot result is medium or higher. For example, when the degree of expectation is medium, only one of the pair of movable disk objects 62a and 62b is expected to perform the sliding operation and the rotating operation as shown in FIGS. 7A to 7E. When the degree is high, both the pair of disk movable objects 62a and 62b synchronize with each other to perform the sliding operation and the rotating operation as shown in FIGS. 7A to 7E. Further, when the movable disk objects 62a and 62b return to the initial positions, the rotation operation may be stopped before the slide movement, and the slide movement and the rotation operation are stopped at the same time or substantially at the same time. A situation can occur.

Next, the first light emitting unit group 71, the second light emitting unit group 72, and the third light emitting unit group 73 will be described with reference to FIG.

The first light emitting unit group 71, the second light emitting unit group 72, and the third light emitting unit group 73 are all provided in the center frame 32. Each of the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 includes a plurality of LEDs 71a, 72a, 73a as a plurality of light emitting bodies. These LEDs 71a to 73a are of a plurality of color light emitting type, and can irradiate at least white, blue, red, green, and yellow light. In each of the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73, a plurality of LEDs 71a to 73a are arranged so as to have a plurality of columns and a plurality of rows. In this case, when different colors of light are emitted between different columns or different rows in each of the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73, the LEDs 71a to 73a can recognize the difference in color. The position and light intensity are set. The number of LEDs is different between the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73, and the arrangement mode is also different, but the number or arrangement mode of the LEDs is the same among some light emitting unit groups 71 to 73. The configuration may be such that the number or arrangement of LEDs is the same among all the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73.

Each of the LEDs 71a to 73a of the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 is provided so as to be covered from the front by the light transmitting portions 74, 75, 76 formed in the center frame 32 in a white translucent manner. Of the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73, the first light emitting unit group 71 is provided above the exposed opening 32b and at a position to the left, and the second light emitting unit group 72 is above the exposed opening 32b. It is provided at a position closer to the center, and the third light emitting unit group 73 is provided at a position on the right side of the exposed opening 32b.

The lighting of the light in each of the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 is used not only as an effect but also as a state notification of the pachinko machine 10. These contents will be described in detail later.

Returning to the explanation of the game board 20, a rail portion 37 is attached to the game board 20, a guide rail is formed by the rail portion 37, and a game ball is launched which is mounted below the game board 20 in the inner frame. The game ball launched from the mechanism (not shown) is guided to the upper part of the game area. In the gaming ball launching mechanism, the launching operation of the gaming ball is performed by operating the launching handle 41 provided on the front surface of the gaming machine main body 12.

As shown in FIG. 1, a window portion 42 is formed on the front surface portion of the gaming machine main body 12 so that almost the entire area of the gaming area can be visually recognized from the front. The window portion 42 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel 43 (not shown) is fitted therein. The window panel 43 is formed colorless and transparent by glass, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the window panel 43 may be formed colorless and transparent by a synthetic resin.

Light emitting means is provided around the window portion 42. A display light emitting unit 44 is provided above the window unit 42 as a part of the light emitting means. Further, speaker units 45 for outputting sound effects and the like according to the game state are provided on both the left and right sides of the display light emitting unit 44.

Below the window portion 42 on the front surface of the gaming machine main body 12, an upper bulging portion 46 and a lower bulging portion 47 bulging toward the front side are arranged vertically. An upper plate 46a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 46, and a lower plate 47a that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 47. The upper plate 46a has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism side while arranging them in a row. Further, the lower plate 47a has a function of storing excess game balls in the upper plate 46a. The game balls paid out from the payout device mounted on the back side of the game machine main body 12 are discharged to the upper plate 46a and the lower plate 47a.

In the region of the upper bulging portion 46 facing the front of the pachinko machine 10, an effect operating device 48 including an operating portion manually operated by the player is provided. The operation unit of the effect operation device 48 is manually operated by the player in order to set the effect content on the display surface G or the like of the symbol display device 31 to a predetermined effect content.

On the back side of the game machine main body 12, a main control device, a voice emission control device, a display control device, a payout mechanism including a payout device, a payout control device, and a power supply / emission control device are mounted. There is. Hereinafter, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 90 includes a main control board 91 that controls the main control of the game, and a power failure monitoring board 95 that monitors the power supply. In the main control device 90, the board box accommodating the main control board 91 and the like may be provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of its opening, or a trace structure for leaving a trace of its opening may be provided. .. As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box are inseparably bonded to each other, and a predetermined portion must be destroyed at the time of separation. It is conceivable that a sealing sticker that leaves a trace of what has been done is attached so as to straddle the boundary between the plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box can be considered.

The MPU 92 is mounted on the main control board 91. The MPU 92 is a ROM 93 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 92, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. A certain RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are built in. It is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 92, and each may be individually chipped. This also applies to the MPU of the control device other than the main control device 90.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A power failure monitoring board 95 and a payout control device 101 provided in the main control device 90 are connected to the input side of the MPU 92. A power supply / emission control device 102 having a function of supplying operating power is connected to the power failure monitoring board 95, and power is supplied to the MPU 92 via the power failure monitoring board 95.

Further, various sensors such as various prize detection sensors 96a to 96e are connected to the input side of the MPU 92. The various winning detection sensors 96a to 96e are provided with one-to-one detection for winning winning portions such as the general winning opening 21, the special electric winning device 22, the upper operating opening 23, the lower operating port 24, and the through gate 25. A sensor is included, and the MPU 92 makes a winning determination for each ball entry portion. Further, in the MPU 92, various lottery is executed based on the winning of the upper operating port 23 and the lower operating port 24.

A power failure monitoring board 95, a payout control device 101, and a voice emission control device 103 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92. A prize ball command is output to the payout control device 101, for example, based on the winning determination result of the winning ball unit corresponding to the winning. Various commands such as a variation command, a type command, and an opening command are output to the voice emission control device 103. Details of these various commands will be described later.

Further, on the output side of the MPU 92, a drive unit 22b for special electric power that opens and closes the opening / closing door 22a of the special electric power winning device 22, and a drive unit 24b for general electric power that opens and closes the general electric accessory 24a of the lower operating port 24. The special figure display unit 33 and the general figure display unit 34 are connected. Although not shown in FIG. 8, the special figure holding light emitting unit 35 and the normal drawing holding light emitting unit 36 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 91, and the MPU 92 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

That is, the drive control of the special electric power drive unit 22b is executed in the MPU 92 so that the special electric power winning device 22 is opened and closed in the open / close execution mode. Further, when the open state of the utility accessory 24a is won, the drive control of the drive unit 24b for the utility is executed in the MPU 92 so that the utility accessory 24a is opened and closed. Further, at each game round, the display control of the special figure display unit 33 is executed in the MPU 92. Further, when the lottery result of whether or not to open the general electric accessory 24a is clearly indicated, the display control of the general drawing display unit 34 is executed in the MPU 92. Further, when a prize is generated in the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24, or when the variable display is started in the special figure display unit 33, the display control of the special figure holding light emitting unit 35 is executed in the MPU 92, and the display control of the special figure holding light emitting unit 35 is executed. When a prize is won in the through gate 25, or when the variable display is started in the normal drawing display unit 34, the display control of the normal drawing holding light emitting unit 36 is executed in the MPU 92.

The power failure monitoring board 95 relays between the main control board 91 and the power supply / emission control device 102, and monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply / emission control device 102. The payout control device 101 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 104 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 90.

The power supply / launch control device 102 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, the operating power required for each of the main control board 91, the payout control device 101, and the like is generated, and the generated operating power is supplied. By the way, the power supply / emission control device 102 is provided with a power supply unit for power failure such as a backup capacitor, and even when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is in the OFF state, the power supply unit for power failure is mainly used. Power for storing and holding is supplied to the RAM 94 of the control device 90. Further, the power supply / launch control device 102 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 105, and the game ball launch mechanism 105 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met.

The voice emission control device 103 includes a voice emission control board 111 on which the MPU 112 is mounted. The MPU 112 is a ROM 113 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 112, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 113 is executed. A RAM 114, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are built in.

The MPU 112 determines the content of the effect to be executed in the game times, the opening / closing execution mode, and the like, based on the command received from the main control device 90. Then, the light emission control of the first light emitting unit group 71, the second light emitting unit group 72, and the third light emitting unit group 73 provided on the game board 20 is performed so that the operation corresponding to the determined content is performed. The sound output of the speaker unit 45 provided on the front surface of the gaming machine main body 12 is controlled. Further, the curtain plate drive units 53a and 53b of the curtain plate movable unit 51 are electrically connected to the MPU 112, and the disk drive units 63a and 63b of the disk movable units 61a and 61b are electrically connected to the MPU 112. The drive units 53a and 53b for the curtain plate and the drive units 63a and 63b for the disk are driven and controlled so that the operation corresponding to the determined content is performed. Further, the MPU 112 controls the light emission of the display light emitting unit 44 provided on the front surface of the gaming machine main body 12. Further, an effect operating device 48 is electrically connected to the input side of the MPU 112, and the MPU 112 monitors whether or not the effect operation device 48 is operated, and when the effect operation device 48 is operated, the effect operation device 48 is monitored. Execute the process to reflect the operation in the progress of the production. Furthermore, the MPU 112 identifies whether or not it is necessary to perform notification based on the command received from the main control device 90, and controls the light emission of the various light emitting groups 71 to 73 and the sound output of the speaker unit 45. Notify by.

The MPU 112 is electrically connected to the display control device 120. The MPU 112 transmits to the display control device 120 a command including the content of the effect determined based on the command received from the main control device 90 and a command including the content of the notification corresponding to the command received from the main control device 90. The display control device 120 is not configured to receive commands from the main control device 90 without going through the voice emission control device 103, and communicates with the voice emission control device 103 more than the voice emission control device 103 in relation to the main control device 90. It can be said that it exists on the downstream side of the direction.

The display control device 120 is a display control board 121 on which an MPU 122, which is an element in which a program ROM 123 and a work RAM 124 are combined into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 125, a character ROM 126, and a video RAM 127, respectively, are mounted. It has.

The MPU 122 analyzes various commands received from the voice emission control device 103 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received commands to control the VDP 125 (specifically, generate an internal command for the VDP 125).

The program ROM 123 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 122, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require an external power supply for holding the stored information. The work RAM 124 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when executing various programs by the MPU 122, and is a volatile storage means that requires an external power supply to hold the stored information. Is.

The VDP 125 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the symbol display device 31. Since the VDP125 is an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance can be said to be a microcomputer chip with a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 125 adjusts the timings of the MPU 122, the video RAM 127, and the like to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the image data stored in the video RAM 127 from the character ROM 126 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 31.

The character ROM 126 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the symbol display device 31. The character ROM 126 holds bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.

The video RAM 127 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 31, and the display content of the symbol display device 31 is changed based on rewriting the content of the video RAM 127.

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, the MPU 112, ROM 113, and RAM 114 of the voice emission control device 103 are referred to as a sound light side MPU 112, a sound light side ROM 113, and a sound light side RAM 114, respectively, and the MPU 122, the program ROM 123, and the program ROM 123 of the display control device 120. The work RAM 124 is referred to as a display side MPU 122, a display side ROM 123, and a display side RAM 124, respectively.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, commands are exchanged between the sound light side MPU 112 and the display side MPU 122 by bidirectional communication.

That is, the voice emission control device 103 and the display control device 120 are electrically connected by using the first signal line group 131, and the sound light side MPU 112 displays using the first signal line group 131. A command is sent to the side MPU 122. Since this command transmission is performed by serial communication, the first signal line group 131 includes a signal line 132 for serial command data transmission and each unit data (for example, one bit of data) included in the command data. A signal line 133 for a clock signal for identifying the above and a signal line 134 for a latch signal for recognizing at least one of a transmission start and a transmission end of one command are included. In addition, a signal line for an enable signal for recognizing the start of command transmission may be separately provided.

Further, the voice emission control device 103 and the display control device 120 are electrically connected by using the second signal line group 141, and the sound light is emitted from the display side MPU 122 by using the second signal line group 141. A command is sent to the side MPU 112. Since this command transmission is performed by serial communication, the second signal line group 141 includes a signal line 142 for serial command data transmission and each unit data (for example, one bit of data) included in the command data. A signal line 143 for a clock signal for identifying the above and a signal line 144 for a latch signal for recognizing at least one of a transmission start and a transmission end of one command are included. In addition, a signal line for an enable signal for recognizing the start of command transmission may be separately provided.

The first signal line group 131 and the second signal line group 141 are provided as one connection unit. The connection unit includes a connector in which one end of the first signal line group 131 and the second signal line group 141 is aggregated, and a connector in which the other end is aggregated, and one connector emits sound. It is detachably attached to the connector of the control device 103, and the other connector is detachably attached to the connector of the display control device 120.

The communication method between the sound light side MPU 112 and the display side MPU 122 is not limited to serial communication, and may be parallel communication. Further, the first signal line group 131 and the second signal line group 141 may be provided as separate connection units.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lottery with MPU 92 of the main control device 90>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lottery with the MPU 92 of the main control device 90 will be described with reference to FIG.

The MPU 92 uses various counter information during the game to perform a big hit generation lottery, a setting of the display of the special figure display unit 33, a setting of the symbol display of the symbol display device 31, a setting of the display of the normal figure display unit 34, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9, when the hit random number counter C1 used for the lottery for hit occurrence, the jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type, and the symbol display device 31 are displaced and fluctuate. The reach random number counter C3 used for the reach generation lottery, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, and the variation type for determining the display duration in the special figure display unit 33 and the symbol display device 31. The counter CS is used. Further, the general electric accessory opening counter C4 used for the lottery as to whether or not the general electric accessory 24a of the lower operating port 24 is set to the general electric accessory open state is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in various counter areas 94b of the RAM 94.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and the counter returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals. The information corresponding to the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored on hold in the RAM 94 as an acquisition information storage means when a prize is won in the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24. It is stored in the area 94a.

The hold storage area 94a includes a hold area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4, according to the winning history of the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24. , The combination of the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored as hold information in any of the hold areas RE1 to RE4.

In this case, in the first holding area RE1 to the fourth holding area RE4, when the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24 is awarded a plurality of times in succession, the first holding area RE1 → the second holding area RE1 → the second holding area. Each numerical information is stored in the order of RE2 → 3rd holding area RE3 → 4th holding area RE4 in chronological order. By providing the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 in this way, up to four winning histories of the game balls in the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24 can be reserved and stored.

The number that can be stored on hold is not limited to 4, and may be any other number such as 2, 3, or 5 or more, or may be a single number.

The execution area AE is an area for moving each numerical information stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE when starting the variable display of the special figure display unit 33, and is the start of one game. At that time, a hit / fail judgment is performed based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

Each of the above counters will be described in detail.

First, the general electric utility opening counter C4 will be described. The general electric accessory opening counter C4 is configured to, for example, add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 250, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0. The general electric accessory opening counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the general electric holding area 94c of the RAM 94 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 25. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the utility accessory 24a to the open state according to the value of the stored utility accessory opening counter C4.

In the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the modes of support by the general electric accessory 24a are different from each other. Specifically, in the support mode, the general electric accessory 24a of the lower operating port 24 is opened per unit time when compared in a situation where the game ball is continuously launched in the same manner with respect to the game area. A high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode are set so that the frequency of states is relatively high or low.

In the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode, the probabilities of winning the general electric accessory opening state in the general electric accessory opening lottery using the general electric accessory opening counter C4 are the same (for example, both are 4/5). However, in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the general-purpose electric accessory 24a is opened when the general-purpose electric accessory 24a is won is set more than in the low-frequency support mode, and one opening time is set. It has been set for a long time. In this case, in the high-frequency support mode, when the general electric power open state is won and the general electric accessory 24a is opened multiple times, from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state. The closing time is set shorter than the one-time opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, compared to the low-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time is secured for the next general-purpose accessory opening lottery to be held after one general-purpose accessory opening lottery is held. That is, the duration of one display on the normal map display unit 34) is set short.

As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability that the lower operating port 24 is won is higher than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the upper operating port 23 is higher than that of the lower operating port 24, but in the high frequency support mode, the lower operating port 24 is more likely than the upper operating port 23. The probability of winning a prize increases. Then, when a prize is won in the lower operating port 24, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays the game while not reducing the number of balls held so much. be able to.

The configuration for increasing the frequency with which the high-frequency support mode is opened to the public power per unit time is higher than that of the low-frequency support mode. It may be configured to increase the probability of winning the open state of the public train in the lottery. In addition, the reserved time secured for the next public utility opening lottery after one public utility opening lottery is held (for example, the general map display unit 34 based on the winning of the through gate 25). In a configuration in which multiple types of variable display times (time to be executed in) are prepared, a shorter securing time is more likely to be selected or the average securing time is shorter in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode. It may be set. Furthermore, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening time is lengthened, and the securing time secured for the next general public accessory opening lottery after one general public accessory opening lottery is held is shortened. By applying any one condition or any combination of conditions, among shortening the average time of the secured time and increasing the winning probability, the advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode is enhanced. May be good.

The hit random number counter C1 has a configuration in which, for example, 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 599, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. In particular, when the hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the hit random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the hit random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The winning random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and is stored in the hold storage area 94a at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24.

The value of the random number that wins the jackpot is stored in the ROM 93 as a winning / failing table. As the pass / fail table, a pass / fail table for the low probability mode and a pass / fail table for the high probability mode are set. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode and a high probability mode are set as the lottery mode in the winning / losing lottery means.

In the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to in the lottery, the number of random numbers that win the big hit is two. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to in the lottery, the number of random numbers that win the big hit is 20. If the winning probability of the high probability mode is higher than that of the low probability mode, the number of random numbers to be won is arbitrary.

The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 29, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the hold storage area 94a at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24.

The distribution destination of the game result with respect to the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the ROM 93 as a distribution table. In the distribution table, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 9" corresponds to the low accuracy jackpot result, and "10 to 29" corresponds to the high accuracy jackpot result. ing.

The low-probability jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the winning / failing lottery mode becomes the low-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. However, this high-frequency support mode ends when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the transition, and the mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode. Further, the high-accuracy jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the winning / failing lottery mode becomes the high-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends.

The open / close execution mode is a mode in which a round game is performed 15 times. A round game is a game that continues until either a predetermined upper limit duration elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls wins a special electric winning device 22. That is. The upper limit duration is set to 29 sec, and the upper limit number is set to 9. In each round game, the special electric winning device 22 is opened only once, but the opening may be performed a plurality of times.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the launching handle 41 is operated by the player, the gaming ball launching mechanism 105 is driven and controlled so that one gaming ball is launched toward the gaming area every 0.6 sec. .. Then, in each round game, the upper limit duration is set for a time longer than the product of the firing cycle of the game ball and the upper limit number of one round game. Therefore, in each round game, it can be expected that the special electric winning device 22 will be awarded a maximum number of prizes in one round game.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 has a configuration in which, for example, 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 238, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. Here, in the pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a kind of display effect in the symbol display device 31. The expected effect is a symbol display device 31 provided with a symbol display device 31 capable of displaying variable symbols, and in a gaming machine in which a final stop result is given as a result of a game that results in a predetermined jackpot. This is a display state for making the player think that the variable display state is likely to be the result of the above-mentioned grant correspondence before the stop result is derived and displayed after the variable display of the symbol in the above is started. Specifically, regarding the grant correspondence result, the combination of symbols with the same number on any of the effective lines is stopped and displayed.

Two types of expected effects are set: a reach display and a notice display for expecting the occurrence of the reach display and the occurrence of the grant response result in the stage before the reach display occurs.

In the reach display, a combination of reach symbols is displayed by stopping and displaying a part of the symbol rows among the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display surface G of the symbol display device 31, and the remaining symbol rows are displayed in that state. A display state in which a variable display of a symbol is performed in a symbol string is included. In addition, while the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the remaining symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to produce a reach effect. , A combination of reach symbols is reduced or hidden, and then a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface G to perform a reach effect.

In the notice display, after the variable display of the symbol is started on the display surface G of the symbol display device 31, the symbol is variablely displayed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, or in some of the symbol rows. In the situation where the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in a plurality of symbol rows, a mode in which the character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is included. In addition, the background screen has a predetermined mode different from the previous mode, and the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 have a predetermined mode different from the previous mode. Such a notice display may occur in both the game times when the reach display is performed and when the reach display is not performed, but the case where the reach display is performed is higher than the case where the reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability.

The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game times when the combination of the same symbols is finally stopped and displayed. Further, in the game times corresponding to the deviation result, when the reach random number counter C3 acquired at a predetermined timing by referring to the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 93 corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display. Is executed.

On the other hand, the determination as to whether or not to display the notice is not performed by the main control device 90, but by the voice emission control device 103. In this case, in the voice emission control device 103, the notice display is more likely to occur in the game times corresponding to any of the jackpot results than in the game times corresponding to the missed result, and the notice display having a low appearance rate is displayed. A lottery process for displaying a notice is executed so as to satisfy at least one of the conditions that are likely to occur. By the way, this lottery result is reflected when the effect for the game round is executed on the symbol display device 31.

Next, the variable type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS has a configuration in which, for example, 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 198, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. The variation type counter CS is used in the MPU 92 to determine the display duration on the special symbol display unit 33 and the symbol display duration on the symbol display device 31. The value of the variation type counter CS is acquired at the start of the variation display on the special symbol display unit 33 and at the start of the variation of the symbol by the symbol display device 31.

<About various processes executed by MPU 92 of the main controller 90>
Next, each process executed for advancing the game by the MPU 92 of the main control device 90 will be described. The processing of the MPU 92 is roughly divided into a main processing that is started when the power is turned on and a timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 4 msec).

<Main processing>
First, the main process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S101, the power-on wait process is executed. In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until 1 sec elapses after the main process is started. In the following step S102, access to the RAM 94 is permitted, and in step S103, the internal function register of the MPU 92 is set.

After that, in step S104, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch provided in the power supply / firing control device 102 is manually operated, and in the following step S105, whether or not "1" is set in the power failure flag of the RAM 94. Is determined. Further, in step S106, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum is executed, and in the following step S107, whether or not the checksum matches the checksum saved when the power is turned off, that is, the validity of the stored data is determined. judge.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the game hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch is pressed, the process proceeds to step S108. Further, when the power cutoff occurrence information is not set or when an abnormality of the data stored and held by the checksum is confirmed, the process proceeds to step S108 in the same manner. In step S108, the RAM 94 is cleared as the initialization of the RAM 94. Then, the process proceeds to step S109.

On the other hand, when the RAM erase switch is not pressed, step S109 is performed without executing the process of step S108, provided that the power failure flag is set to "1" and the checksum is normal. Proceed to. In step S109, the power-on setting process is executed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the RAM 94 such as initialization of the power failure flag is set as an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current gaming state is transmitted to the voice emission control device 103 in order to recognize the current gaming state. do. In addition, a payout initialization command indicating that the RAM of the payout control device 101 should be initialized is transmitted to the payout control device 101.

After that, the process proceeds to the residual processing of steps S110 to S113. That is, although the MPU 92 has a configuration in which timer interrupt processing is periodically executed, a residual time is generated between one timer interrupt processing and the next timer interrupt processing. This residual time varies depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, and the residual process of steps S110 to S113 is repeatedly executed by utilizing the irregular time. In this respect, it can be said that the residual processing in steps S110 to S113 is an irregular process that is executed irregularly.

In the residual processing, first, in step S110, interrupt prohibition is set in order to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. In the following step S111, the random number initial value update process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and in step S112, the variation counter update process for updating the variation type counter CS is executed. In these update processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter of the RAM 94, the read numerical information is added by 1, and then the read source counter is overwritten. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0" respectively. After that, in step S113, the interrupt enable setting for switching from the state in which the occurrence of the timer interrupt process is prohibited to the state in which the occurrence of the timer interrupt process is permitted is set. After executing the process of step S113, the process returns to step S110, and the process of steps S110 to S113 is repeated.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

Here, a hardware configuration for periodically executing timer interrupt processing in the MPU 92 will be described. A clock circuit is provided on the main control board 91 as a pulse signal output means for outputting a pulse signal at a predetermined cycle, and a frequency dividing circuit is provided so as to exist in the middle of a signal path between the clock circuit and the MPU 92. Is provided.

The frequency dividing circuit functions as a frequency changing means for changing the cycle of the pulse signal from the clock circuit, and is configured to output a pulse signal for specifying the start timing of the timer interrupt processing by the MPU 92. That is, the pulse signal is supplied from the frequency dividing circuit to the MPU 92 at intervals of 4 msec, which is a specific period. The MPU 92 executes a process for confirming the occurrence of a specific signal form such as a rising edge or a falling edge of the pulse signal, and activates and executes the timer interrupt process on the condition that the occurrence of the specific signal form is confirmed as at least one condition. do.

In this case, if the occurrence of the above specific signal form is confirmed in a situation where the activation of timer interrupt processing is prohibited, the timer is changed from the state in which the interrupt is prohibited to the state in which the interrupt is permitted. Interrupt processing is started. That is, depending on the processing execution status of the MPU 92, the next timer interrupt processing may be started after 4.1 msec has elapsed from the start of the previous timer interrupt processing. If such an event occurs, the next timer interrupt processing may be started. The timer interrupt processing will be started after 3.9 msec has elapsed from the start of the immediately preceding timer interrupt processing.

However, since the output of the pulse signal from the frequency divider circuit is performed in a specific cycle such as 4 msec regardless of the progress of the process in the MPU 92, the timer interrupt process is basically started in the specific cycle. Furthermore, the processing configuration of the MPU 92 is such that even if the timer interrupt processing at a predetermined timing is started after a period exceeding a specific cycle has elapsed since the previous timer interrupt processing was started, the timing next to the predetermined timing is used. In the timer interrupt processing in, the portion exceeding the specific cycle is absorbed, and in the timer interrupt processing in the next timing, it is set to be started at the timing when the input of the pulse signal is confirmed.

In the timer interrupt process, first, the power failure information storage process is executed in step S201. In the power failure information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of a power failure is received from the power failure monitoring board, and if the occurrence of a power failure is identified, the power failure processing is executed.

In the following step S202, the lottery random number update process is executed. In the lottery random number update process, the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the universal utility release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the current numerical information was sequentially read from the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the universal utility release counter C4, and the read numerical information was added by 1 to each of them. Later, a process of overwriting the read source counter is executed. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0" respectively.

After that, in step S203, the random number initial value update process is executed in the same manner as in step S111, and in step S204, the fluctuation counter update process is executed in the same manner as in step S112. In the following step S205, the game stop determination process is executed. In the game stop determination process, it is monitored whether or not the progress of the game should be stopped, and if the situation should stop the progress of the game, the execution of the process for advancing the game is stopped.

Specifically, a radio wave detection sensor, a magnet detection sensor, and a vibration detection sensor are provided on the front side of the gaming machine main body 12. The MPU 92 determines whether or not an illegal radio wave is output to the pachinko machine 10 based on the detection result of the radio wave detection sensor, and magnetizes the game board 20 based on the detection result of the magnet detection sensor. It is determined whether or not an act of bringing the pachinko machine closer is performed, and whether or not an illegal vibration is applied to the pachinko machine 10 based on the detection result of the vibration detection sensor. If an affirmative determination is made in any of these determinations, it is considered that a specific event corresponding to a fraudulent act on the pachinko machine 10 has occurred, and the execution of the process for advancing the game is stopped.

After that, in step S206, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped. If the progress of the game is stopped, the timer interrupt process is terminated after the output process of the notification command is executed in step S207. In the output processing of the notification command, when any specific event has occurred and the notification command has not yet been output in response to the occurrence of the specific event, the notification command is sent to the voice emission control device 103. Output. Since the notification command includes the content of the specific event that triggered the output, the voice emission control device 103 sets the execution setting of the notification corresponding to the content of the specific event.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S206 that the progress of the game is not stopped, the processes after step S208 are executed. In step S208, the process for outputting the release command is executed. In the release command output process, the release command is released when the state in which the specific event that triggered the output of the notification command has already occurred is released and the release command has not yet been output for the release. The command is output to the voice emission control device 103. Since the release command includes the content of the specific event to be released that triggered the output, the voice emission control device 103 sets the release of the notification corresponding to the specific event.

In the following step S209, the port output process is executed. In the port output process, when the output information is set in the previous timer interrupt process, the process for outputting the output corresponding to the output information to the various drive units 22b and 24b is executed. For example, when the information to switch the special electric winning device 22 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the special electric drive unit 22b is started, and when the information to switch to the closed state is set. Stops the output of the drive signal. Further, when the information for switching the general electric accessory 24a of the lower operating port 24 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 24b for the general electric is started and the information for switching to the closed state is started. If is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

In the following step S210, the reading process is executed. In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

In the following step S211, the winning detection process is executed. In the winning detection process, the signals received from the winning detection sensors 96a to 96e are read, and the ball enters the general winning opening 21, the special electric winning device 22, the upper operating port 23, the lower operating port 24, and the through gate 25. Executes the process to specify the presence or absence of.

In the following step S212, a timer update process for collectively updating the numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the RAM 94 is executed. In this case, the timer counters that are updated by subtracting the stored numerical information are aggregated and handled, but both the subtraction type timer counter update and the addition type timer counter update are aggregated. It may be configured.

In the following step S213, a launch control process for controlling the launch of the game ball is executed. In a situation where the firing operation is continued with respect to the firing handle 41, one game ball is launched every 0.6 sec, which is a predetermined firing cycle.

In the following step S214, as the input state monitoring process, the disconnection confirmation of each of the winning detection sensors 96a to 96e and the opening confirmation of the gaming machine main body 12 are performed based on the information read in the reading process of step S210. In this case, in the input state monitoring process, when the opening of the gaming machine main body 12 is confirmed, the output processing of the notification command is executed in the same manner as in step S207. In the output processing of the notification command, a notification command indicating that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state and a notification command indicating that the winning detection sensors 96a to 96e are disconnected are transmitted. Further, in the input state monitoring process, based on the signal received from the payout control device 101, it is determined whether or not the lower plate 47a is full, and whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the payout device 104. If a positive judgment is made in these judgments, a notification command corresponding to the judgment is transmitted.

In the following step S215, the special figure special electric control process for performing the execution control of the game times and the execution control of the open / close execution mode is executed. The processing content of the special figure special electric control process will be described in detail later.

In the following step S216, the Fuzu Fuden control process is executed. In the Fuzu Fuden control process, when a prize is won in the through gate 25, a process for acquiring the numerical information of the Fuden accessory opening counter C4 is executed, and the numerical information is stored. In some cases, the opening determination is made for the numerical information, and further, the opening determination is used as an opportunity to execute a process for performing an effect for a general drawing. Further, based on the result of the opening determination, a process of opening and closing the general electric accessory 24a of the lower operating port 24 is executed.

In the following step S217, the output information for updating the display contents of the special figure display unit 33 is set based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S215 and S216, and the display contents of the normal figure display unit 34 are updated. Set the output information to make it.

In the following step S218, the contents of the command and the signal received from the payout control device 101 are confirmed, and the payout state reception process for performing the process corresponding to the check result is executed. Further, in step S219, a payout output process for setting the prize ball command as an output target is executed. In the following step S220, an external information setting process for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of the various processes executed in the timer interrupt process this time is executed. After that, the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the special figure special electric control process (step S215).

In the special figure special electric control process, first, the hold information acquisition process is executed in step S301. In the process of acquiring the hold information, it is determined whether or not a prize has been generated in the upper operation port 23 or the lower operation port 24, and if a prize has been generated, the number of holds in the hold storage area 94a is the upper limit value ( In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not it is less than "4"). If the number of holdings is less than the upper limit, the number of holdings is added by 1, and the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in the previous step S202 is used for holding. It is stored in the first holding area of the free holding areas RE1 to RE4 of the area RE.

If the upper operating port 23 and the lower operating port 24 are winning at the same time, the process for acquiring the hold information is performed a plurality of times within the range in which the hold information acquisition process is executed once. Run.

After executing the hold information acquisition process in step S301, the process proceeds to step S302. In step S302, the process of reading the information of the special figure special electric counter provided in the RAM 94 is executed, and in step S303, the process of reading the special figure special electric address table from the ROM 93 is executed. Then, in step S304, the process of acquiring the start address corresponding to the information of the special figure special electric counter is executed from the special figure special electric address table.

Here, the processing contents of steps S302 to S304 will be described.

As already described, the special figure special electric control process includes a process related to the effect for the game round and a process related to the open / close execution mode. In this case, as the processes related to the effect for the game round, the special figure variation start process (step S306), which is the process for starting the effect for the game round, and the process for advancing the effect for the game round. The special figure changing process (step S307) and the special figure finalizing process (step S308), which is a process for ending the effect for the game round, are set.

Further, as the processes related to the open / close execution mode, the special electric start process (step S309), which is a process for controlling the opening of the open / close execution mode, and the special electric release, which is a process for controlling the open state of the special electric winning device 22. The middle process (step 310), the special electric closing process (step S311) which is a process for controlling the closed state of the special electric winning device 22, and the ending of the open / close execution mode and the gaming state at the end of the open / close execution mode. The special electric power termination process (step S312), which is a process for controlling the transition, is set.

In such a processing configuration, the special figure special electric counter is a counter for the MPU 92 to grasp which of the above-mentioned plurality of types of processing should be executed, and the special figure special electric address table has a special figure. The start address of the program for executing the above-mentioned plurality of types of processing is set corresponding to the numerical information of the special electric counter.

In this case, the start address SA0 is the start address of the program for executing the special figure change start process (step S306), and the start address SA1 is the start address of the program for executing the special figure change process (step S307). The start address SA2 is the start address of the program for executing the special figure determination process (step S308), and the start address SA3 is the start address of the program for executing the special electric start process (step S309). The start address is the start address, the start address SA4 is the start address of the program for executing the special electric power opening process (step S310), and the start address SA5 is the start address of the program for executing the special electric power closing process (step S311). It is a start address, and the start address SA6 is a start address of a program for executing the special electric power termination process (step S312).

The special figure special electric counter controls the special figure special electric power in the next processing time when the condition for updating the numerical information is satisfied when the processing corresponding to the numerical information currently stored is completed. 1 addition, 1 subtraction, or "0" is cleared (initialized) according to the process executed in the process. Therefore, in the special figure special electric control process at each processing time, it is sufficient to execute the process according to the numerical information set in the special figure special electric counter.

After executing the process of step S304, in step S305, a process of jumping to the process indicated by the start address acquired in step S304 is executed. Specifically, when the acquired start address is SA0, the process jumps to the special figure variation start process in step S306. In the special figure change start process, various determination processes are executed on condition that the hold information is held and stored, and the game round in which the change display is performed on the symbol display device 31 and the special figure display unit 33 is started. Execute the process. The details will be described later.

If the acquired start address is SA1, the process jumps to the special figure changing process in step S307. In the special figure changing process, a process of determining whether or not the timing is before the final stop display during the display duration of the game times is executed, and if it is before the final stop display, the special figure display unit 33. A process for regularly changing the display mode of the pattern is executed.

By the way, instead of waiting in the process during the change of the special figure until the timing to display the final stop, if it is not the timing to display the final stop, after executing the process for changing regularly, this special figure End the processing during fluctuation. Therefore, after the effect for the game round is started, the special figure changing process is started every time the special figure special electric control process is started until the final stop display timing is reached. In addition, when it is time to display the final stop, by adding 1 to the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter, the numerical information of the counter is changed from the one corresponding to the special figure changing process to the special figure finalizing process. Update to the corresponding one.

If the acquired start address is SA2, the process jumps to the process of determining the special figure in step S308. In the process of determining the special figure, the symbol display device 31 transmits the final stop command to the voice emission control device 103 and the symbol on the special figure display unit 33 in order to display the stop result of the current game round as the final stop. The display mode will be the display mode corresponding to the lottery result of this game. In addition, in the special figure confirmation processing, it is determined whether or not the period during the final stop display has elapsed, and if the period has elapsed, it is determined whether or not the transition to the open / close execution mode occurs. Then, when the shift to the open / close execution mode occurs, the process for the mode shift is executed.

By the way, instead of waiting in the special figure finalizing process until the period during the final stop display elapses, if the period has not elapsed, the special figure finalizing process is terminated. Therefore, after the final stop display is started, the special figure finalizing process is started every time the special figure special electric control process is started until the period during the final stop display elapses. In addition, when the period during the final stop display has elapsed, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is initialized (that is, "0" is cleared) in the situation where the transition to the open / close execution mode does not occur, and the open / close execution mode is entered. In a situation where a transition occurs, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is added by 1 to update the numerical information of the counter from the one corresponding to the special figure finalizing process to the one corresponding to the special electric start process.

If the acquired start address is SA3, the process jumps to the special electric start processing in step S309. In the special electric power start processing, an opening command indicating that the open / close execution mode is started is transmitted to the voice emission control device 103. Further, in the special electric power start processing, it is determined whether or not the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode has elapsed. If the opening period has not passed, the special train start process is terminated instead of waiting in the special train start process. Therefore, after the opening effect of the opening / closing execution mode is started, the special electric power start process is started every time the special figure special electric power control process is started until the opening period elapses. In addition, when the opening period has passed, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is added by 1 to update the numerical information of the counter from the one corresponding to the special electric start processing to the one corresponding to the special electric open processing. ..

If the acquired start address is SA4, the process jumps to the process during opening of the special electric power in step S310. In the processing during the opening of the special electric power, one round game is started, and it is determined whether or not the end condition of the round game is satisfied. At the start of the first round game, the special electric winning device 22 is opened and the opening command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 103. If the end condition of the round game is not satisfied, the process for monitoring the establishment of the above end condition is executed instead of waiting in the process during the opening of the special electric power, and then the process during the opening of the special electric power is terminated. When the above end condition is satisfied, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is added by 1, so that the numerical information of the counter is changed from the one corresponding to the special electric open processing to the one corresponding to the special electric closed processing. Update.

If the acquired start address is SA5, the process jumps to the process during closing of the special electric train in step S311. In the process of closing the special electric train, a process of ending one round game is executed. In this case, the special electric winning device 22 is closed, and the closing command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 103. Further, in the interval period between round games, it is determined whether or not the interval period has elapsed. If the interval period has not passed, the processing during the closing of the special electric train is terminated instead of waiting in the processing during the closing of the special electric train. Therefore, when the interval period is started, the special electric power closing process is started every time the special figure special electric power control process is started until the period elapses. In addition, when the interval period elapses, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is subtracted by 1 to update the numerical information of the counter from the one corresponding to the special electric closing process to the one corresponding to the special electric opening processing. do.

On the other hand, in the special electric closed processing for the last round game, after executing the process of ending one round game, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is added by 1, so that the numerical information of the counter is changed to the special electric closed processing. Update from the corresponding one to the one corresponding to the special train termination processing.

If the acquired start address is SA6, the process jumps to the special electric termination process in step S312. In the special electric power termination process, an ending command indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is terminated is transmitted to the voice emission control device 103. Further, in the special electric power termination process, it is determined whether or not the ending period of the open / close execution mode has elapsed. If the ending period has not passed, the special train end process is terminated instead of waiting in the special train end process. Therefore, after the ending effect of the opening / closing execution mode is started, the special electric power end process is started every time the special figure special electric power control process is started until the ending period elapses. In addition, when the ending period has elapsed, after executing the process for setting the game state (win / fail lottery mode and support mode) after the open / close execution mode, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is initialized. , The numerical information of the counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special electric train end processing to the one corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start processing.

FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the special figure variation start process (step S306).

In the special figure fluctuation start process, first, in step S401, it is determined whether or not the number of reservations N is 1 or more. If the number N on hold is "0", the special figure fluctuation start processing is terminated as it is. If the number of holds N is 1 or more, the data setting process is executed in step S402.

In the data setting process, first, the number of holds N is subtracted by 1, and the data stored in the first hold area RE1 of the hold area RE is moved to the execution area AE. After that, the process of shifting the data stored in each of the holding areas RE1 to RE4 of the holding area RE is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first reserved area RE1 to the fourth reserved area RE4 to the lower area side, clearing the data in the first reserved area RE1 and the second. The data in each area is shifted such that the holding area RE2 → the first holding area RE1, the third holding area RE3 → the second holding area RE2, the fourth holding area RE4 → the third holding area RE3. At this time, a shift command for causing the voice emission control device 103 to recognize that the data in the hold area has been shifted may be set as an output target and transmitted.

In the following step S403, the pass / fail determination process is executed. In the winning / failing determination process, it is first determined whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode. In the case of the high probability mode, the hit / fail table for the high probability mode provided in the ROM 93 is referred to, and among the information stored in the execution area AE, the hit / fail determination information, that is, the numerical value acquired from the hit random number counter C1. Determine if the information matches the high probability jackpot numerical information. Further, in the case of the low probability mode, the numerical information acquired from the hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is a big hit for the low probability by referring to the pass / fail table for the low probability mode provided in the ROM 93. Judge whether or not it matches the numerical information.

In the following step S404, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning / failing determination process in step S403 is the jackpot winning result. If it is a jackpot winning result, the distribution determination process is executed in step S405. In the distribution determination process, among the information stored in the execution area AE, the information for distribution determination, that is, the numerical information acquired from the jackpot type counter C2 is grasped. Then, with reference to the distribution table provided in the ROM 93, it is specified which jackpot result corresponds to the numerical information of the jackpot type counter C2 grasped above. Specifically, it is specified which of the low-accuracy jackpot result and the high-accuracy jackpot result corresponds to.

In the following step S406, the stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed. Specifically, the information on the mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 33 in the game times related to the start of this fluctuation is specified from the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in advance in the ROM 93. , The specified information is stored in the RAM 94. In the stop result table for the jackpot result, information on the mode of the pattern to be stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 33 is set differently for each type of jackpot result.

In the following step S407, the flag setting process corresponding to the distribution determination result is executed. Specifically, the RAM 94 is provided with a flag corresponding to each type of jackpot result, and in step S407, among the flags corresponding to each type of jackpot result, it corresponds to the distribution determination result of step S405. Set "1" for the flag.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S404 that the result is not the jackpot winning result, the stop result setting process for the loss result is executed in step S408. Specifically, the information on the mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 33 in the game times corresponding to the start of the fluctuation this time is specified from the stop result table for the deviation result stored in advance in the ROM 93. Then, the specified information is stored in the RAM 94. The information on the mode of the pattern selected in this case is different from the information on the mode of the pattern selected in the case of the jackpot result.

After executing any of the processes of step S407 and step S408, the display duration grasping process is executed in step S409. In such processing, the numerical information of the variable type counter CS is acquired. In addition, it is determined whether or not the reach display is generated by the symbol display device 31 in this game round. Specifically, when the game times corresponding to the start of the fluctuation this time are the high-accuracy jackpot result or the low-accuracy jackpot result, it is determined that the reach display occurs. Further, if it is not the result of any big hit and the numerical information acquired from the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is the numerical information corresponding to the reach occurrence, it is determined that the reach display occurs.

When it is determined that the reach display occurs, the display duration information corresponding to the numerical information of the current variation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the reach generation display duration table stored in the ROM 93. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the display duration information corresponding to the numerical information of the current variation type counter CS is displayed with reference to the reach non-occurrence display duration table stored in the ROM 93. get. Incidentally, the display duration that can be acquired by referring to the non-reach display duration table is different from the display duration that can be acquired by referring to the reach generation display duration table.

The display duration information when the reach does not occur is set so that the larger the number of holds N, the shorter the display duration. Also, in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the reach is not selected so that the shorter display duration is selected as compared with the case where the number of pending information is the same as in the situation where the support mode is the low frequency support mode. The display duration table for occurrence is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display duration may not change depending on the number of holds N and the support mode, and the above relationship may be reversed. Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the display duration when reach occurs. Further, in the case of various jackpot results, the display duration table may be set individually for each of the case of the out-of-reach case and the case of the out-of-reach non-occurrence case. In this case, the display duration is distributed according to each game result.

In the following step S410, the display duration information acquired in step S409 is set in the special figure special electric timer counter. The update of the numerical information set in the timer counter is executed by the timer update process (FIG. 11) already described. By the way, as an effect for the game round, the variable display of the pattern on the special symbol display unit 33 and the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 31 are performed, and when each of these variable displays is completed, the game round is performed. The final stop is displayed over the final stop time in a state in which the stop result of is displayed (in the symbol display device 31, a state in which a predetermined combination of symbols is waiting on the effective line). In this case, the display duration acquired in step S409 is the total time for one game minus the final stop time. In this respect, the display duration can be rephrased as the time before the final stop.

In the following step S411, the variation command and the type command are set as output targets. The variable command contains information on the display duration. Here, as described above, the display duration acquired by referring to the non-reach display duration table is different from the display duration acquired by referring to the reach generation display duration table, and therefore varies. Even if the command does not include information on the presence / absence of reach occurrence, the voice emission control device 103, which is a control device on the sub side, can specify the presence / absence of reach occurrence from the information on the display duration. In this respect, it can be said that the variable command contains information indicating whether or not reach has occurred. Note that the variable command may include information that directly indicates whether or not reach has occurred.

In addition, the type command includes information on the game result. The variation command and the type command set as the output target in step S411 are transmitted to the voice emission control device 103, which is the control device on the sub side.

After the process of step S411 is executed, the variable display of the pattern on the special figure display unit 33 is started in step S412. In the following step S413, the special figure special electric counter is added by 1. In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "0" when the special figure fluctuation start processing is executed, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "1" when the processing of step S413 is executed. ". After that, the special figure fluctuation start processing is completed.

<Execution control of production and notification>
Next, the execution control of the effect and the notification using various output devices executed by the sound light side MPU 112 and the display side MPU 122 will be described.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, commands are exchanged between the sound light side MPU 112 and the display side MPU 122 by bidirectional communication. Then, by exchanging commands by bidirectional communication, the sound light side MPU 112 can control the light emission of various light emitting units including the first light emitting unit group 71, the second light emitting unit group 72, and the third light emitting unit group 73. The sound output control of the speaker unit 45 and the drive control of various movable objects including the curtain plate movable unit 51 and the disk movable units 61a and 61b are executed, and the display control of the symbol display device 31 is executed on the display side MPU 122. .. Hereinafter, specific processing contents for executing these various controls will be described.

<Timer interrupt processing of MPU 112 on the sound light side>
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed in a sound light side MPU 112 with a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 msec).

In the timer interrupt process, first, in step S501, the main command storage process is executed. The main command storage process is a process for storing the command in the sound / light side RAM 114 when a command is received from the MPU 92 of the main control device 90 (hereinafter referred to as the main MPU 92). The sound light side RAM 114 is provided with a main side ring buffer for storing and reading commands received from the main side MPU 92, and commands received from the main side MPU 92 are sequentially stored in the main side ring buffer. As it goes on, it is read out in sequence according to the stored order.

In the following step S502, the display side command storage process is executed. The display-side command storage process is a process for storing the command in the sound-light side RAM 114 when a command is received from the display-side MPU 122. The sound light side RAM 114 is provided with a display side ring buffer for storing and reading commands received from the display side MPU 122, and commands received from the display side MPU 122 are sequentially stored in the display side ring buffer. As it goes on, it is read out in sequence according to the stored order.

After that, in step S503, the main command corresponding process for performing the process corresponding to the command received from the main MPU 92 is executed, and in step S504, the process corresponding to the command received from the display side MPU 122 is executed. Is executed, and in step S505, a light emission control process for controlling light emission of various light emitting units including the first light emitting unit group 71, the second light emitting unit group 72, and the third light emitting unit group 73. Is executed, and in step S506, the sound output control process for controlling the sound output of the speaker unit 45 is executed, and in step S507, various movable objects including the curtain plate movable unit 51 and the disk movable units 61a and 61b. The movable object control process for performing the drive control of is executed. The processing contents of steps S503 to S507 will be described in detail later.

After that, in step S508, it is determined whether or not the operation of the effect operation device 48 is in the effective period. In the pachinko machine 10, in a situation where one unit of production is being executed by a predetermined start trigger such as a game rotation production, when the production operation device 48 is operated, the progress content of the production is set to the corresponding content. Can occur. On the other hand, even if the effect operation device 48 is operated outside the valid period, the operation does not affect the progress of the effect, and the operation itself is invalid. In step S508, it is determined whether or not the validity period is in effect.

If a negative determination is made in step S508, the timer interrupt process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S508, it is determined in step S509 whether or not the effect operating device 48 has been operated.

Here, the effect operation device 48 outputs a LOW level operation signal when the operation unit is not operated, and outputs a HI level operation signal when the operation unit is operated. In the sound / light side MPU 112, when the operation valid period of the effect operation device 48 is set, the data corresponding to the level of the signal received from the effect operation device 48 is written periodically (for example, 4 msec cycle). When monitoring is started and the monitoring processing times for confirming the reception of the LOW level signal are followed by the monitoring processing times for confirming the reception of the HI level signal multiple times (for example, twice) in succession. , It is determined in step S509 that the effect operating device 48 has been operated.

The relationship between the HI and LOW of the operation signal may be reversed, and the operation of the effect operation device 48 is completed instead of determining the presence or absence of the operation on the side where the operation of the effect operation device 48 is started. The configuration may be such that the presence or absence of operation is determined on the side.

If a negative determination is made in step S509, the timer interrupt process is terminated as it is, and if the effect operation device 48 is being operated, an operation generation command is transmitted to the display side MPU 122 in step S510, and then the effect operation device 48 is operated. This timer interrupt processing ends. The operation generation command is a command for causing the display side MPU 122 to recognize that the effect operation device 48 has been operated during the valid period of the operation of the effect operation device 48. The effect of sending the command will be described later.

<Processing for main command of sound light side MPU112>
Next, the main command correspondence process executed in step S503 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S601, it is determined whether or not a variation command and a type command have been received from the main MPU 92. When these commands are received, the game result is stored in step S602. Specifically, from the information included in the type command, information on which is the result of the winning / failing lottery and the sorting lottery determined by the main MPU 92 at the start of this game, that is, this game. Information on whether the game result is a high-accuracy jackpot result, a low-accuracy jackpot result, or a missed result is specified, and a process of writing the specified information to the retained data area 161 provided in the sound / light side RAM 114 is executed. do. The retained data area 161 is data that is temporarily used to execute the effect and the notification during the game rotation and the open / close execution mode, and the sound / light side MPU 112 even after the effect and the notification are started. This is an area for storing and holding data for independent use in.

In the following step S603, the advance notice lottery process is executed. In the advance notice lottery process, it is determined by lottery whether or not to display the advance notice on the symbol display device 31 in this game round. As such a notice display, as described above, in a situation where the symbol is variablely displayed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 after the symbol display device 31 starts the variable display of the symbol, or a part of the notice display. In a situation where the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in a plurality of symbol rows, the character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the background screen is used as the previous mode. Also includes those having different predetermined modes and those in which the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 have different predetermined modes from the previous modes. The notice display can occur in both the game times when the reach display is performed and when the reach display is not performed, but the case where the reach display is performed is higher than the case where the reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability. Further, in the advance notice lottery process, the advance notice display is more likely to occur in the game times corresponding to any of the jackpot results than in the game times corresponding to the missed results, and the advance notice display having a lower appearance rate is more likely to occur. A notice lottery will be held.

In the following step S604, the stop symbol determination process is executed. In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game round is a high-accuracy jackpot result, the information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of the same symbols is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is the current stop result. It is decided as the information of. In this case, the same symbol type and effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. However, odd-numbered symbols are likely to be selected as symbols forming a combination of the same symbols. Further, in the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of this game round is a low probability jackpot result, the information corresponding to the stop result in which the same even-numbered symbol combination is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is provided. It will be decided as information on the result of this stop. In this case, the same symbol type and effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. Further, in the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game time is a deviation result, the presence / absence of reach display is specified from the content of the change command. Then, when the reach display occurs, the stop result is that the combination of the same symbols is not established on all the effective lines L1 to L5, and the combination of the reach symbols is established on one or two effective lines L1 to L5. The information corresponding to the stop result to be performed is determined as the information of the stop result this time. On the other hand, when the reach display does not occur, the stop result is that the combination of the same symbols is not established on all the effective lines L1 to L5, and the combination of the reach symbols is not established on all the effective lines L1 to L5. The information corresponding to the result is determined as the information of the current stop result.

In the following step S605, a process for determining the effect pattern of the current game times is executed. In the process, the information on the display duration of the game times is specified from the contents of the variable command and the type command received this time, the information on the display duration, the information on the game result specified in step S602, and the like. And the effect pattern corresponding to the combination of the lottery result information of the advance notice lottery process in step S603 is selected.

In the following step S606, a process of writing each information of the type of the effect pattern selected in the above step S605 and the type of the stop symbol determined in the above step S604 to the holding data area 161 of the sound light side RAM 114 is executed. Since the effect pattern includes information on the display duration of this game, by writing the effect pattern information in the holding data area 161, not only the effect pattern information but also the display duration information can be obtained. The sound light side MPU 112 can be read out again. However, the sound / light side MPU 112 does not measure the display duration.

In the following step S607, the stop result command corresponding to the processing result of the step S604 and the pattern command corresponding to the processing result of the step S605 are transmitted to the display side MPU 122. The processing contents of the display side MPU 122 due to receiving these commands will be described later.

In the following step S608, the game count update process is executed. In the update process, a process for updating the game count counter is executed so that the number of digested games measured by the game count counter provided in the holding data area 161 of the sound / light side RAM 114 is added by 1. The number of digested games is the number of games that have been digested after the end of the open / close execution mode without shifting to the open / close execution mode again. In the sound light side MPU 112, the information on the number of digestion games can be used when determining the content of the production. For example, if the number of digestion games is a predetermined number or more, a predetermined notice display is selected in the notice lottery process. Perform processing that makes it easier.

When a negative determination is made in step S601, or after the process of step S608 is executed, it is determined in step S609 whether or not the final stop command has been received. If the final stop command has been received, the symbol stop command is transmitted to the display side MPU 122 in step S610. The symbol stop command is a command for instructing the display side MPU 122 to make the stop symbol corresponding to the current game round stand by on the effective lines L1 to L5 and maintain the state for the final stop time.

When a negative determination is made in step S609, or after the process of step S610 is executed, it is determined in step S611 whether or not an opening command has been received. If the opening command has been received, the opening / closing execution mode count update process is executed in step S612. In the update process, the open / close execution mode count counter is updated so that the open / close execution mode count measured by the open / close execution mode count counter provided in the holding data area 161 of the sound / light side RAM 114 is incremented by 1. Execute the process. The number of open / close execution modes is the number of open / close execution modes that occur in a situation where the transition from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode does not occur. In the sound / light side MPU 112, the information on the number of times of opening / closing execution mode can be used when determining the content of the effect. Make sure that the corresponding production is executed.

In the following step S613, the opening correspondence process is executed. In the opening correspondence process, the type of the jackpot result that triggered the transition of the opening / closing execution mode included in the opening command received this time is specified, and the production content in the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the type of the jackpot result is determined. Execute the processing for. In this case, the jackpot result that triggered the transition of the opening / closing execution mode this time is the high-probability jackpot result, and in the game round immediately before that, the symbol display device 31 does not use the same odd-numbered symbol combination, but the same even-numbered symbol. When the final stop display of the combination of To determine as.

As already described here, in the holding data area 161 of the sound light side RAM 114, information on the game result and information on the type of the stop symbol of the game times in the symbol display device 31 are stored with respect to the effect for the game times. When the open / close execution mode is entered following the execution of the game times, the game result information and the stop symbol type information stored in the holding data area 161 are cleared when the open / close execution mode ends. NS. Therefore, even if the opening command does not include the information of the display content of the symbol display device 31 in the immediately preceding game round, it is possible to execute the effect including the promotion content in the open / close execution mode as described above. ..

Further, in the opening corresponding process of step S613, the number of times of opening / closing execution mode after updating in step S612 is specified, and the effect corresponding to the specified number of opening / closing execution modes is set as the effect in the current opening / closing execution mode.

In the following step S614, an opening command corresponding to the processing result of the above step S613 is transmitted to the display side MPU 122. The processing content of the display side MPU 122 due to the reception of the command will be described later.

When a negative determination is made in step S611, or after the process of step S614 is executed, it is determined in step S615 whether or not a release command has been received. When the release command is received, in step S616, the display side MPU 122 is made to recognize that the opening of the special electric winning device 22 is newly started, that is, the round game of 1 is newly started. A release command is sent to the display side MPU 122. The processing content of the display side MPU 122 due to the reception of the command will be described later.

When a negative determination is made in step S615, or after the process of step S616 is executed, it is determined in step S617 whether or not a closure command has been received. When the closing command is received, in step S618, the display side MPU 122 is made to recognize that the special electric winning device 22 has been closed, that is, the round game of 1 has been completed. Send a close command. The processing content of the display side MPU 122 due to the reception of the command will be described later.

When a negative determination is made in step S617, or after the process of step S618 is executed, it is determined in step S619 whether or not an ending command has been received. If the ending command has been received, the ending corresponding process is executed in step S620. In the ending correspondence process, the content of the winning / failing lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode included in the ending command received this time is specified, and the processing for determining the content of the ending effect corresponding to the type of the winning / losing lottery mode is executed. do. In this case, when the high-probability mode is set after the open / close execution mode, an effect including the content for making the player recognize that the high-probability mode is set is determined as the ending effect of this time, and after the open / close execution mode. In the case of the low-probability mode, the effect including the content for making the player recognize that the low-probability mode is set is determined as the ending effect of this time.

In the following step S621, an ending command corresponding to the processing result of the above step S620 is transmitted to the display side MPU 122. The processing content of the display side MPU 122 due to the reception of the command will be described later.

When a negative determination is made in step S619, or after the process of step S621 is executed, it is determined in step S622 whether or not a notification command has been received. When the notification command is received, it means that an event to be notified such as some abnormality or a state change of the pachinko machine 10 has occurred in the pachinko machine 10, so a step for performing the notification is performed. In S623, the light emission data reading process is executed, and in step S624, the sound output data reading process is executed. The contents of each of these read processes will be described later. After that, in step S625, the notification command corresponding to the content of the notification command received this time is transmitted to the display side MPU 122. The processing content of the display side MPU 122 due to the reception of the command will be described later.

When a negative determination is made in step S622, or after the process of step S625 is executed, it is determined in step S626 whether or not a release command has been received. When the release command is received, it means that the event to be notified such as the abnormality that has occurred in the pachinko machine 10 has been released. Therefore, in order to release the notification that has already been performed, step S627 is performed. Then, the release setting process is executed. The specific content of the cancellation setting process will be described later. After that, in step S628, the release command corresponding to the content of the release command received this time is transmitted to the display side MPU 122. The processing content of the display side MPU 122 due to the reception of the command will be described later.

If a negative determination is made in step S626, or after the processing in step S628 is executed, the corresponding processing is executed in step S629, and then the corresponding processing is terminated. In other corresponding processing, for example, it is determined whether or not the demo start command is received, and if the demo start command is received, the demo start command is transmitted to the display side MPU 122.

The demo display means that a predetermined start waiting period (for example, 0.1 sec) for starting a demo has elapsed without starting a new game after the end of the game in a situation where the open / close execution mode is not in progress. In the case, or after the power supply to the main MPU 92 is started or the pachinko machine 10 is reset, a predetermined start waiting period for the start of the demonstration (for example, 3 sec) without starting a new game round. ) Has elapsed, the symbol display device 31 starts. In the demo display, an image in which the symbols stopped and displayed on the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 perform a predetermined operation is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the symbols perform a predetermined operation. After or instead of displaying the image, a moving image with a manufacturer name, a model name, or a predetermined character may be displayed. Further, in the configuration in which the demo display is performed by the animation of the symbols displayed in a variable manner on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the immediately preceding game may be used as the symbol. In this case, the demo display will be diversified.

<V interrupt processing of MPU 122 on the display side>
Next, the V interrupt process executed by the display side MPU 122 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The V interrupt process is repeatedly activated at a predetermined cycle, specifically, a 20 msec cycle.

When the VDP 125 outputs an image signal for one frame to the symbol display device 31, the VDP 125 starts outputting the image signal from a dot in the upper left corner of the display surface G and is on a horizontal line including the dot at one end. The image signals are sequentially output to the dots that are lined up, and the image signals are output to the dots from left to right in order from the top for each horizontal line. Then, the image signal is finally output to the dots in the lower right corner of the display surface G. In this case, the VDP 125 outputs a V interrupt signal to the display side MPU 122 at the timing when the image signal is output for the last dot, and causes the display side MPU 122 to recognize that the update of the image of one frame is completed. The output cycle of this V interrupt signal is 20 msec. In this respect, the V interrupt process can be regarded as being activated in synchronization with the reception of the V interrupt signal. However, even if the V interrupt signal is not received, if 20 msec has elapsed since the previous V interrupt process was started, the V interrupt process is newly started.

In the V interrupt process, first, the command analysis process is executed in step S701. Specifically, the content of the command stored in the command buffer of the display side RAM 124 is analyzed. In the following step S702, it is determined whether or not a new command is received based on the analysis result of step S701. If a new command has been received, the command correspondence process is executed in step S703.

In the command correspondence process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 17, first, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the stop result command and the pattern command are received. If an affirmative determination is made in step S801, the pattern data table corresponding to the combination of the stop result command and the pattern command is read from the display side ROM 123 and written to the display side RAM 124 in step S802, and then this command is supported. End the process.

The pattern data table is necessary to display an image for one frame at each update timing of the image when the moving image corresponding to the effect for the game round is displayed on the display surface G of the symbol display device 31. It is a group of information for which various processes are defined. That is, in the pattern data table, information groups corresponding to each frame (frame update cycle is 20 msec) from the start timing to the end timing in the production for this game round are defined.

The pattern data table will be described more specifically with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 18 is an example of a pattern data table that can be selected when a high-accuracy jackpot result is obtained.

As shown in FIG. 18, in the pattern data table, pointer information for the number of frames corresponding to the display duration of the target game times is set, and the pointer information of the task content is set according to each pointer information. Information, information on the presence / absence of command output, and information on additional data are set.

The task content information is information that is set to display the video corresponding to this game time, and unless information that does not reflect the task content information at all is set as additional data, each An image corresponding to the task content information is displayed in the frame. In the information of the content of the task, information of parameters necessary for giving a drawing instruction to the VDP 125 in order to display an image for one frame at the corresponding update timing is set.

Specifically, regarding the pattern data table shown in FIG. 18, the pointer information of "0" is set with the data at the start of fluctuation, and the pointer information of "200" is set with the data at the start of the advance notice effect. , The data at the end of the notice effect is set in the pointer information of "300", the data at the start of normal reach is set in the pointer information of "400", and the data at the start of super reach is set in the pointer information of "700". The data at the start of the final effect is set in the pointer information of "1000", and the data at the end of the fluctuation is set in the pointer information of "1400". Each of these pointer information corresponds to a delimiter timing such as the start of the effect, the switching of the effect, and the end of the effect. Further, in the pointer information other than these, data for enabling the moving image display between the break timings is set.

The information on the presence / absence of command output is information indicating the presence / absence of command output from the display side MPU 122 to the sound light side MPU 112 and the type of the command. The display side MPU 122 emits light from the first light emitting unit group 71, the second light emitting unit group 72, the third light emitting unit group 73, and the like by outputting a command to the sound light side MPU 112 at a predetermined timing according to the content of the moving image. It is possible for the unit to execute the effect of light according to the content of the image, the speaker unit 45 to execute the effect of sound output according to the content of the image, and further, the curtain plate movable unit 51 and the disk movable unit 61a. , 61b, etc., make it possible to execute an effect according to the content of the image.

Specifically, regarding the pattern data table shown in FIG. 18, command data is set for the pointer information of "0" in which the data at the start of fluctuation is set in the content of the task. Therefore, at the start of the fluctuation of the game times, the light emission control, the sound output control, and the like are started in the sound light side MPU 112 based on the command transmission from the display side MPU 122 to the sound light side MPU 112. In addition, in the content of the task, from each pointer information in which each of the data at the start of the advance notice effect, the data at the start of the normal reach, the data at the start of the super reach, the data at the start of the final effect, and the data at the end of the fluctuation are set. Also for the pointer information of the timing minutes before the number of frames (pointers) for advance transmission, specifically, for each pointer information of "198", "398", "698", "998", and "1398". , Command data is set. Therefore, commands are transmitted in advance from the display side MPU 122 to the sound light side MPU 112 for the division timing other than the start of the fluctuation of the game times, and the display contents of the symbol display device 31 and the light emission control are performed at these division timings. , Sound output control and drive control of moving objects can be completely synchronized.

The information of the additional data is set as a blank as the initial setting of the pattern data table, and the writing process to the additional data is executed when there is an execution instruction of the notification. When writing to the additional data is performed, the information written in the additional data has priority over the information originally set in the content of the task. For example, when additional data corresponding to displaying a predetermined character as an image is set as a notification, the image display is displayed so that the character image is added on the image corresponding to the content of the task. Be done.

If a negative determination is made in step S801, it is determined in step S803 whether or not the final stop command has been received. If the final stop command has been received, the final stop setting process is executed in step S804, and then the command corresponding process is terminated. In the setting process for the final stop, the process of reading the data table for statically displaying the stop symbol corresponding to the current game round from the display side ROM 123 until the period during the final stop display elapses and writing it to the display side RAM 124 is performed. Run.

If a negative determination is made in step S803, it is determined in step S805 whether or not the opening command has been received. If the opening command has been received, in step S806, the data table for opening corresponding to the opening command is read from the display side ROM 123 and written to the display side RAM 124, and then this command correspondence process is terminated.

The opening data table is used to display an image for one frame at each update timing of the image when displaying a moving image corresponding to the effect for the opening / closing execution mode on the display surface G of the symbol display device 31. This is a group of information that defines the processing required for. The data structure of the opening data table is basically the same as that of the pattern data table. That is, in the data table for the opening, not only the information group in which the processing necessary for displaying the image for one frame at each update timing of the image is defined, but also the sound corresponding to the delimiter timing of the production. Data for sending a command to the optical MPU 112 is set.

However, in the data table for the opening, the content of the effect is defined during each round game and during the interval period between the round games from the start of the opening effect. In this case, the data during the round game is set so that the image of the loop or the last update timing is retained until the end of the corresponding round game, and similarly, the data during the interval ends the corresponding interval. It is set so that the image of the loop or the last update timing is retained until. Then, the range of pointer information to be referred to in the opening data table is switched according to the reception of the open command or the close command.

If a negative determination is made in step S805, it is determined in step S807 whether or not any of the open command and the close command has been received. If any of the commands has been received, in step S808, after executing the setting process at the time of opening / closing, the process corresponding to this command is terminated. In the setting process at the time of opening / closing, the range of pointer information to be referred to in the opening data table is switched according to the content of the received command.

If a negative determination is made in step S807, it is determined in step S809 whether or not the ending command has been received. If the ending command has been received, in step S810, the ending data table corresponding to the ending command is read from the display side ROM 123 and written to the display side RAM 124, and then this command correspondence process is terminated.

The ending data table is necessary to display one frame's worth of images at each update timing of the image when the moving image corresponding to the current ending effect is displayed on the display surface G of the symbol display device 31. It is a group of information for which various processes are defined. The data structure of the ending data table is basically the same as that of the pattern data table. That is, in the data table for the ending, not only the information group in which the processing required for displaying the image for one frame at each update timing of the image is defined, but also the sound corresponding to the delimiter timing of the effect. Data for sending a command to the optical MPU 112 is set.

If a negative determination is made in step S809, this command correspondence process ends after another correspondence process is executed in step S811.

In the separate handling process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 19, first, it is determined in step S901 whether or not the notification command is received. If the notification command has been received, the notification data setting process is executed in step S902, and then the corresponding processing for each is terminated. In the notification data setting process, the notification data corresponding to the content of the notification included in the current notification command is written as additional data (see FIG. 18) of the currently set data table. As a result, when the image is updated next time, the content of the notification data is reflected, and for example, a character image corresponding to the type of the notification target event is added to the effect image for the game round and the effect image for the open / close execution mode. ..

If a negative determination is made in step S901, it is determined in step S903 whether or not a release command has been received. If the release command has been received, in step S904, after executing the clear processing of the notification data, the corresponding processing for each is terminated. In the notification data clearing process, among the notification data currently set in the additional data in the data table, the notification corresponding to the type of notification target event set as the notification release target in the release command received this time Execute the process to clear the data. As a result, when the image is updated next time, the notification of the type to be released is canceled.

If a negative determination is made in step S903, it is determined in step S905 whether or not an operation occurrence command has been received. As described above, the operation generation command is a command transmitted from the sound / light side MPU 112 to the display side MPU 122 when the effect operation device 48 is operated during the valid period of the operation of the effect operation device 48. When the operation occurrence command is received, by referring to the currently set data table in step S906, the timing at which the operation occurrence command is received is the effect operation set in the data table. It is determined whether or not the operation of the device 48 is in the valid period. If a negative determination is made in step S906, the corresponding processing for each main unit is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S906, the operation flag provided in the display side RAM 124 is set to "" in step S907. After setting "1", the corresponding processing for each item is terminated. The operation-enabled flag is a flag for the display-side MPU 122 to specify whether or not the effect operation device 48 has been operated during the valid period of the operation of the effect operation device 48.

If a negative determination is made in step S905, it is determined in step S908 whether or not an execution permission command has been received. The execution permission command is issued from the sound / light side MPU 112 to the display side MPU 122 in order to permit the execution of the effect corresponding to the operation when the effect operation device 48 is operated during the valid period of the operation of the effect operation device 48. Will be sent. When the execution permission command is received, in step S909, the operation effect data corresponding to the content of the operation effect this time is written as additional data (see FIG. 18) of the currently set data table. As a result, the operation effect is started after the next image update timing.

In the data table for the game round or open / close execution mode in which the effect corresponding to the operation of the effect operation device 48 can be executed, the data of the content when the effect operation device 48 is not operated is set as the content of the task. ing. Therefore, if the effect operation device 48 is not operated during the valid period, the display control is performed as it is according to the content of the task, so that the effect at the time of non-operation is performed. Further, the content of the operation effect is specifically arbitrary, but for example, there is a configuration in which at least one of an effect image, a character, and a moving image that does not appear in the effect at the time of non-operation is displayed.

After executing the process of step S909, in step S910, "1" is set in the operation effect flag provided in the display side RAM 124, and then the corresponding processing for each is terminated. The operation effect flag is a flag for the display side MPU 122 to specify whether or not it is a situation in which the operation effect should be performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S908, the corresponding processing for each is terminated after executing other corresponding processing in step S911. In other corresponding processing, for example, it is determined whether or not the demo start command is received, and if the demo start command is received, the data table for displaying the demo is read from the display side ROM 123 and displayed side RAM 124. Executes the process of writing to.

Returning to the description of the V interrupt process (FIG. 16), when a negative determination is made in step S702, or after the process of step S703 is executed, the pointer update process is executed in step S704. In the pointer update process, the pointer information set in the data table is updated so as to advance by one frame. This makes it possible for the display side MPU 122 to grasp the processing required to display the image for one frame corresponding to the update timing this time.

In the following step S705, task processing is executed. In the task processing, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 20, first, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not additional data exists in the area corresponding to the information of the pointer this time in the data table. If the additional data does not exist, the task data of the pointer of this time is read from the data table in step S1002, and one frame corresponding to the update timing of this time is performed according to the read task data in the following step S1003. In order to display the image of the minute, the calculation of the parameters necessary for giving the drawing instruction to the VDP 125 is performed. After that, this task processing ends.

On the other hand, if additional data exists in the area corresponding to the pointer information of this time in the data table, it is determined in step S1004 whether or not the additional data is additional data to the image of the task data. .. In the case of additional data, in step S1005, the task data and additional data of the current pointer are read from the data table, and in the following step S1006, the current update timing is supported according to the read task data and additional data. In order to display the image for one frame, the parameters necessary for giving a drawing instruction to the VDP 125 are calculated. After that, this task processing ends. As a case where the processes of step S1005 and step S1006 are executed, there is a case where a character image of the notification is added.

If a negative determination is made in step S1004, the additional data of the pointer this time is read from the data table in step S1007, and in the following step S1008, according to the read additional data, the update timing corresponding to this time is 1 In order to display an image for a frame, the parameters necessary for giving a drawing instruction to the VDP 125 are calculated. After that, this task processing ends. As a case where the processes of step S1007 and step S1008 are executed, there is a case where an operation effect is executed.

Returning to the explanation of the V interrupt processing (FIG. 16), after executing the task processing in step S705, in step S706, the command data is displayed in the area of presence / absence of command output corresponding to the information of the current pointer in the data table. Determine if it exists. If the command data exists, it is the output timing of the command, so the command setting process is executed in step S707.

In the command setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 21, first, in step S1101, it is determined whether or not the timing corresponds to the execution of the final effect in the symbol display device 31. The final effect is an effect for notifying that the game result of the current game time is a big hit result at a timing before the timing of displaying the stop result. There are a plurality of types of execution timings of the final effect in the symbol display device 31, and for example, there are timings during execution of the notice display, timings during execution of normal reach, and timings during execution of super reach. In the data table of FIG. 18, the final effect of the symbol display device 31 is set as the timing during the execution of the super reach.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1101, the final setting process ends after the confirmation execution command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 112 in step S1102. The confirmation execution command includes information indicating that the confirmation effect is performed on the symbol display device 31. In addition, the confirmation execution command includes information indicating how many frames after the output timing of the command, the confirmation effect should be started. As a result, even if the confirmation execution command is transmitted at a timing earlier than the start timing of the confirmation effect, the sound light side MPU 112 synchronizes with the start of the confirmation effect in the symbol display device 31, and various light emitting units 71 to 71. It is possible to start the final effect in the 73 and the speaker unit 45.

The final execution command is set so that the output trigger is at most once in one pattern data table. This prevents the symbol display device 31 from generating a final effect a plurality of times in one game. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the fixed execution command may be output multiple times in one pattern data table.

If a negative determination is made in step S1101, it is determined in step S1103 whether or not it is the start timing of the operation valid period. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1103, the setting process ends after the operation valid start command is transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 112 in step S1104. The operation valid start command includes information indicating that the operation of the effect operation device 48 should be valid.

If a negative determination is made in step S1103, it is determined in step S1105 whether or not "1" is set in the operation flag of the display side RAM 124. When "1" is set in the operation presence flag, this setting process ends after the operation valid command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 112 in step S1106. The operation valid command includes information indicating that the operation of the effect operation device 48 was an operation within the valid period. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1105, the operation presence flag is cleared to "0".

If a negative determination is made in step S1105, it is determined in step S1107 whether or not "1" is set in the operation effect flag of the display side RAM 124. If "1" is set in the operation effect flag, the setting process ends after the operation effect command is transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 112 in step S1108. The operation effect command includes information indicating that an operation effect corresponding to the operation of the effect operation device 48 is performed, and information on the type of the operation effect. In addition, the operation effect command includes information indicating how many frames after the output timing of the command the operation effect should be started. As a result, even if the operation effect command is transmitted at a timing earlier than the start timing of the operation effect, the sound light side MPU 112 synchronizes with the start of the operation effect on the symbol display device 31, and various light emitting units 71 to 71. It is possible to start the operation effect in the 73 and the speaker unit 45.

If a negative determination is made in step S1107, the present setting process ends after executing other command transmission processes in step S1109. In the other command transmission processing, a command indicating that the production of the game times should be started, a command indicating that the notice display should be started, a command indicating that the normal reach should be started, and a command indicating that the super reach should be started should be started. A command to indicate, a command to indicate that the fluctuation should be ended, a command to indicate that the effect of the open / close execution mode should be started, a command to indicate that the effect of the round game should be started, and a command to start the effect of the interval between the round games. A command indicating what should be done, a command indicating that the ending effect should be started, a command indicating that the demo display should be started, and the like are transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 112 according to the respective timings.

In this case, a command indicating that the notice display should be started, a command indicating that the normal reach should be started, a command indicating that the super reach should be started, a command indicating that the opening / closing execution mode production should be started, and a round. The command indicating that the production of the game should be started, the command indicating that the production of the interval between round games should be started, and the command indicating that the production of the ending should be started have the contents of the type of the production. include.

In addition, a command indicating that the notice display should be started, a command indicating that the normal reach should be started, a command indicating that the super reach should be started, a command indicating that the fluctuation should be ended, and the production of the round game are performed. The command indicating that the command should be started includes information indicating how many frames after the output timing of the command the target production should be started. As a result, even if each command is transmitted at a timing earlier than the start timing of the target effect, the sound-light side MPU 112 synchronizes with the start of the target effect on the symbol display device 31, and various light emitting units. It is possible to start the target effects in the groups 71 to 73 and the speaker unit 45.

Returning to the explanation of the V interrupt process (FIG. 16), when a negative determination is made in step S706, or after the process of step S707 is executed, the drawing list output process is executed in step S708, and then the V interrupt process is performed. To finish.

In the drawing list output processing, a drawing list for displaying an image for one frame corresponding to the update timing of this processing time is created, and the created drawing list is transmitted to the VDP 125. In this case, in the drawing list, the image grasped in the immediately preceding task process is the drawing target, and the parameter information updated in the task process is also set. The VDP 125 creates drawing data in the frame area of the video RAM 127 according to this drawing list. The VDP 125 outputs a signal to the symbol display device 31 according to the drawing data created in the frame area. As a result, the image of one frame is displayed on the symbol display device 31.

<Process corresponding to the display side command of the sound light side MPU 112>
Next, the display side command correspondence process executed in step S504 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) in the sound light side MPU 112 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the display side command correspondence process.

First, in step S1201, a command indicating that the effect of the game times should be started, a command indicating that the effect of the open / close execution mode should be started, a command indicating that the effect of the interval between round games should be started, and an ending. It is determined whether or not a command indicating that the production of the above should be started and a command indicating that the demo display should be started have been received. When any of these commands is received, in step S1202, the light emission data reading process is executed and the sound output data reading process is executed. In this case, since the process for starting the image display of the corresponding effect is already executed in the symbol display device 31, the execution control of the effect using the light emission data and the sound output data read in step S1202 is performed. , Will be started immediately. The light emission data reading process and the sound output data reading process will be described in detail later.

If a negative determination is made in step S1201, it is determined in step S1203 whether or not a confirmation execution command has been received from the display side MPU 122. When the confirmation execution command is received, the light emission data reading process at the time of the confirmation effect and the sound output data reading process at the time of the confirmation effect are executed in step S1208. The contents of these reading processes will be described in detail later. By executing the reading process of the light emitting data and the sound output data in this way, the final effects in the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 and the speaker unit 45 are subsequently executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1203, it is determined in step S1204 whether or not a command for starting super reach has been received from the display side MPU 122. When an affirmative judgment is made in step S1204, a jackpot result is generated in this game round by confirming the game result information stored in the holding data area 161 of the sound light side RAM 114 in step S1205. Determine whether or not to do so. When a big hit result is generated, a lottery process for whether or not to generate a final effect is executed in step S1206. In the lottery process, if the result is a low probability jackpot, the probability of winning the final production is 1/20, and if the result is a high probability jackpot, the probability of winning the final production is 1/5. To execute. The lottery process for the finalized effect is not limited to this, and the lottery process is not limited to a lottery as to whether or not to execute the finalized effect, and when the finalized effect is executed, the type is determined by the lottery. good. After that, in step S1207, it is determined whether or not the final effect is won, and if the final effect is won, the light emission data reading process at the time of the final effect and the sound output data at the time of the final effect are read in step S1208. Read processing is executed. The contents of these reading processes will be described in detail later. By executing the reading process of the light emitting data and the sound output data in this way, the final effects in the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 and the speaker unit 45 are subsequently executed.

On the other hand, if the command indicating that the super reach should be started has not been received, a negative determination is made in step S1204 and the process of step S1208 is not executed. Further, even when a command indicating that the super reach should be started is received, if the current game round is not a big hit result, a negative determination is made in step S1205 and the process of step S1208 is performed. Do not execute. Further, even if the game round this time is a big hit result, even if the lottery process of the finalized effect is missed, a negative determination is made in step S1207 and the process of step S1208 is not executed.

Here, when the confirmation effect is executed by the symbol display device 31, the command data of the confirmation execution command is set in the pattern data table, whereas the confirmation effect is executed by the symbol display device 31. If this is not the case and the final effects can be executed in the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 and the speaker unit 45, the command data of the corresponding command is not set in the pattern data table. Instead, the timing at which the final effect is executed is set as the start time of the super reach only in these various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 and the speaker unit 45, and a command indicating that the super reach should be started is displayed. It is determined whether or not the final effect should be executed in the sound light side MPU 112 triggered by the transmission from the side MPU 122. With such a configuration, it is not necessary to set the command data indicating the execution timing in the pattern data table for the final effect that is not executed by the symbol display device 31, so that the data capacity of the pattern data table can be reduced. And the design is facilitated.

On the other hand, when a command indicating that the super reach should be started is transmitted from the display side MPU 122, it is determined in the sound light side MPU 112 whether or not this game time is a big hit result, and at least this time. On condition that the game times are the jackpot results, the symbol display device 31 determines the execution of the selective final effect that is not linked. As a result, in the configuration in which the data capacity of the pattern data table is reduced and the setting is facilitated as described above, it is possible to prevent the final effect from being executed in the game times that do not result in a big hit.

Further, even in the game times that result in a big hit, the symbol display device 31 does not determine the execution of the selective final effect that is not linked unless the final effect is won in the lottery process of the final effect. This makes it possible to give irregularity to the execution of the final effect in the above configuration.

Furthermore, when the final effect is executed by the symbol display device 31, the execution of the final effect in the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 and the speaker unit 45 is determined without executing the lottery process of the final effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent a deviation from occurring in the execution of the final effect between the symbol display device 31, the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73, and the speaker unit 45.

When a negative judgment is made in step S1204, a negative judgment is made in step S1205, a negative judgment is made in step S1207, or the process of step S1208 is executed, a movable object is made in step S1209. Determine whether or not it corresponds to the operation start timing. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1209, the moving object effect setting process is executed in step S1210. In the setting process of the movable object effect, various data settings for starting the movable object effect corresponding to the command received this time from the display side MPU 122 are performed. The details of the processing contents of the setting processing will be described later. Since the process of starting the image display of the effect corresponding to the operation start timing has not been executed yet, the execution control of the movable object effect using the data set in step S1210 is the image display of the corresponding effect. It will be started in synchronization with the start of.

Whether or not a command corresponding to the stop command of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b is received from the display side MPU 122 in step S1211 when a negative determination is made in step S1209 or after the process of step S1210 is executed. To judge. The movable object effect using the disk movable objects 62a and 62b will be executed in the game round, but the output information of the command for starting the movable object effect and the above stop for stopping the movable object effect. The output information of the command corresponding to the command is preset in the pattern data table for the game round. Further, there are a plurality of types of execution periods of the movable object effect using the disk movable objects 62a and 62b, and the pattern data table is set according to the type of the execution period, and between the pattern data tables. In, the setting mode of the output information of the start command and the stop command is different.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1211, "1" is set in the stop command flag provided in the sound / light side RAM 114. The stop command flag is a flag for specifying in the sound light side MPU 112 that the disk effect using the movable disk objects 62a and 62b should be stopped.

When a negative determination is made in step S1211 or after the process of step S1212 is executed, it is determined in step S1213 whether or not it is the update timing of the light emission data. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1213, the light emission data reading process is executed in step S1214. In this case, since the process of starting the image display of the effect corresponding to the update timing has not been executed yet, the execution control of the effect using the light emission data read in step S1214 is the image display of the corresponding effect. It will be started in synchronization with the start of. The process of reading the light emission data will be described in detail later.

When a negative determination is made in step S1213, or after the process of step S1214 is executed, it is determined in step S1215 whether or not it is the update timing of the sound output data. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1215, the sound output data reading process is executed in step S1216. In this case, since the process of starting the image display of the effect corresponding to the update timing has not been executed yet, the execution control of the effect using the sound output data read in step S1216 is the image of the corresponding effect. It will be started in synchronization with the start of the display. The reading process of the sound output data will be described in detail later.

When the process of step S1202 is executed, when a negative determination is made in step S1215, or when the process of step S1216 is executed, it is determined in step S1217 whether or not the operation effect system command is received. .. If the operation effect command has not been received, the processing corresponding to the command on the display side is terminated as it is. When the operation effect system command is received, the operation system correspondence process is executed in step S1218, and then the display side command correspondence process is terminated.

The operation system correspondence process in step S1218 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not the operation valid start command has been received. If the operation valid start command has been received, the operation valid period is set in step S1302, and then the operation system correspondence process is terminated. As a result, an affirmative determination is made in step S508 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) of the sound light side MPU 112.

If a negative determination is made in step S1301, it is determined in step S1303 whether or not an operation valid command has been received. When the operation valid command is received, the execution permission command is transmitted to the display side MPU 122 in step S1304, and after the operation valid period is canceled, the operation system correspondence process is terminated. When the operation valid period is canceled, a negative determination is made in step S508 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) of the sound light side MPU 112.

If a negative determination is made in step S1303, it is determined in step S1305 whether or not an operation effect command has been received. When the operation effect command is received, in step S1306, the light emission data reading process is executed, the sound output data reading process is executed, and then the operation system corresponding process is terminated. These read processes will be described in detail later.

If a negative determination is made in step S1305, it means that the operation valid end command has been received. In this case, in step S1307, after canceling the operation validity period, the operation system correspondence process is terminated.

<Contents of communication when the operation effect is executed>
Next, with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 24, the content of communication when the operation effect is executed will be described.

FIG. 24A shows a period in which the operation of the effect operation device 48 is set to be valid in the pattern data table read by the display side MPU 122, and FIG. 24B shows the effect operation on the sound light side MPU 112. FIG. 24 (c) shows the operation status of the effect operation device 48, FIG. 24 (d) shows whether or not the operation effect is executed, and FIG. 24 (e) shows the period during which the operation of the device 48 is set to be valid. Indicates the content of the command transmitted from the display side MPU 122 to the sound light side MPU 112, and FIG. 24 (f) shows the content of the command transmitted from the sound light side MPU 112 to the display side MPU 122.

At the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 24 (a), the start timing of the operation valid period set in the pattern data table is reached, and as shown in FIG. 24 (e), the sound is emitted from the display side MPU 122. An operation valid start command is transmitted to the optical MPU 112. As a result, at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 24 (b), the operation valid period of the effect operation device 48 is set in the sound light side MPU 112.

After that, the operation of the effect operation device 48 is started at the timing of t3 during the valid period of the effect operation device 48 in both the pattern data table and the sound light side MPU 112. As a result, as shown in FIG. 24 (f), an operation occurrence command is transmitted from the sound light side MPU 112 to the display side MPU 122. Since the operation generation command is transmitted in the pattern data table during the valid period of the effect operation device 48, as shown in FIG. 24 (e), the display side MPU 122 to the sound light side MPU 112 at the timing of t4. An operation valid command is sent. As a result, the valid period of the operation of the effect operation device 48 on the sound light side MPU 112 is released. Then, as shown in FIG. 24 (f), at the timing of t5, an execution permission command for permitting the execution of the operation effect is transmitted from the sound light side MPU 112 to the display side MPU 122.

Upon receiving the execution permission command, the display-side MPU 122 starts the operation effect as shown in FIG. 24 (d) at the timing of t6, and sounds the operation effect command as shown in FIG. 24 (e). It is transmitted to the optical side MPU 112. After that, as shown in FIG. 24 (c), the operation of the effect operation device 48 is completed at the timing of t7, and as shown in FIG. 24 (a), the effect in the pattern data table is performed at the timing of t8. It is the end timing of the operation valid period of the operation device 48.

As described above, the start timing and the end timing of the operation valid period of the effect operation device 48 are specified by the display side MPU 122 based on the data table read by the display side MPU 122, and the respective timings are specified from the display side MPU 122. By transmitting the command corresponding to the above to the sound light side MPU 112, each timing is specified in the sound light side MPU 112. With such a configuration, it is not necessary for the sound light side MPU 112 to have a data table that allows the operation validity period of the effect operation device 48 to be uniquely specified, and the data capacity can be reduced.

In the display side MPU 122, the display control of the moving image display in the symbol display device 31 is performed, whereas in the sound light side MPU 112, the light emission control of various light emitting groups 71 to 73 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 45 are performed. Therefore, the processing load of the sound light side MPU 112 is relatively lighter than that of the display side MPU 122. In this case, the processing load can be distributed by monitoring whether or not the effect operating device 48 has been operated on the sound / light side MPU 112.

The sound light side MPU 112 does not monitor the operation signal from the effect operation device 48 until the operation valid start command is received from the display side MPU 122, but monitors the operation signal by receiving the operation valid start command. It is a configuration to be performed. As a result, the sound-light side MPU 112 does not need to constantly monitor the operation signal from the effect operation device 48, and the monitoring burden can be reduced.

The sound light side MPU 112 transmits an operation generation command when the effect operation device 48 is operated during the operation valid period, and the display side MPU 122 refers to the pattern data table when the operation generation command is received. Then, it is determined whether or not the timing at which the operation occurrence command is received is within the operation valid period defined in the pattern data table. As a result, whether or not the operation of the effect operation device 48 is during the operation valid period is determined not only by the sound light side MPU 112 but also by the display side MPU 122, and the effect operation device 48 is in the operation valid period. It is possible to accurately monitor whether or not the operation has been performed.

When the display side MPU 122 receives the operation occurrence command from the sound light side MPU 112 during the operation valid period, the display side MPU 122 transmits the operation valid command indicating that the operation was valid to the sound light side MPU 112. Then, the sound / light side MPU 112 cancels the monitoring of the presence / absence of the operation of the effect operation device 48 by receiving the operation valid command. As a result, the sound-light side MPU 112 can cancel the monitoring of the presence or absence of the operation of the effect operation device 48 without waiting for the start of the operation effect, and the monitoring burden on the sound-light side MPU 112 can be reduced.

When the sound / light side MPU 112 receives the operation valid command from the display side MPU 122, the sound / light side MPU 112 transmits an execution permission command to the display side MPU 122. Then, the display side MPU 122 starts the operation effect by receiving the execution permission command. As a result, it is possible to start the operation effect after confirming that the operation valid command is normally received by the sound light side MPU 112 on the display side MPU 122.

When the display side MPU 122 starts the operation effect, the operation effect command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 112, and the sound light side MPU 112 receives the operation effect command to correspond to the operation effect executed by the symbol display device 31. Then, the operation effects are also executed in the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 and the speaker unit 45. This makes it possible to reliably synchronize these operation effects.

<Light emission control in the sound light side MPU 112>
Next, the contents of the light emission control of the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 executed by the sound light side MPU 112 will be described.

The sound light side MPU 112 uses the light emission data group 151 stored in advance in the sound light side ROM 113 when controlling the light emission of the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73. Further, in this use, a part of the light emitting data group 151 is read out to the light emitting data area 162 provided in the display side RAM 124 and used. The light emitting data group 151 and the light emitting data area 162 will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 to 27. FIG. 25A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data configuration of the light emitting data group 151, and FIG. 25B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the light emitting data area 162. 26 (a) to 26 (d) and 27 are explanatory views for explaining the content of each data included in the light emitting data group 151.

As shown in FIG. 25A, the light emitting data group 151 includes a palette data group 151a, a start position data group 151b, a total time data group 151c, a duration data group 151d, and a list data group 151e. , The group data group 151f and the data selection table 151g exist.

In the palette data group 151a, there are a large number of palette data showing the emission color switching pattern. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 26A, in palette data 0, a switching pattern based on two emission colors is defined. Specifically, a pattern for switching to the white emission color next to the blue emission color is defined, and when the palette data 0 is continuously selected, the white emission color is followed by the blue emission. It will return to color. Therefore, in the palette data 0, the emission color switching pattern of blue → white → blue → white → blue → ... Is defined.

Further, in the palette data 1, a switching pattern with five emission colors is defined, and in the palette data 2, a switching pattern with three emission colors is defined. However, in the palette data 1, one round of the switching pattern is defined as a pattern in which the set five emission colors are displayed once, whereas in the palette data 2, the switching pattern 1 is set. The circumference is defined as a pattern for displaying at least one of the three set emission colors two or more times. Specifically, in palette data 1, a switching pattern of emission colors such as red → blue → green → yellow → white → red → blue → green → ... is defined, and in palette data 2, red → blue → A switching pattern of emission colors such as red → green → blue → green → blue → red → blue → red → ... is defined. In addition, there are many palette data other than the above palette data 0 to 2.

In each palette data, the identification information of the serial number is defined on a one-to-one basis for each emission color data to be switched. The identification information corresponds to start position data indicating from which order of emission color the emission control is started when the emission control of one LED 71a to 73a is started by using the palette data.

The start position data group 151b includes a target when switching the emission color for each of the LEDs 71a to 73a included in the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 to be the emission control target by using any of the palette data. There are a large number of start position data indicating from which order of emission colors the emission control is started out of the series of emission colors defined in the palette data. Here, when the sound light side MPU 112 controls the light emission of each light emitting unit group 71 to 73, the palette data and the start position data are basically set in units of the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73. In this case, the start position data is data indicating the start position of the emission color individually for each of the LEDs 71a to 73a included in the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73, while the LED 71a to 73a among the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 The numbers are different. Therefore, the start position data is individually set for those having different numbers of LEDs 71a to 73a in each of the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73.

The start position data will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 26 (b). The start position data 0 and the start position data 1 shown in FIG. 26B are examples of start position data applied to the second light emitting unit group 72 in which 16 LEDs 72a are present. In each of the start position data 0 and the start position data 1, the start position number is determined so that each of the bits 0 to 15 has a one-to-one correspondence. In this case, each of the bits 0 to 15 corresponds to any one of the first LED 72a to the 16th LED 72a out of the 16 LEDs 72a. Then, when starting the emission color switching effect in each LED 72a, the emission colors in the order corresponding to the start position numbers set in the corresponding bits are specified from the palette data to be used, and the specified emission colors are specified. The emission color is switched sequentially from the beginning.

For example, when the start position data 0 is applied to the palette data 0, the first LED 72a to the eighth LED 72a of the second light emitting unit group 72 are started from white, and the ninth LED 72a to the 16th LED 72a are started. Starts from blue. On the other hand, when the start position data 1 is applied to the palette data 0, the first LED 72a to the eighth LED 72a of the second light emitting unit group 72 are started from blue, and the ninth LED 72a to the 16th LED 72a are started. Starts from white.

In the total time data group 151c, there are a large number of total time data that can specify the total time in which one palette data is used. For example, if the time required for the selected palette data switching pattern to make one round is shorter than the total time, the switching pattern is repeated until the total time elapses.

In the duration data group 151d, there are a large number of duration data that can specify the duration of the state in which one emission color is lit when the emission color is switched according to the selected palette data. For example, when the duration data of 2 sec is selected in the situation where the palette data 0 of FIG. 26 (a) is selected, the emission color is maintained in blue for 2 sec in one LED and the emission color is white. The state of being maintained for 2 seconds will be repeated.

A large number of list data exists in the list data group 151e. Basically, one palette data is used for one light emitting group 71 to 73, except when a plurality of palette data are used simultaneously for one light emitting group 71 to 73. , The types of the plurality of palette data are defined in one list data. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 26C, in the list data 0, the pallet data 0, the pallet data 1, and the pallet data 2 are set as the pallet data to be used. Further, in the list data 1, pallet data 10, pallet data 11, pallet data 12, and pallet data 13 are set as pallet data to be used.

In each list data, a list number of serial numbers is defined to be one-to-one with respect to the pallet data to be used. For the list number, when the palette data to be used for each of the LEDs 71a to 73a included in one light emitting unit group 71 to 73 is selected by using the list data, any palette data is used for each of the LEDs 71a to 73a. It corresponds to the specified data indicating whether or not.

A large number of group data exist in the group data group 151f. When list data is used for one light emitting unit group 71 to 73 as group data, each palette set in the list data is set for each LED 71a to 73a included in one light emitting unit group 71 to 73. Data indicating which of the data to use is set. Here, the group data is data that individually indicates the palette data to be used for each of the LEDs 71a to 73a included in the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73, while the number of LEDs 71a to 73a among the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 is It's different. Therefore, the group data is individually set for those having different numbers of LEDs 71a to 73a in each of the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73.

The group data will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 26 (d). Group data 0 and group data 1 shown in FIG. 26D are examples of group data applied to the second light emitting unit group 72 in which 16 LEDs 72a are present. In each of the group data 0 and the group data 1, a list number is determined so that each of the bits 0 to 15 has a one-to-one correspondence. In this case, each of the bits 0 to 15 corresponds to any one of the first LED 72a to the 16th LED 72a out of the 16 LEDs 72a. Then, when selecting the pallet data to be used for each LED 72a, the pallet data in the order corresponding to the list number set in the corresponding bit is specified from the list data to be used, and the specified pallet data is used. do.

For example, when group data 0 is applied to list data 0, palette data 0 is selected as a target for use from the first LED 72a to the eighth LED 72a of the second light emitting unit group 72, and the ninth LEDs 72a to 16 are used. Palette data 1 is selected as a target for use up to the third LED 72a. On the other hand, when the group data 1 is applied to the list data 1, the pallet data 10 is selected as the object to be used from the first LED 72a to the fourth LED 72a of the second light emitting unit group 72, and the fifth LEDs 72a to 8 are used. The pallet data 11 is selected as the target for use up to the th LED 72a, the pallet data 12 is selected as the target for use from the ninth LED 72a to the twelfth LED 72a, and the pallet data 13 is selected from the thirteenth LED 72a to the sixteenth LED 72a. Is selected for use.

The data selection table 151g is data in which a combination of data used for light emission control of each light emitting unit group 71 to 73 is defined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 27, in the data selection table 151g, request numbers used when specifying a combination of data to be used are set for the number of types of the combination, and each request number is set. Correspondingly, the type of palette data, the type of start position data, the type of total time data, the type of duration data, the type of list data, and the type of group data are set.

However, as already described, one palette data is basically used for one light emitting group group 71 to 73, except that a plurality of palettes are used for one light emitting group group 71 to 73. Data is used at the same time. In the data selection table 151g, the request number corresponding to the basic combination and the request number corresponding to the exception combination are individually set. Specifically, request numbers 0 to 10 correspond to basic combinations, and the basic combinations include the types of palette data, the types of start position data, the types of total time data, and the duration data. The type is defined, but the type of list data and the type of group data are not defined. On the other hand, request numbers 120 to 130 and the like correspond to exception combinations, and the exception combinations include the type of start position data, the type of total time data, the type of duration data, and the type of list data. The type of group data is defined, and the type of palette data is not defined.

Next, the light emission data area 162 will be described with reference to FIG. 25 (b).

In the light emission data area 162, each data included in the combination specified by using the request number is read from the data selection table 151g, and light emission data is created using each of these data. The light emission data corresponds to a part of the production of one game when it is used for the game, and when it is used for the opening / closing execution mode, it corresponds to a part of the production of the opening / closing execution mode. It corresponds. On the other hand, when it is used for notification, it corresponds to the entire notification.

Various types of light emission data will be created in the light emission data area 162, and these light emission data are stored in different areas in the light emission data area 162 for each predetermined division. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 25B, the light emitting data area 162 is provided with a base area 162a, an interrupt area 162b, and a notification area 162c.

Light emission data for normal production is stored in the base area 162a. Examples of the situation in which the light emission data for the normal effect is used include a situation in which the advance notice display and the reach display are not performed when the game is played on the symbol display device 31. The base area 162a is provided with an area corresponding to the first light emitting unit group 71, the second light emitting unit group 72, and the third light emitting unit group 73 on a one-to-one basis, and corresponds to each light emitting unit group 71 to 73. Light emission data for normal production is stored individually.

In the base area 162a, for example, in the case of light emission data for game rounds, only one light emitting data is stored for each of the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 in one game round, and one game round. Inside, the execution of the emission color switching pattern using the one emission data is repeated. Further, for example, in the case of light emission data for the open / close execution mode, only one light emission data is stored for each of the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 in one open / close execution mode, and in one open / close execution mode, only one light emission data is stored. The execution of the emission color switching pattern using the one emission data is repeated. In these cases, data having no time limit is selected as the total time data in the combination data for creating the light emission data.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of normal effect light emission data such as the light emission data of the normal effect on the first half side and the light emission data of the normal effect on the second half side can be set during one game. The light emission data of the normal effect other than the notice display and the reach display, the light emission data of the normal effect for the notice display, the light emission data of the normal effect for the reach display, and the light emission data of the normal effect for the final stop display. It may be configured in which and is set. Such a configuration in which a plurality of light emission data of the normal effect can be set during the series of effect may be applied to the open / close execution mode.

In the interrupt area 162b, data used for light emission control for interrupt effect, which is prioritized over light emission control for normal effect, is stored. Examples of the situation in which the light emission data for the interrupt effect is used include a situation in which a notice display and a reach display are performed when the game is played on the symbol display device 31. Further, the situation in which the light emission data for the interrupt effect is used includes the situation in which the final effect is performed. Further, there is a situation where the promotion effect is performed in the open / close execution mode. The interrupt area 162b is provided with an area corresponding to the first light emitting unit group 71, the second light emitting unit group 72, and the third light emitting unit group 73 on a one-to-one basis, and corresponds to each light emitting unit group 71 to 73. The light emission data for interrupt effect is stored individually.

In the interrupt area 162b, for example, in the case of light emission data for game rounds, there are a plurality of light emission data that can be stored for each of the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 in one game round, and one game. During the rotation, the plurality of light emission data are appropriately rewritten in each of the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73. Further, for example, in the case of light emission data for the open / close execution mode, the plurality of light emission data are appropriately rewritten in each of the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 in one open / close execution mode. These rewrites are performed according to the priority between the light emission data. The content of the priority of this rewriting will be described in detail later.

In the notification area 162c, data used for light emission control for notification, which is prioritized over light emission control for interrupt effect, is stored. The situation in which the light emission data for notification is used is when the occurrence of the notification target event in the pachinko machine 10 is detected and the notification command is transmitted from the main MPU 92. The notification area 162c is provided with an area corresponding to the first light emitting unit group 71, the second light emitting unit group 72, and the third light emitting unit group 73 on a one-to-one basis, and corresponds to each light emitting unit group 71 to 73. The light emission data for notification is stored individually.

In the notification area 162c, only one light emission data is stored for each of the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 when the notification target event occurs, and the one light emission in the situation where the notification target event occurs. Execution of the emission color switching pattern using the data will be repeated. In this case, in the combination data for creating the light emission data, data having no time limit is selected as the total time data. The situation of using the light emission data for notification continues until a release command is received from the main MPU 92.

<Read processing of light emission data of MPU 112 on the sound light side>
Next, the process of reading the light emission data in steps S1202, S1208, and S1212 in the display-side command correspondence process (FIG. 22) of the sound-light side MPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 28. The light emission data reading process is individually executed for each of the first light emitting unit group 71, the second light emitting unit group 72, and the third light emitting unit group 73. In the following description of the light emitting data reading process, the process for the second light emitting unit group 72 will be described as an example, but the same is basically true for the first light emitting unit group 71 and the third light emitting unit group 73.

First, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the area for writing the light emission data is the notification area 162c. In the case of the notification area 162c, in step S1402, the type of combination of various data corresponding to the request number included in the notification command received this time is specified from the data selection table 151g, and the specified combination type is used. The corresponding various data are read from the sound / light side ROM 113. Then, in step S1403, the data expansion process is executed using the various read data, and the light emission data is written in the notification area 162c. In this case, since the same type of data is read regardless of the content of the received notification command, the same light emission data is written. That is, regardless of the event to be notified, the second light emitting unit group 72 will be notified in the same manner.

After that, in step S1404, after setting 1 to the notification setting flag on the light emitting side provided in the RAM 114 on the sound light side, this read-out process ends. The notification setting flag on the light emitting side is a flag for the sound light side MPU 112 to specify whether or not light emission data exists in the notification area 162c. The state in which 1 is set in the notification setting flag on the light emitting side is cleared by receiving the release command from the main MPU 92 in the release setting process of step S627 of the main command correspondence process (FIG. 15). At this time, the light emission data stored in the notification area 162c is cleared.

If a negative determination is made in step S1401, it is determined in step S1405 whether or not the area for writing the light emission data is the base area 162a. In the case of the base area 162a, in step S1406, the type of combination of various data corresponding to the request number included in the command received this time is specified from the data selection table 151g, and the type of the specified combination is supported. The various data are read from the sound / light side ROM 113. Then, in step S1407, the data expansion process is executed using the various read data, and the light emission data is written in the base area 162a. After that, the main reading process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S1405, it is determined in step S1408 whether or not the light emission data to be written this time corresponds to the final effect. When the finalized effect is supported, in step S1409, the type of the combination of various data corresponding to the request number for the finalized effect this time is specified from the data selection table 151g, and the type of the specified combination is supported. The various data are read from the sound / light side ROM 113. Then, in step S1410, the data expansion process is executed using the various read data, and the light emission data is written in the interrupt area 162b. After that, in step S1411, 1 is set in the interrupt setting flag provided in the sound light side RAM 114, and the light emission side priority data corresponding to the light emission data for the final effect is read from the sound light side ROM 113 to the sound light side. After writing to the RAM 114, the main read process is terminated.

The interrupt setting flag is a flag for the sound / light side MPU 112 to specify whether or not light emission data exists in the interrupt area 162b. Further, the light emitting side priority data already exists when the light emitting data already exists in the interrupt area 162b and a new light emitting data writing instruction is given to the interrupt area 162b. This is data for determining the priority when deciding whether to use the light emission data as it is as the light emission data for interrupts or to use the light emission data newly written instructed as the light emission data for interrupts. As for the light emitting side priority data, the light emitting data corresponding to the final effect has the highest priority, and thereafter, for the effect for the game round, the light emitting data with the higher expectation of the jackpot result of the target effect has priority. The degree is set to be high, and for the effect for the open / close execution mode, the light emission data corresponding to the promotion effect is set to have a higher priority.

If a negative determination is made in step S1408, the light emitting side priority data P1 corresponding to the light emitting data set in the current interrupt area 162b is read in step S1412, and this time is written in the following step S1413. The light emitting side priority data P2 corresponding to the instructed light emitting data is read out. Then, in step S1414, by determining whether or not P2> P1, the light emission data for which the write instruction is given this time has priority over the light emission data set in the current interrupt area 162b. Determine if the degree is high.

If the light emission data is not set in the current interrupt area 162b, an affirmative determination is made in step S1414, and the light emission data for which the writing instruction is given this time is written in the interrupt area 162b.

When a negative determination is made in step S1414, it means that the light emission data set in the current interrupt area 162b has a higher priority. Therefore, the main read process is completed without writing the light emission data for which the write instruction is given this time to the interrupt area 162b.

On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S1414, it means that the light emission data for which the writing instruction is given this time has a higher priority. Therefore, in step S1415, the type of the combination of various data corresponding to the request number targeted for the writing instruction this time is specified from the data selection table 151g, and the various data corresponding to the type of the specified combination is sounded. Read from the side ROM 113. Then, in step S1416, the data expansion process is executed using the various read data, and the light emission data is written in the interrupt area 162b. After that, in step S1417, 1 is set in the interrupt setting flag provided in the sound / light side RAM 114, and the light emitting side priority data corresponding to the light emission data newly written this time is read from the sound / light side ROM 113 for sound light. After writing to the side RAM 114, the main read process is terminated.

The request number referred to in step S1415 is read from the command when the process of step S1415 is executed in response to the command received from the display side MPU 122, and will be described later in the sound light side MPU 112. When the process of step S1415 is executed due to the execution of the movable object control process (FIG. 37), it is set in the movable object control process.

FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the data expansion process started in the case of step S1403, step S1407, step S1410 and step S1416.

First, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not the data to be expanded is a basic combination. In the case of the basic combination, in step S1502, the value of the creation target bit provided in the sound light side RAM 114 is set to "0". As a result, the first LED 72a of the second light emitting unit group 72 becomes the target for creating light emission data.

In the following step S1503, the start position number of the creation target bit is acquired from the start position data read corresponding to the request number. Then, by referring to the pallet data read in correspondence with the request number in step S1504, the switching pattern is read out with reference to the start position number acquired in step S1503.

In the following step S1505, the duration data is converted into pointer information and set, and in step S1506, the total time data is converted into pointer information and set. Here, the sound / light side MPU 112 is configured to execute the light emission control process by the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) started in a cycle of 4 msec, and the pointer information of the light emission data is set to 1 in each process of the light emission control process. Update. Therefore, in step S1505 and step S1506, conversion to the pointer information is performed so that the value of the quotient when the duration data and the total time data are divided by 4 msec becomes the respective final pointer information.

Incidentally, when data with no time limit is set as the total time data, it is assumed that the total time data does not exist, and data for one cycle of the emission color switching pattern is created as the emission data. On the other hand, when data other than data with no time limit, that is, data with a time limit is set as total time data, the final pointer information is used when the time corresponding to the total time data elapses. The switching pattern of the emission color for the total time data is set so as to be. In this case, if the total time data exceeds the time for one cycle of the emission color switching pattern in relation to the duration data, the emission color switching pattern for exceeding one cycle is set. It becomes.

By executing the processes of steps S1503 to S1506, light emission data for the LED corresponding to the current value of the creation target bit is created. After that, by adding 1 to the value of the creation target bit in step S1507, the creation target of the light emission data is updated to the LED in the next order. Then, in step S1508, it is determined whether or not the value of the creation target bit exceeds the number of LEDs included in the second light emitting unit group 72.

When a negative determination is made in step S1508, light emission data is created by executing the processes of steps S1503 to S1506 for the LED corresponding to the updated value of the creation target bit. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1508, each light emission data created this time is written in the area to be written among the base area 162a, the interrupt area 162b, and the notification area 162c in step S1509. After that, this data expansion process is terminated.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1501, the process proceeds to step S1510. In step S1510, the value of the creation target bit of the sound light side RAM 114 is set to "0". As a result, the first LED 72A of the second light emitting unit group 72 becomes the target for creating light emission data.

In the following step S1511, the list number of the bit to be created is acquired from the group data read corresponding to the request number. Then, by referring to the list data read corresponding to the request number in step S1512, the palette data corresponding to the list number acquired in step S1511 is read from the sound / light side ROM 113.

After that, in step S1513, the start position number of the creation target bit is acquired from the start position data read corresponding to the request number, and in step S1514, the palette data read in step S1512 is referred to. The switching pattern is read out with reference to the start position number acquired in step S1513. In the following step S1515, the duration data is converted into pointer information and set, and in step S1516, the total time data is converted into pointer information and set.

By executing the processes of steps S151 to S1516, light emission data for the LED corresponding to the current value of the creation target bit is created. In particular, in this case, the combination data read corresponding to the request number is an exception combination, and the light emission data is created using the group data and the list data. Therefore, each LED 72a of the second light emitting unit group 72a. It is possible to create light emission data based on different palette data for each of the above, and the light emission patterns can be diversified.

After that, by adding 1 to the value of the creation target bit in step S1517, the creation target of the light emission data is updated to the LED in the next order. Then, in step S1518, it is determined whether or not the value of the creation target bit exceeds the number of LEDs included in the second light emitting unit group 72.

When a negative determination is made in step S1518, light emission data is created by executing the processes of steps S151 to S1516 for the LED corresponding to the updated value of the creation target bit. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1518, each light emission data created this time is written in the area to be written among the base area 162a, the interrupt area 162b, and the notification area 162c in step S1519. After that, this data expansion process is terminated.

An example of light emission data created when the above data expansion process is executed will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 30 is light emission data created when the palette data 0 of FIG. 26 (a) and the start position data 0 of FIG. 26 (b) are applied to each LED 72a of the second light emitting unit group 72. This is an example of light emission data stored in the base area 162a of the light emission data area 162. In this case, since the emission color is set twice in the palette data 0, the pointer information is set in sequence so that the number corresponding to twice the time corresponding to the duration data becomes the final pointer information. Will be done. More specifically, in palette data 0, a switching pattern of emission colors from blue to white is set, and 4 sec is set as duration data, so that the final pointer information is set to "1999". Pointer information is set in sequence. Further, the LED 72a corresponding to the bits 0 to 7 creates light emission data in which the blue light emission color is continued for 4 seconds and then the white light emission color is continued for 4 seconds, and the LED 72a corresponding to the bits 8 to 15 is white. After the emission color is continued for 4 seconds, emission data is created in which the blue emission color is continued for 4 seconds.

<Light emission control processing of MPU 112 on the sound light side>
Next, the light emission control process in step S505 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) of the sound light side MPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 31. The light emission control process is individually executed for each of the first light emitting unit group 71, the second light emitting unit group 72, and the third light emitting unit group 73. In the following description of the light emitting control process, the process for the second light emitting unit group 72 will be described as an example, but the same is basically true for the first light emitting unit group 71 and the third light emitting unit group 73.

First, in step S1601, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the notification setting flag of the sound / light side RAM 114. When "1" is set in the notification setting flag, in step S1602, each LED 72a of the second light emitting unit group 72 is emitted based on the data corresponding to the current pointer information in the light emission data of the notification area 162c. Control.

If a negative determination is made in step S1601, it is determined in step S1603 whether or not "1" is set in the interrupt setting flag of the sound / light side RAM 114. When "1" is set in the interrupt setting flag, in step S1604, each LED 72a of the second light emitting unit group 72 is emitted based on the data corresponding to the current pointer information in the light emission data of the interrupt area 162b. Control.

If a negative determination is made in step S1603, each LED 72a of the second light emitting unit group 72 is controlled to emit light based on the data corresponding to the current pointer information in the light emission data of the base area 162a in step S1605.

That is, light emission data can be stored at the same time in each of the base area 162a, the interrupt area 162b, and the notification area 162c of the light emission data area 162, but the base area 162a, the interrupt area 162b, and the notification area 162c of these light emission data areas 162c can be stored at the same time. Of these, the light emission data stored in the notification area 162c has the highest priority in light emission control. As a result, it is possible to prioritize the notification over the execution of the effect, and it is possible to make the manager of the game hall recognize that the notification target event such as an abnormality has occurred in the pachinko machine 10. When the light emission data is not stored in the notification area 162c, the light emission data stored in the interrupt area 162b has the next priority in the light emission control. As a result, priority is given to the execution of the final effect and the effect having a high degree of expectation, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the effect in the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73.

After executing the processes of step S1602, step S1604, or step S1605, in step S1606, the pointer information is the final pointer among the light emission data stored in the base area 162a, the interrupt area 162b, and the notification area 162c. It is determined whether or not the light emission data that is the information exists. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1606, it is determined in step S1607 whether or not the area that is the final pointer information is the base area 162a or the notification area 162c. In the case of the base area 162a or the notification area 162c, in step S1608, the pointer information of the light emission data which is the final pointer information is returned to the start pointer information. By executing the restoration process, the update of the pointer information of the light emission data to be restored is repeated.

If a negative determination is made in step S1607, the interrupt setting flag of the sound / light side RAM 114 is cleared to "0" and the interrupt area 162b is cleared in step S1609. That is, the light emission data stored in the interrupt area 162b is cleared by becoming the final pointer information.

When a negative determination is made in step S1606, when the process of step S1608 is executed, or when the process of step S1609 is executed, in step S1610, the base area 162a, the interrupt area 162b, and the light emission data area 162 are executed. The pointer information update process is executed for each of the notification areas 162c. As a result, in the next processing round of the light emission control process, the light emission control is executed based on the data corresponding to the new pointer information. However, in the update processing of the pointer information, the light emitting data that is the target of the restoration processing to the start pointer information in step S1608 is excluded from the processing target. After that, the main light emission control process is terminated.

<How light emission is controlled>
Next, the state in which the light emission control is performed will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 32. FIG. 32 (a) shows the execution status of the normal effect, FIG. 32 (b) shows the execution status of the reach effect, FIG. 32 (c) shows the execution status of the final effect, and FIG. 32 (d) shows the notification. FIG. 32 (e) shows the execution status of the light emission, and shows whether or not a command (hereinafter, referred to as an interrupt setting command) indicating that the light emission data should be stored in the interrupt area 162b is received. In the following description, the light emission effect in the second light emitting unit group 72 will be described. Further, in FIG. 32, a surrounding line is attached to the light emission control mode actually selected.

By storing the light emission data in the base area 162a at the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 32 (a), the normal effect is started in the second light emitting unit group 72. Then, by receiving the interrupt setting command as shown in FIG. 32 (e) at the timing of t2, which is the situation where the normal effect is being executed, the light emission data corresponding to the reach effect is stored in the interrupt area 162b. Then, as shown in FIG. 32 (a), the normal effect is stopped, and as shown in FIG. 32 (b), the reach effect is started in the second light emitting unit group 72. However, even in a situation where the reach effect is performed by performing the light emission control using the light emission data stored in the interrupt area 162b, the pointer of the light emission data stored in the base area 162a Updates will continue.

After that, at the timing of t3, which is the situation where the reach effect is being executed, an interrupt setting command corresponding to the final effect is received as shown in FIG. 32 (e). Since the light emission data corresponding to the final effect has the highest priority among the light emission data stored in the interrupt area 162b, the light emission data corresponding to the final effect is overwritten in the interrupt area 162b, and FIG. 32 (c) shows. As shown in the above, the final effect is started in the second light emitting unit group 72. In this case, the light emission data corresponding to the reach effect previously stored in the interrupt area 162b is deleted. Further, even in a situation where the final effect is performed by performing the light emission control using the light emission data stored in the interrupt area 162b, the pointer of the light emission data stored in the base area 162a Updates will continue.

After that, at the timing of t4, which is the situation where the final effect is being executed, the interrupt setting command is received as shown in FIG. 32 (e). However, since the priority of the light emission data corresponding to the effect instructed by the interrupt setting command is lower than the priority of the light emission data corresponding to the final effect, the interrupt area 162b is not overwritten and the final effect is performed. The light emission data corresponding to the above will be used as it is.

After that, by receiving the notification command at the timing of t5, which is the situation where the final effect is being executed, the light emission data corresponding to the notification is stored in the notification area 162c. As a result, the finalizing effect is stopped as shown in FIG. 32 (c), and the notification is started in the second light emitting unit group 72 as shown in FIG. 32 (d). However, even in a situation where notification is performed by performing light emission control using light emission data stored in the notification area 162c, the pointer update of the light emission data stored in the base area 162a is performed. , And the pointer update of the light emission data stored in the interrupt area 162b is continued.

After that, by receiving the release command at the timing of t6, the notification area 162c is cleared and the notification setting flag on the light emitting side is cleared to "0". As a result, the notification is terminated as shown in FIG. 32 (d), and the final effect using the light emission data stored in the interrupt area 162b is restarted as shown in FIG. 32 (c). In this case, even in the situation where the notification is being performed, the pointer update of the light emission data stored in the interrupt area 162b has been continued. If not, it will be the same as the light emitting mode of the final effect at the relevant timing. Therefore, even if the notification is interrupted, the light emitting mode of the final effect in the second light emitting unit group 72 and the display mode of the final effect in the symbol display device 31 can be synchronized after the timing when the notification is canceled. It will be possible.

After that, when the final timing of the final effect is reached at the timing of t7, the interrupt area 162b is cleared and the interrupt setting flag is cleared to "0". As a result, the final effect is completed as shown in FIG. 32 (c), and the normal effect using the light emission data stored in the base area 162a is restarted as shown in FIG. 32 (a). Then, the normal effect is finished at the timing of t8.

<Sound output control in the sound light side MPU 112>
Next, the content of the sound output control of the speaker unit 45 executed by the sound light side MPU 112 will be described.

The sound light side MPU 112 uses the sound output data group 152 stored in advance in the sound light side ROM 113 when controlling the sound output of the speaker unit 45. Further, in this use, a part of the sound output data group 152 is read out to the sound output data area 163 provided in the sound light side RAM 114 and used. The sound output data group 152 and the sound output data area 163 will be described with reference to FIG. 33. FIG. 33A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data configuration of the sound output data group 152, and FIG. 33B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the sound output data area 163.

As shown in FIG. 33A, the sound output data group 152 includes a fluctuation base data group 152a, a notice effect start data group 152b, a notice effect end data group 152c, and a normal reach data group 152d. , Super reach data group 152e, final production data group 152f, fluctuation end data group 152g, notification occurrence data group 152h, opening data group 152i, round data group 152j, interval data. There are at least a group 152k, an ending data group 152l, a promotion effect data group 152m, and a curtain plate effect data group 152n.

In the variable base data group 152a, there are a plurality of sound output data for outputting a music that is repeated in a situation where the advance notice display and the reach display are not performed during the game. In the data group 152b at the start of the advance notice effect, there are a plurality of sound output data for outputting the music from the start of the advance notice display to the end of the advance notice display. In the data group 152c at the end of the advance notice effect, there are a plurality of sound output data for outputting the music when the advance notice display is ended. In the normal reach data group 152d, there are a plurality of sound output data for outputting the music repeated in the situation where the normal reach is performed. In the super reach data group 152e, there are a plurality of sound output data for outputting a musical piece or sound in a situation where super reach is being performed. In the final effect data group 152f, there are a plurality of sound output data for outputting a musical piece or sound in a situation where the final effect is being performed. In the variation end data group 152g, there are a plurality of sound output data for outputting a musical piece when the variation display of the symbol is terminated during the game. In the notification generation data group 152h, there are a plurality of notification sounds for performing notification or sound output data for outputting voice. In the opening data group 152i, there are a plurality of sound output data for outputting a musical piece in a situation where the opening effect is performed in the opening / closing execution mode. In the round data group 152j, there are a plurality of sound output data for outputting a musical piece in a situation where the effect during the round game is being performed in the open / close execution mode. In the interval data group 152k, there are a plurality of sound output data for outputting a musical piece in a situation where the effect during the interval is performed in the open / close execution mode. In the ending data group 152l, there are a plurality of sound output data for outputting a musical piece or sound in a situation where the ending effect is performed in the opening / closing execution mode. In the promotion effect data group 152m, there are a plurality of sound output data for outputting a musical piece or sound in a situation where the promotion effect is performed in the open / close execution mode. In the curtain plate effect data group 152n, there are a plurality of sound output data for outputting sound effects when the third stage effect described later using the curtain plate movable object 52 is performed during the game rotation.

That is, the sound output data group 152 is not set as it is with the sound output data for the entire series of effects that are started at a predetermined trigger such as the effect for the game round and the effect for the open / close execution mode. In the series of effects, the sound output data for the entire series of effects is divided for each range in which the progress of the effects is different (for example, the range in which the types of characters that appear are different or the range in which the variation display of the symbol changes). It is set. Then, a plurality of types of sound output data are set for each divided data. Therefore, when performing the effect for the game round or the effect for the open / close execution mode, the divided data corresponding to the command transmitted from the main side MPU 92 or the display side MPU 122 is read, and the sound output control is performed according to the read divided data. Will be done.

By the way, in the state where the sound output data is expanded in the sound / light side RAM 114, the pointer information corresponding to the output duration for one cycle of the music, voice or notification sound set in the sound output data, and each of them. It includes output content data that has a one-to-one correspondence with pointer information. A signal corresponding to the output content data set corresponding to the pointer information is output to the speaker unit 45, and the content of the signal output is changed each time the pointer information is updated to output sound. The music, voice, or notification sound corresponding to the data will be output.

Next, the sound output data area 163 will be described with reference to FIG. 33 (b).

The sound output data area 163 is provided with a plurality of sound output areas 171 to 186 so that a plurality of sound output data can be read out at the same time and set as a control target. Specifically, 16 first sound output areas 171 to 16th sound output areas 186 are provided. As a result, even if a new sound output data read command is issued in a situation where sound output control is performed using the predetermined sound output data, the predetermined sound output data is read into the sound / light side RAM 114. The new sound output data can be read out to the sound / light side RAM 114 while maintaining the above. Further, the number of sound output areas 171 to 186 is set to be equal to or larger than the maximum number of sound output data in which read commands can be issued at the same time.

<Read processing of sound output data of MPU 112 on the sound light side>
Next, the process of reading the sound output data in steps S1202, S1208, and S1214 in the display-side command-corresponding process (FIG. 22) of the sound-light side MPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 34.

First, in step S1701, it is determined whether or not the reading process is performed when the notification command is received. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1701, in step S1702, the sound output data corresponding to the content of the received notification command is input to the notification occurrence data group 152h in the sound output data group 152 of the sound light side ROM 113. Read from inside. Then, in step S1703, the read sound output data is stored in the first sound output area 171 to the 16th sound output area 186 in the sound output data area 163, which is the largest of the sound output areas in which the sound output data is not stored. Write to the upper area. After that, in step S1704, the sound output side priority data for notification corresponding to the sound output data read this time is read from the sound / light side ROM 113, and the correspondence with the sound output area to be written in step S1703. Is written to the sound / light side RAM 114 in a state where the above can be specified.

The sound output side priority data is a sound indicating which sound output area the sound output data is to be controlled for in a situation where the sound output data is stored in a plurality of sound output areas 171 to 186. This is data for determining the priority when the optical side MPU 112 determines. As for the sound output side priority data, the sound output data corresponding to the notification has the highest priority, then the sound output data corresponding to the finalized effect has the highest priority. , The sound output data with the higher expectation of the jackpot result of the target effect is set to have a higher priority, and for the effect for the open / close execution mode, the sound output data corresponding to the promotion effect has priority. The degree is set to be high.

Incidentally, the sound output side priority data corresponds to the priority between the base area 162a, the interrupt area 162b and the notification area 162c in the light emission data area 162, and the light emission side priority data, and is prioritized in the light emission control. It is configured so that the event executed in the process and the event executed with priority in the sound output control are the same. Therefore, the execution contents of the light emission control and the sound output control match.

In the following step S1705, it is determined whether or not the sound output side priority data for notification is already set in the sound light side RAM 114. If it has not already been set, this reading process is terminated as it is. If it has already been set, the output start timing adjustment process is executed in step S1706, and then the read process ends.

Here, in the notification in the speaker unit 45, the notification sound or the notification voice corresponding to each event to be notified is output. That is, the sound output data is set in the notification occurrence data group 152h in a one-to-one correspondence with the event to be notified, and the events to be notified are duplicated. In this case, the sound output data for notification corresponding to each event is stored in different sound output areas. In this case, the sound output data for each notification is set so that the priority data on the sound output side has the same priority, and in step S1706, the output start timing of each sound output data is shifted to obtain them. All of each sound output data is subject to sound output control. Specifically, the start pointer information is adjusted so that the newly set sound output data for notification is subject to sound output control following the already set sound output data for notification. Further, in the situation where the notification state of the pachinko machine 10 is not released, the notification is repeated, but when a plurality of sound output data for notification are set, notifications targeting different events are continuously performed. The output state will be repeated.

The sound output data for notification is cleared when a release command indicating that the event to be notified corresponding to the sound output data has been released is received from the main MPU 92. At this time, the priority data on the sound output side for notification is also cleared.

If a negative determination is made in step S1701, it is determined in step S1707 whether or not there are a plurality of sound output data to be read out this time. The speaker unit 45 outputs a sound according to the content of the moving image in the symbol display device 31, but when the notice display is performed in the production for the game round, the notice display starts and the notice display is displayed. A sound with different contents is output depending on the end. On the other hand, the display side MPU 122 does not output a command to the sound light side MPU 112 at each timing, but outputs a command corresponding to the notice display only at the timing corresponding to the start of the notice display. Therefore, when the sound / light side MPU 112 receives the command corresponding to the notice display, the sound output data corresponding to the start of the notice display and the sound output data corresponding to the end of the notice display are read out.

Specifically, in step S1708, the sound output data on the front side is read from the sound output data group 152 of the sound light side ROM 113, and the read sound output data is read in the sound output data area 163 in step S1709. The first sound output area 171 to the 16th sound output area 186 is written in the highest area of the sound output areas in which the sound output data is not stored. After that, in step S1710, the sound output side priority data corresponding to the sound output data read this time can be read from the sound light side ROM 113, and the correspondence relationship with the sound output area to be written in step S1709 can be specified. In this state, the data is written to the sound / light side RAM 114.

After that, in step S1711, the rear sound output data is read from the sound output data group 152 of the sound light side ROM 113, and the read sound output data is read out in step S1712 as the first sound in the sound output data area 163. The sound output area 171 to 16th sound output area 186 is written in the highest area of the sound output areas in which sound output data is not stored. After that, in step S1713, the sound output side priority data corresponding to the sound output data read this time can be read from the sound light side ROM 113, and the correspondence relationship with the sound output area to be written in step S1712 can be specified. In this state, the data is written to the sound / light side RAM 114.

In the following step S1714, "1" is set in the output standby flag provided in the sound / light side RAM 114, and the output standby area is set. The output standby flag is a flag for the sound light side MPU 112 to specify that there is sound output data that is waiting to be the target of sound output control, and is used in the output standby area setting process. The data for specifying the sound output area in which the standby sound output data is stored is set, and the output start timing of the standby sound output data is set. After that, the main reading process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S1707, the sound output data corresponding to the current read processing is read from the sound output data group 152 of the sound light side ROM 113 in step S1715, and the read sound output data is displayed. In step S1716, the sound output data area 163 is written in the uppermost area of the first sound output area 171 to the 16th sound output area 186 in which the sound output data is not stored. After that, in step S1717, the sound output side priority data corresponding to the sound output data read this time can be read from the sound light side ROM 113, and the correspondence relationship with the sound output area to be written in step S1716 can be specified. In this state, the data is written to the sound / light side RAM 114.

In the following step S1718, "1" is set in the output standby flag provided in the sound / light side RAM 114, and the output standby area is set. The output standby flag is a flag for the sound light side MPU 112 to specify that there is sound output data that is waiting to be the target of sound output control, and is used in the output standby area setting process. The data for specifying the sound output area in which the standby sound output data is stored is set, and the output start timing of the standby sound output data is set. After that, the main reading process is terminated.

<Sound output control processing of MPU 112 on the sound light side>
Next, the sound output control process in step S506 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) of the sound light side MPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 35.

First, in step S1801, among the sound output areas to be updated in the first sound output area 171 to the 16th sound output area 186 in the sound output data area 163 of the sound light side RAM 114, the higher level (the first sound output area 171 is the highest). The 16th sound output area 186 is the lowest side), and each sound output side priority data set in the two sound output areas is read out. Here, the sound output area to be updated is a sound output area in which sound output data is stored, and is not in a sound output area in which an output start timing is set, that is, a standby state for sound output control. The sound output area. In the following step S1802, which of the read out sound output side priority data has the higher priority is specified, and in step S1803, the sound output area on the higher priority side is set as the output area.

In the following step S1804, the sound output side priority data of the sound output area on the upper side is read next for the sound output area to be updated, and in step S1805, the sound output side priority data of the output area is read out. Then, in step S1806, which of the read out sound output side priority data has the higher priority is specified, and in step S1807, the sound output area on the higher priority side is set as the output area. do.

After that, in step S1808, it is determined whether or not the comparison processing of the sound output side priority data is completed for all the sound output areas to be updated. If a negative determination is made in step S1808, the processes of steps S1804 to S1807 are repeated, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S1808, the process proceeds to step S1809.

In step S1809, the speaker unit 45 controls the sound output based on the data corresponding to the current pointer information in the sound output data stored in the sound output area set in the output area. In this case, in one sound output control process, only one sound output data is subject to sound output control, and the sound output data stored in the other update target sound output areas is not subject to sound output control. That is, the sound output data is in a mute setting state.

In the following step S1810, it is determined whether or not there is sound output data whose pointer information is the final pointer information among the sound output data stored in the sound output area to be updated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1810, it is determined in step S1811 whether or not the sound output data that is the final pointer information is the base data or the data at the time of notification occurrence. If it is the base data or the data at the time of notification occurrence, in step S1812, the pointer information of the sound output data which is the final pointer information is returned to the start pointer information. By executing the restoration process, the pointer information of the sound output data to be restored is repeatedly updated.

It should be noted that the identification of whether it is the base data or the data at the time of notification generation is performed by using the sound output side priority data. That is, the sound output side priority data can be used not only for comparing priorities but also for specifying the type of sound output data.

If a negative determination is made in step S1811, in step S1813, the sound output data that is the final pointer information is cleared, and the sound output in the sound output area in which the sound output data is stored is output. Executes the side priority data clearing process. That is, the sound output data other than the base data and the data when the notification is generated is cleared by becoming the final pointer information.

When a negative determination is made in step S1810, when the process of step S1812 is executed, or when the process of step S1813 is executed, in step S1814, the first sound output area 171 to the 16th sound output area 186 The pointer information is updated for each of the areas to be updated. As a result, in the next processing round of the sound output control processing, the sound output control is executed based on the data corresponding to the new pointer information. However, in the update processing of the pointer information, the sound output data that is the target of the return processing to the start pointer information in step S1812 is excluded from the processing target, and the sound output data that is waiting to be updated is also included. It will not be processed.

After that, in step S1815, it is determined whether or not the sound output data whose output start timing is present exists in the sound output data waiting to be updated. If a negative determination is made in step S1815, the real intention output control process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S1815, the sound output data at the output start timing is updated in step S1816. After adding it as the target sound output data, the real sound output control process is terminated.

<Drive control of moving objects in the sound light side MPU 112>
Next, the contents of the drive control of the curtain plate movable unit 51 and the disk movable units 61a and 61b executed by the sound light side MPU 112 will be described.

<Setting processing of moving object production of MPU 112 on the sound light side>
First, the setting process of the movable object effect in step S1210 in the display side command correspondence process (FIG. 22) of the sound light side MPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 36.

In the setting process, in step S1901, it is determined whether or not the command received this time from the display side MPU 122 is a command indicating that the curtain plate effect should be started. If it is the command, the process proceeds to step S1902.

In step S1902, "1" is set in the curtain plate effect flag provided in the sound light side RAM 114, and "1" is set in the first stage control flag also provided in the sound light side RAM 114. The curtain plate effect flag is a flag for the sound light side MPU 112 to specify that the execution control of the curtain plate effect using the curtain plate movable object 52 should be performed. The first-stage control flag is the first of the first-stage operation, the second-stage operation, the pair waiting operation, the third-stage operation, and the return operation, which exist as the operation modes of the curtain plate movable object 52 (see FIG. 6). This is a flag for the sound / light side MPU 112 to specify that the execution control of the one-step operation should be performed.

After that, in step S1903, the type of curtain plate effect is grasped from the content of the command received this time. Specifically, the type of curtain plate production to be executed this time is grasped among the first stage production, the second stage production, and the third stage production. Then, according to the grasping result, in the following step S1904, the flag setting process corresponding to the type of the curtain plate effect is executed. Specifically, the sound light side RAM 114 is provided with a first stage effect flag, a second stage effect flag, and a third stage effect flag, and among these flags, the effect grasped in step S1903. Set "1" to the flag corresponding to the type. After that, this setting process ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1901, it means that the command received this time from the display side MPU 122 is a command indicating that the disk effect should be started, so the process proceeds to step S1905. In step S1905, "1" is set in the disk effect flag provided in the sound light side RAM 114. The disk effect flag is a flag for the sound light side MPU 112 to specify that the execution control of the disk effect using the movable disk objects 62a and 62b should be performed.

After that, in step S1906, the types of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b to be executed for the disk effect are grasped from the contents of the command received this time. Specifically, a single effect on the left side using only the movable disk 62a on the left side, a single effect on the right side using only the movable disk 62b on the right side, and a synchronous effect using only the movable disk 62a and 62b on the right side. Of these (see Fig. 7), grasp the types of disc effects that should be performed this time. Then, according to the grasping result, in the following step S1907, the flag setting process corresponding to the type of the disk effect is executed. Specifically, the sound light side RAM 114 is provided with a left single effect flag, a right side single effect flag, and a synchronous effect flag, and among these flags, the type of effect grasped in step S1906 is selected. Set "1" to the corresponding flag. After that, this setting process ends.

<Movable object control processing of MPU 112 on the sound light side>
Next, the movable object control process in step S507 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) of the sound light side MPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 37.

First, in step S2001, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the curtain plate effect flag of the sound light side RAM 114. If an affirmative determination is made, it is determined in step S2002 whether or not "1" is set in the first stage control flag of the sound / light side RAM 114. If an affirmative determination is made, the first-stage control process is executed in step S2003, and then the movable object control process is terminated.

<First stage control process of MPU 112 on the sound light side>
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the first stage control process.

In step S2101, it is determined whether or not the driving by the first stage control process has been started by checking the flag provided in the sound / light side RAM 114. If a negative determination is made, the synchronous drive start process is executed in step S2102, and then the first stage control process is terminated. In the synchronous drive start process, each curtain is such that the pair of left and right slide members 55a, 55b in the curtain plate drive units 53a, 53b move toward the limit position at the same speed, and the movement is started at the same time. The driving of the plate driving units 56a and 56b is started. As a result, the first stage operation is started in the curtain plate movable object 52, and the descent is started in the curtain plate movable object 52 while maintaining the horizontal state.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2101, it is determined in step S2103 whether or not the curtain plate movable object 52 is on standby. If a negative determination is made, it is determined in step S2104 whether or not the pair of left and right adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b are ON. If a negative determination is made, the first stage control process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made, the process proceeds to step S2105.

In step S2105, the synchronous drive stop process is executed. In the synchronous drive stop process, the drive of each curtain plate drive unit 56a, 56b is stopped so that the pair of left and right slide members 55a, 55b are stopped at the same time. As a result, the descent of the movable curtain plate 52 while maintaining the horizontal state is stopped. In the following step S2106, the waiting time setting process is executed. In the set process, the data of the standby time (for example, 4 sec) is set in the counter area of the sound / light side RAM 114, and the measurement of the standby time is started. During the standby time set here, the curtain plate movable object 52 stands by at a position where the slide members 55a and 55b are detected by the adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b. After that, the first stage control process is completed.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2103, it is determined in step S2107 whether or not the waiting time has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step S2107, the first stage control process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S2107, the process proceeds to step S2108.

In step S2108, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the first stage effect flag of the sound light side RAM 114. If an affirmative judgment is made, it means that the curtain plate effect this time is the first stage effect. Therefore, in order to execute the return control process (step S2010) in the next process of the movable object control process, a step is taken. In S2109, after clearing the first stage control flag to "0" and setting the return control flag provided in the sound light side RAM 114 to "1", the first stage control process ends. The return control flag is a return operation among the first stage operation, the second stage operation, the pair waiting operation, the third stage operation, and the return operation (see FIG. 6), which exist as the operation modes of the curtain plate movable object 52. This is a flag for the sound light side MPU 112 to specify that the execution control should be performed.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S2108, it means that the curtain plate effect this time is the second stage effect or the third stage effect. In this case, in step S2110, after clearing the first stage control flag to "0" and setting the second stage control flag provided in the sound light side RAM 114 to "1", the first stage control process is performed. finish. The second-stage control flag is a third of the first-stage operation, the second-stage operation, the pair waiting operation, the third-stage operation, and the return operation, which exist as the operation modes of the curtain plate movable object 52 (see FIG. 6). This is a flag for specifying on the sound / light side MPU 112 that the execution control of the two-step operation should be performed.

Returning to the explanation of the movable object control process (FIG. 37), when a negative determination is made in step S2002, whether or not "1" is set in the second stage control flag of the sound light side RAM 114 in step S2004. Is determined. If an affirmative determination is made, the second stage control process is executed in step S2005, and then the movable object control process is terminated.

<Second stage control process of MPU 112 on the sound light side>
FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the second stage control process.

In step S2201, it is determined whether or not it is after the start of the drive by the second stage control process by checking the flag provided in the sound light side RAM 114. If a negative determination is made, the setting process of the number of switchings is executed in step S2202. The set process is a process for setting the number of switchings when the curtain plate movable object 52 is alternately tilted to the left and right in the second stage operation. Specifically, the switching counter provided in the sound light side RAM 114. Set "4" as the data of the number of switchings to.

In the following step S2203, the drive time setting process is executed. In the set process, the drive time when the curtain plate drive units 56a and 56b to be driven are continuously put into the drive state is set in each tilting operation. Specifically, 4 sec, which is the time required for the slide members 55a and 55b arranged at the positions detected by the adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b to reach the lower limit position, is set.

In the following step S2204, the descent start process on the side corresponding to the number of switchings is executed. Specifically, the drive of the left curtain plate drive unit 56a is started so that the left slide member 55a descends toward the limit position. However, in this case, the right curtain plate drive unit 56b is maintained in the stopped state. As a result, only the left side of the curtain plate movable object 52 is lowered, and the curtain plate movable object 52 is in a state of being inclined downward toward the left side. After that, the second stage control process is terminated.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2201, it is determined in step S2205 whether or not the measurement of the drive time set in the sound light side RAM 114 is completed. If a negative determination is made in step S2205, the second stage control process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S2205, the process proceeds to step S2206. In step S2206, the number of switchings set in the sound / light side RAM 114 is subtracted by 1. In the following step S2207, it is determined whether or not the number of switchings after the subtraction is "0".

If a negative determination is made in step S2207, the corresponding curtain plate drive unit 56a is set so that the slide members 55a and 55b on the lowering completion side rise toward the adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b in step S2208. , 56b controls the driving state. Further, in step S2209, the corresponding curtain plate drive portions 56a and 56b are driven so that the slide members 55a and 55b on the side opposite to the side targeted for processing in step S2208 descend toward the limit position. Control the state. After that, in step S2210, the drive time setting process is executed in the same manner as in step S2203, and then the second stage control process is terminated.

On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S2207, the second stage control flag is cleared to "0" and the pair waiting control flag provided in the sound light side RAM 114 is set to "1" in step S2211. After that, the second stage control process is terminated. The pair waiting control flag is a pair waiting operation among the first stage operation, the second stage operation, the pair waiting operation, the third stage operation, and the return operation (see FIG. 6), which exist as the operation modes of the curtain plate movable object 52. This is a flag for the sound / light side MPU 112 to specify that the operation execution control should be performed.

Returning to the explanation of the movable object control process (FIG. 37), when a negative determination is made in step S2004, whether or not "1" is set in the pair waiting control flag of the sound light side RAM 114 in step S2006. To judge. If an affirmative determination is made, the pair waiting control process is executed in step S2007, and then the movable object control process is terminated.

<Pair waiting control processing of MPU 112 on the sound light side>
FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the pair waiting control process.

In step S2301, it is determined whether or not the driving by the pair waiting control process has been started by checking the flag provided in the sound / light side RAM 114. If a negative determination is made, in step S2302, the return start process is executed for the drive units 56a and 56b for both curtain plates, and then the pair wait control process is terminated. In the return start process, the pair of left and right slide members 55a and 55b in the curtain plate drive units 53a and 53b are driven for each curtain plate so as to move toward the detection positions of the adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b at the same speed. The driving of the parts 56a and 56b is started. In the second stage control process, since both slide members 55a and 55b are located below the detection positions of the adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b at the end stage, the process of step S2302 is executed. Both the slide members 55a and 55b will rise.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2301, it is determined in step S2303 whether or not any one of the pair of left and right adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b is ON. If a negative determination is made in step S2303, the pair waiting control process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S2303, the process proceeds to step S2304. In step S2304, the curtain plate drive units 56a and 56b on the side corresponding to the adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b that were turned on in step S2303 are stopped. In this case, when both the adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b are turned on in step S2303, both the curtain plate drive units 56a and 56b are stopped. When both the adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b are ON, the curtain plate movable object 52 returns to the horizontal state.

In the following step S2305, it is determined whether or not both the adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b are ON. If a negative determination is made in step S2305, the pair waiting control process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S2305, the process proceeds to step S2306.

In step S2306, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the third stage effect flag of the sound light side RAM 114. If an affirmative determination is made, the light emission data reading process for the third stage effect is executed in step S2307, and the sound output data reading process for the third stage effect is executed in step S2308.

By executing the process of step S2307, the light emission data corresponding to the third stage operation is set in the light emission data reading process (FIG. 28) already described, and then the light emission control process (FIG. 31) is executed. By doing so, the light emission control is performed in the light emission pattern corresponding to the third stage operation in accordance with the timing when the third stage operation is started. In this case, the light emission data has a lower priority than the light emission data for notification and the light emission data of the final effect, but is set to have a higher priority than the other light emission data, and the final effect can be further executed. Since the third stage operation is not executed at the timing, basically, the light emission control is executed according to the execution of the third stage operation.

Further, by executing the process of step S2308, the sound output data corresponding to the third stage operation is set in the sound output data reading process (FIG. 34) already described, and then the sound output control process (sound output control process) ( By executing FIG. 35), sound output control is performed with a sound output pattern corresponding to the third stage operation in accordance with the timing at which the third stage operation is started. In this case, the sound output data has a lower priority than the sound output data for notification and the sound output data of the final production, but is set to have a higher priority than the other sound output data, and further, the final production. Since the third stage operation is not executed at the timing when can be executed, basically, the sound output control is executed according to the execution of the third stage operation.

After that, in step S2309, the pair wait control flag is cleared to "0", the third stage control flag provided in the sound light side RAM 114 is set to "1", and then the pair wait control process is terminated. The third-stage control flag is a third of the first-stage operation, the second-stage operation, the pair waiting operation, the third-stage operation, and the return operation, which exist as the operation modes of the curtain plate movable object 52 (see FIG. 6). This is a flag for the sound light side MPU 112 to specify that the execution control of the three-stage operation should be performed.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S2306, it means that the curtain plate effect this time was the second stage effect. In this case, in step S2310, the pair wait control flag of the sound light side RAM 114 is cleared to "0", the return control flag of the sound light side RAM 114 is set to "1", and then the pair wait control process is terminated. ..

Returning to the explanation of the movable object control process (FIG. 37), when a negative determination is made in step S2006, whether or not "1" is set in the third stage control flag of the sound light side RAM 114 in step S2008. Is determined. If an affirmative determination is made, the third stage control process is executed in step S2009, and then the movable object control process is terminated.

<Third stage control process of MPU 112 on the sound light side>
FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the third stage control process.

In step S2401, it is determined whether or not it is after the start of driving by the third stage control process by checking the flag provided in the sound light side RAM 114. If a negative determination is made, the synchronous drive start process is executed in step S2402. In the synchronous drive start process, each curtain is such that the pair of left and right slide members 55a, 55b in the curtain plate drive units 53a, 53b move toward the limit position at the same speed, and the movement is started at the same time. The driving of the plate driving units 56a and 56b is started. As a result, the movable curtain plate 52 starts moving toward the limit position, and the movable curtain plate 52 starts descending while maintaining the horizontal state. Then, in step S2403, after executing the synchronous drive time setting process, the third stage control process ends. In the set process, the driving time for continuing the descent of the curtain plate movable object 52 while maintaining the horizontal state is set. Specifically, 4 sec, which is the time required for the slide members 55a and 55b arranged at the positions detected by the adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b to reach the lower limit position, is set.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S2401, the flag provided in the sound light side RAM 114 is confirmed in step S2404, which is the state after the synchronous drive started in step S2402 is stopped. Judge whether or not. If a negative determination is made in step S2404, it is subsequently determined in step S2405 whether or not the measurement of the synchronous drive time set in the sound light side RAM 114 is completed. If a negative determination is made in step S2405, the third stage control process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S2405, the process proceeds to step S2406.

In step S2406, the synchronous drive stop process is executed. In the synchronous drive stop process, the drive of each curtain plate drive unit 56a, 56b is stopped so that the pair of left and right slide members 55a, 55b are stopped at the same time. As a result, the descent of the movable curtain plate 52 while maintaining the horizontal state is stopped. In the following step S2407, the waiting time setting process is executed. In the set process, the data of the standby time (for example, 4 sec) is set in the counter area of the sound / light side RAM 114, and the measurement of the standby time is started. During the standby time set here, the slide members 55a and 55b of the curtain plate movable object 52 stand by at the limit position. After that, the third stage control process is completed.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2404, it is determined in step S2408 whether or not the waiting time has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step S2408, the third stage control process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S2408, the third stage control flag of the sound light side RAM 114 is set to "" in step S2409. After clearing "0" and setting the return control flag of the sound / light side RAM 114 to "1", the third stage control process ends.

Returning to the description of the movable object control process (FIG. 37), if a negative determination is made in step S2008, the return control process is executed in step S2010, and then the present movable object control process is terminated.

<Return control process of MPU 112 on the sound light side>
FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the return control process.

In step S2501, it is determined whether or not the driving by the return control process has been started by checking the flag provided in the sound / light side RAM 114. If a negative determination is made, the synchronous return start process is executed in step S2502, and then the main return control process is terminated. In the synchronous return start process, each curtain is such that the pair of left and right slide members 55a, 55b in the curtain plate drive units 53a, 53b move toward the initial position at the same speed, and the movement is started at the same time. The driving of the plate driving units 56a and 56b is started. As a result, the movable curtain plate 52 starts moving toward the initial position, and the movable curtain plate 52 starts ascending while maintaining the horizontal state.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2501, it is determined in step S2503 whether or not any one of the pair of left and right curtain plate initial position sensors 57a and 57b is ON. If a negative determination is made in step S2503, the main return control process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S2503, the process proceeds to step S2504. In step S2504, the curtain plate drive units 56a and 56b on the side corresponding to the curtain plate initial position sensors 57a and 57b that were turned on in step S2503 are stopped. In this case, when both the curtain plate initial position sensors 57a and 57b are turned on in step S2503, both the curtain plate drive units 56a and 56b are stopped.

In the following step S2505, it is determined whether or not both the curtain plate initial position sensors 57a and 57b are ON. If a negative determination is made in step S2505, the main return control process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S2505, various flag clear processes are executed in step S2506 and then the main return control process is terminated. .. In the various flag clearing processes, the return control flag of the sound light side RAM 114 is cleared by "0", and the curtain plate effect flag of the sound light side RAM 114 is cleared by "0". Further, among the first stage effect flag, the second stage effect flag, and the third stage effect flag of the sound light side RAM 114, the flag corresponding to the type of the curtain plate effect this time is cleared to "0". This completes the curtain board production this time.

<The state where the third stage production is performed>
Next, a state in which the third stage effect is performed will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 43. FIG. 43 (a) shows the drive state of the left curtain plate drive unit 56a, FIG. 43 (b) shows the drive state of the right curtain plate drive unit 56b, and FIG. 43 (c) shows the left adjustment position. The detection state of the sensor 58a is shown, FIG. 43 (d) shows the detection state of the adjustment position sensor 58b on the right side, and FIG. 43 (e) shows the effect before the third stage operation on the light emission control and sound output control side. The execution status is shown, and FIG. 43 (f) shows the execution status of the effect corresponding to the third stage operation on the light emission control and sound output control side. In the following description, the drive state of the curtain plate drive portions 56a and 56b when the slide members 55a and 55b are lowered is referred to as a forward drive state, and the curtain plate when the slide members 55a and 55b are raised. The drive state of the drive units 56a and 56b is referred to as a drive state in the opposite direction.

When the third stage effect is started at the timing of t1, the drive control is started so that the left curtain plate drive unit 56a is in the positive direction drive state as shown in FIG. 43 (a). As shown in FIG. 43B, the drive control of the right curtain plate drive unit 56b is started so that the drive unit 56b is in the forward drive state. As a result, the curtain plate movable object 52 starts descending while maintaining the horizontal state. Further, at this timing, as shown in FIG. 43 (e), on the light emission control and sound output control side, the third stage effect, which is before the third stage operation, is started.

After that, at the timing of t2, as shown in FIGS. 43 (c) and 43 (d), the adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b are turned on, so that they are shown in FIGS. 43 (a) and 43 (b). In addition, the drive units 56a and 56b for each curtain plate are stopped. As a result, the lowering of the movable curtain plate 52 due to the horizontal state is stopped, and the state is maintained until the timing of t3.

After that, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 43 (b), while maintaining the right curtain plate drive unit 56b in the stopped state, as shown in FIG. 43 (a), the left curtain plate drive unit 56a is in the positive driving state. As a result, the movable curtain plate 52 tilts downward toward the left side. After that, at the timing of t4, the timing of t5, and the timing of t6, as shown in FIGS. 43 (a) and 43 (b), the left curtain plate drive unit 56a and the right curtain plate drive unit 56b Switching control is performed in which one of them is driven in the forward direction and the other is driven in the opposite direction. As a result, the state in which the movable curtain plate 52 is tilted downward toward the left side and the state in which the movable curtain plate 52 is tilted downward toward the right side alternately occur. That is, the second stage operation is performed.

After that, at the timing of t7, the second stage operation is ended, and then the pair waiting control is started, so that the drive for the curtain plate on the left side is started as shown in FIGS. 43 (a) and 43 (b). Both the portion 56a and the right curtain plate drive portion 56b are driven in the opposite directions. Then, at the timing of t8, as shown in FIG. 43 (c), the adjustment position sensor 58a on the left side is turned on, so that the drive unit 56a for the curtain plate on the left side is stopped as shown in FIG. 43 (a). It becomes a state. Further, at the timing of t9, as shown in FIG. 43 (d), the adjustment position sensor 58b on the right side is turned on, so that the drive unit 56b for the curtain plate on the right side is stopped as shown in FIG. 43 (b). It becomes a state. As a result, the movable curtain plate 52 is brought into the horizontal state again.

After that, the third stage operation is started at the timing of t10. That is, as shown in FIGS. 43 (a) and 43 (b), both the left curtain plate drive unit 56a and the right curtain plate drive unit 56b are in the forward drive state. As a result, the movable curtain plate 52 descends toward the limit position while maintaining the horizontal state. Further, at the timing when the third stage operation of the movable curtain plate 52 is started, as shown in FIGS. 43 (e) and 43 (f), the effects up to that point in the light emission control and the sound output control are completed. , The production corresponding to the third stage operation is started. For example, at the timing when the movable curtain plate 52 starts descending again, the corresponding sound effect is output from the speaker unit 45, and the corresponding simultaneous light emission with the same color is performed in the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73. It is said.

After that, when both slide members 55a and 55b reach the limit positions at the timing of t11, as shown in FIGS. 43 (a) and 43 (b), the left curtain plate drive unit 56a and the right side are used. The curtain plate drive unit 56b is stopped. As a result, the lowering of the movable curtain plate 52 due to the horizontal state is stopped, and the state is maintained until the timing of t12.

After that, the return operation is started at the timing of t12. That is, as shown in FIGS. 43 (a) and 43 (b), both the left curtain body drive unit 56a and the right curtain plate drive unit 56b are driven in opposite directions. As a result, the movable curtain plate 52 starts to rise while maintaining the horizontal state. At the timing of t12, as shown in FIG. 43 (f), the effect corresponding to the third stage operation in the light emission control and the sound output control is completed.

After that, at the timing of t13, both slide members 55a and 55b are detected by the curtain plate initial position sensors 57a and 57b, so that the left curtain plate is used as shown in FIGS. 43 (a) and 43 (b). The drive unit 56a and the right curtain plate drive unit 56b are stopped. As a result, the return of the movable curtain plate 52 to the initial position in the horizontal state is completed, and the third stage effect is completed.

When the third stage effect is performed as described above, when the curtain plate movable object 52 is lowered in the horizontal state after the completion of the second stage operation in which the curtain plate movable object 52 is alternately tilted. Rather than individually controlling the drive units 56a and 56b for the curtain plate with the drive time to determine the start timing of the lowering operation, the pair of adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b detect the corresponding slide members 55a and 55b, respectively. On the condition that the curtain plate movable object 52 is lowered in the horizontal state, the curtain plate movable object 52 is configured to be lowered. As a result, when lowering the movable curtain plate 52, it becomes easier to secure the lowering operation in the horizontal state.

Further, in a configuration in which the speaker unit 45 performs sound output control corresponding to the start of the descending operation of the curtain plate movable object 52 in the horizontal state, and the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 perform light emission control accordingly. The condition is that the start timings of the sound output control and the light emission control are not specified by measuring the elapsed time, but the corresponding slide members 55a and 55b are detected by the pair of adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b, respectively. In addition, these sound output control and light emission control are started. As a result, in a configuration in which sound output control and light emission control are performed according to the lowering motion of the curtain plate movable object 52, the start timings of these sound output control and light emission control are synchronized with the start timing of the lowering motion of the curtain plate movable object 52. It will be easier.

Further, even when the second stage effect is performed, when the curtain plate movable object 52 is raised in the horizontal state after the end of the second stage operation in which the curtain plate movable object 52 is alternately tilted. Rather than individually controlling the drive units 56a and 56b for the curtain plate with the drive time to determine the start timing of the ascending operation, the pair of adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b detect the corresponding slide members 55a and 55b, respectively. On condition that this is done, the movable curtain plate 52 is configured to perform the ascending operation in the horizontal state. As a result, when raising the curtain plate movable object 52, it becomes easy to secure the raising operation in the horizontal state.

Further, the adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b are provided on the limit position side of the curtain plate initial position sensors 57a and 57b, and whether the curtain plate movable object 52 is in the horizontal state by using the detection result of the adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b. By determining whether or not the curtain plate is movable, it is not necessary to return the curtain plate movable object 52 to the initial position when switching to the operation mode of horizontally lowering after the operation mode of alternately tilting. This makes it possible to switch the operation mode at an early stage.

Returning to the description of the movable object control process (FIG. 37), if a negative determination is made in step S2001, the process proceeds to step S2011. In step S2011, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the disk effect flag of the sound light side RAM 114. If a negative determination is made in step S2011, the movable object control process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2011, it is determined in step S2012 whether or not "1" is set in the synchronization effect flag of the sound light side RAM 114, so that the execution target of the disk effect this time is It is determined whether or not the disk movable object 62a on the left side and the disk movable object 62b on the right side are both. If a negative determination is made in step S2012, the single control process is executed in step S2013 and then the present movable object control process is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2012, synchronization is performed in step S2014. After executing the control process, the present movable object control process is terminated. Hereinafter, these single control processing and synchronous control processing will be described.

<Single control processing of MPU 112 on the sound light side>
First, the single control process of step S2013 in the movable object control process (FIG. 37) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 44.

In step S2601, it is determined whether or not it is after the start of driving by the single control process by checking the flag provided in the sound light side RAM 114. If a negative determination is made, the slide start process toward the limit position is executed in step S2602. In the slide start process, driving of the disk slide drive units 66a and 66b on the side corresponding to the flag in which "1" is set among the left single effect flag and the right side single effect flag of the sound light side RAM 114 is started. do. As a result, the disk movable objects 62a and 62b on the side to be controlled this time start sliding movement toward the limit position.

In the following step S2603, the rotation start process is executed. In the rotation start process, the driving of the disk rotation drive units 67a and 67b on the side to be controlled this time is started. As a result, the disk movable objects 62a and 62b on the side to be controlled this time start rotating in a certain direction. After that, this single control process is terminated.

When an affirmative judgment is made in step S2601, the return operation is performed on the disk movable objects 62a and 62b on the side to be controlled this time by confirming the flag provided in the sound light side RAM 114 in step S2604. Determine if it is done. The flag setting process indicating that the return operation is in progress is executed when an affirmative determination is made in step S2610 described later.

If a negative determination is made in step S2604, it is determined in step S2605 whether or not the disk movable objects 62a and 62b on the side to be controlled this time are in the middle of sliding movement toward the limit position. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2605, the step control process is executed in step S2606.

Here, a stepping motor is used as the disk rotation drive units 67a and 67b. As the stepping motor, the pachinko machine 10 uses a hybrid (HB) type two-phase stepping motor that employs a 1-2 phase excitation method. The stepping motor is not limited to the hybrid type and the two-phase, and various stepping motors such as a four-phase or five-phase stepping motor can be used. Each disk rotation drive unit 67a, 67b is configured to rotate the corresponding disk movable object 62a, 62b once by giving a drive signal of a reference pulse (for example, 300 pulses) defined as a plurality of pulses. The rotation position of the movable disk 62a and 62b can be specified by the number of times the drive signal is output. In step S2606, a process for newly giving a drive signal to the disk rotation drive units 67a and 67b, which is the control target side this time, is executed.

In the following step S2607, it is determined whether or not the disk movable objects 62a and 62b on the side to be controlled this time have reached the limit position. The determination of whether or not the limit position has been reached is determined by determining whether or not the elapsed time since the slide start process is executed in step S2602 is the time corresponding to the arrival at the limit position. Will be done. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in a configuration provided with a sensor for detecting that the disk movable objects 62a and 62b have reached the limit position, the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are used by the sensor. By determining whether or not it has been detected, it may be configured to determine whether or not the limit position has been reached.

If a negative determination is made in step S2607, the single control process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S2607, the process proceeds to step S2608. In step S2608, the drive state of the disk slide drive units 66a and 66b on the side to be controlled this time is stopped. As a result, the sliding movement of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b on the side to be controlled this time is stopped. After that, this single control process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S2605, the step control process is executed in step S2609 in the same manner as in the case of step S2606. In the following step S2610, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the stop command flag of the sound light side RAM 114. As described above, the stop command flag is set to "1" in step S1212 of the display side command correspondence process (FIG. 22) when a command corresponding to the disc effect stop command is received from the display side MPU 122. .. If a negative determination is made in step S2610, the single control process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2610, the single control process ends after executing the slide start process toward the initial position in step S2611. In the slide start process, the drive for returning is started for the disk slide drive units 66a and 66b, which are the control target side this time. As a result, the disk movable objects 62a and 62b on the side to be controlled this time start sliding toward the initial position.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2604, it is determined in step S2612 whether or not the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are rotating. If it is rotating, in step S2613, the step control process is executed in the same manner as in the case of step S2606, and then in step S2614, the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b, which are the control target side of this time, are executed. Determines whether or not is ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2614, the drive states of the disk rotation drive units 67a and 67b, which are the control target side this time, are stopped in step S2615.

That is, the rotation of the movable disk objects 62a and 62b in the disk effect is not immediately stopped even if a stop command is issued from the display side MPU 122, and is detected by the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b, that is, the rotation. It will be stopped after reaching the initial position. As a result, the rotation positions of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b at the end of the disk effect of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b can always be set to the same position, and the disk movable object when the disk effect is started can be set to the same position. The rotation positions of 62a and 62b can always be the same.

If a negative determination is made in step S2612, a negative determination is made in step S2614, or the process of step S2615 is executed, in step S2616, the slide initial position sensor 68a, which is the control target side of this time, It is determined whether or not 68b is ON. If a negative determination is made in step S2616, the single control process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S2616, the slide stop process is executed in step S2617 and then the single control process is terminated. do. In the slide stop process, the drive state of the disk slide drive units 66a and 66b, which is the control target side this time, is stopped.

<A state where a disk production is performed by a single control>
Next, a state in which a disk effect is performed by a single control on the disk movable object 62a on the left side will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 45. It should be noted that the mode in which the disk effect is performed by a single control for the disk movable object 62b on the right side is basically the same.

45 (A) and 45 (B) show a state of a disk effect by a single control executed when different pattern data tables are referred to, and FIGS. 45 (a1) and 45 (B) show. a2) shows the reception status of the command from the display side MPU 122, FIGS. 45 (b1) and 45 (b2) show the rotation position of the disk movable object 62a, and FIGS. 45 (c1) and 45 (c2) show the rotation position. The detection status of the initial position sensor 69a is shown, and FIGS. 45 (d1) and 45 (d2) show the rotation period of the movable disk 62a.

First, the case of FIG. 45 (A) will be described.

As shown in FIG. 45 (a1), by receiving a command indicating that the disk effect should be started from the display side MPU 122 at the timing of t1, as shown in FIGS. 45 (b1) and 45 (d1). The rotation of the movable disk 62a is started. Further, in this case, although the description by illustration is omitted, the slide movement toward the limit position is started in the disk movable object 62a.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 45 (b1) and 45 (c1), the movable disk 62a makes one revolution at the timing of t2, the timing of t3, and the timing of t4, respectively, and the rotation initial position sensor 69a respectively. It turns on at the timing of. Since the disk movable object 62a has reached the limit position by the timing of t4, the sliding movement of the disk movable object 62a is stopped.

After that, at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 45 (a1), a command indicating that the disk effect should be stopped is received from the display side MPU 122. In this case, although the description by illustration is omitted, the slide movement toward the initial position is started in the disk movable object 62a. On the other hand, at this timing, the rotation position of the disk movable object 62a is not the initial rotation position, so the rotation is continued.

After that, at the timing of t6, as shown in FIGS. 45 (b1) and 45 (c1), the disk movable object 62a makes one revolution and the rotation initial position sensor 69a is turned on, so that the disk movable object 62a The rotation is stopped. In this case, although the description by illustration is omitted, the slide movement toward the initial position of the disk movable object 62a has been completed by the timing of t6. That is, in the case of FIG. 45A, the rotation of the movable disk 62a is stopped after the slide movement of the movable disk 62a toward the initial position is completed. Then, in the case of FIG. 45 (A), as shown in FIG. 45 (d1), the disk movable object 62a rotates from the timing of t1 to the timing of t6.

Next, the case of FIG. 45B will be described.

As shown in FIG. 45 (a2), by receiving a command indicating that the disk effect should be started from the display side MPU 122 at the timing of t11, as shown in FIGS. 45 (b2) and 45 (d2). The rotation of the movable disk 62a is started. Further, in this case, although the description by illustration is omitted, the slide movement toward the limit position is started in the disk movable object 62a.

After that, at the timing of t12 and the timing of t13, as shown in FIGS. 45 (b2) and 45 (c2), the disk movable object 62a makes one revolution, and the rotation initial position sensor 69a is turned on at each timing. It becomes a state. Since the disk movable object 62a has reached the limit position by the timing of t3, the sliding movement of the disk movable object 62a is stopped.

After that, at the timing of t14, as shown in FIG. 45 (a2), a command indicating that the disk effect should be stopped is received from the display side MPU 122. In this case, although the description by illustration is omitted, the slide movement toward the initial position is started in the disk movable object 62a. On the other hand, at this timing, the rotation position of the disk movable object 62a is not the initial rotation position, so the rotation is continued.

After that, at the timing of t15, as shown in FIGS. 45 (b2) and 45 (c2), the disk movable object 62a makes one revolution and the rotation initial position sensor 69a is turned on, so that the disk movable object 62a The rotation is stopped. In this case, although the description by illustration is omitted, the slide movement toward the initial position of the disk movable object 62a has not been completed by the timing of t15. That is, in the case of FIG. 45B, after the rotation of the movable disk object 62a is stopped, the slide movement toward the initial position of the movable disk object 62a is completed. Then, in the case of FIG. 45 (B), as shown in FIG. 45 (d2), the disk movable object 62a rotates from the timing of t11 to the timing of t15. This rotation period is shorter than that in the case of FIG. 45 (A).

As described above, when the disk effect is executed, the rotational operation of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b is stopped by being detected by the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b. As a result, when the rotational operation of the movable disk objects 62a and 62b is stopped, it is possible to always stop the movable disk objects 62a and 62b in the state of being arranged at the initial rotation position, and the disk can be used when the disk effect is not executed. It is possible to make the mode of the rotation position of the animals 62a and 62b constant. Further, the rotation positions of the movable disk objects 62a and 62b at the start of rotation of the disk effect can be made constant.

Similarly, when the disk effect is executed, the slide operation of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b is stopped by being detected by the slide initial position sensors 68a and 68b. As a result, when the sliding operation of the movable disk objects 62a and 62b is stopped, it is possible to always stop the movable disk objects 62a and 62b in the state where they are arranged at the initial slide position, and the disk can be used when the disk effect is not executed. It is possible to make the mode of the slide position of the animals 62a and 62b constant. Further, the slide positions of the movable disk objects 62a and 62b at the start of rotation of the disk effect can be made constant.

In the case where the rotation of the movable disk objects 62a and 62b is stopped on the condition that the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b are detected as described above, the display side MPU 122 performs the disk effect when executing the disk effect. It is only necessary to send a command indicating that the disc effect should be started and a command indicating that the disk effect should be stopped according to the data defined in the pattern data table. It is possible to keep the rotation position and the slide position of the movable disk objects 62a and 62b at the end of the disk effect without managing the execution period. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the design of the processing configuration for executing the disk effect at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10. Further, at the design stage, the rotation period of the movable discs 62a and 62b can be varied by simply adjusting the transmission timing of the command indicating that the disc effect should be stopped in relation to the rotation period of the movable discs 62a and 62b. It becomes possible to achieve the conversion.

<Synchronous control processing of MPU 112 on the sound light side>
Next, the synchronous control process of step S2014 in the movable object control process (FIG. 37) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 46.

In step S2701, it is determined whether or not the driving by the synchronous control process has been started by checking the flag provided in the sound / light side RAM 114. If a negative determination is made, the slide start process on the left side toward the limit position is executed in step S2702, and the slide start process on the right side toward the limit position is executed in step S2703. In each of these slide start processes, driving of the disk slide drive units 66a and 66b on the side to be controlled is started. As a result, the pair of left and right disk movable objects 62a and 62b start the slide movement toward the limit position at the same speed, and the slide movement is started at the same time.

After that, the rotation start process on the left side is executed in step S2704, and the rotation start process on the right side is executed in step S2705. In each of these rotation start processes, the driving of the disk rotation drive units 67a and 67b on the side to be controlled is started. As a result, the pair of left and right disk movable objects 62a and 62b start rotating at the same speed, and the rotation starts at the same time. After that, the present synchronization control process is terminated.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S2701, in step S2706, by checking the flag provided in the sound light side RAM 114, it is confirmed whether or not the return operation is performed in each of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b. judge. The flag setting process indicating that the return operation is in progress is executed when an affirmative determination is made in step S2715 described later.

If a negative determination is made in step S2706, it is determined in step S2707 whether or not the movable disk objects 62a and 62b are in the middle of sliding movement toward the limit position. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2707, the step control process on the left side is executed and the update process for the number of steps on the left side is executed in step S2708. Further, in step S2709, the step control process on the right side is executed, and the update process for the number of steps on the right side is executed.

In each step control process, a process for newly giving a drive signal to the corresponding disk rotation drive units 67a and 67b is executed, and the number of steps of the disk rotation drive units 67a and 67b is advanced. In this case, the data that determines the correspondence between the output pattern of the drive signal in each step control process and the excitation pattern of the disk rotation drive units 67a and 67b is the data group 153 for the movable object of the sound light side ROM 113. It is predetermined to. The data that determines this correspondence relationship includes data on the acceleration period required to bring the disk rotation drive units 67a and 67b into a constant speed rotation state, and data on the constant speed period after the acceleration period. ing. As for the data of the acceleration period, there is data on the correspondence between the output pattern of the drive signal and the excitation pattern for the entire acceleration period. On the other hand, as for the data of the constant speed period, only the data of the correspondence relationship between the output pattern of the drive signal and the excitation pattern exists for a part of the constant speed period, and the data of the correspondence relationship is present in the constant speed period. It will be used repeatedly. However, the data of the constant speed period may also have a configuration in which the data of the correspondence between the output pattern of the drive signal and the excitation pattern exists for the entire constant speed period. In the configuration, it is preferable that the data for the constant speed period exists for a period equal to or longer than the maximum time that can be assumed as a disk effect.

Here, in the movable object data area 164 of the sound light side RAM 114, a left step number area for managing the number of steps of the disk rotation drive unit 67a on the left side and a step number of the disk rotation drive unit 67b on the right side are provided. There is an area for the number of steps on the right side for management. As described above, the disk rotation drive units 67a and 67b are configured to make one rotation by giving a drive signal of a reference pulse defined as a plurality of pulses, and by giving one drive signal, 1 It is configured to step forward. The numerical information of each step number area is added by 1 each time a drive signal is given to the corresponding disk rotation drive units 67a and 67b, and "0" is cleared when the numerical information corresponding to the reference pulse is obtained. It has become. On the sound light side MPU 112, by confirming the numerical information of each step number area, it is possible to grasp the rotation positions of the corresponding disk rotation drive units 67a and 67b. When the corresponding disk movable objects 62a and 62b are detected by the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b, the numerical information of the corresponding step number area may be cleared to "0".

In the following step S2710, it is determined whether or not both the movable disk objects 62a and 62b have reached the limit positions. The determination of whether or not the limit position has been reached is determined as to whether or not the elapsed time since the slide start process is executed in step S2702 and step S2703 is the time corresponding to the arrival at the limit position. It is done by doing. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in a configuration provided with a sensor for detecting that the disk movable objects 62a and 62b have reached the limit position, the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are used by the sensor. The configuration may be such that it is determined whether or not the limit position has been reached by determining whether or not it has been detected.

If a negative determination is made in step S2710, the synchronous control process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S2710, the processes of steps S2711 and S2712 are executed, and then the synchronous control process is terminated. .. In step S2711, the drive state of the left disk slide drive unit 66a is stopped, and in step S2712, the drive state of the right disk slide drive unit 66b is stopped. As a result, the sliding movement of the pair of left and right disk movable objects 62a and 62b is stopped.

If a negative determination is made in step S2707, the step control process on the left side is executed and the update process for the number of steps on the left side is executed in step S2713 as in the case of step S2708. Further, in step S2714, as in the case of step S2709, the step control process on the right side is executed and the update process for the number of steps on the right side is executed.

In the following step S2715, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the stop command flag of the sound / light side RAM 114. As described above, the stop command flag is set to "1" in step S1212 of the display side command correspondence process (FIG. 22) when a command corresponding to the disc effect stop command is received from the display side MPU 122. .. If a negative determination is made in step S2715, the present synchronization control process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2715, the slide start process on the left side toward the initial position is executed in step S2716, and the slide start process on the right side toward the initial position is executed in step S2717. .. In these slide start processes, the drive for returning is started for the corresponding disk slide drive units 66a and 66b. As a result, the pair of left and right disk movable objects 62a and 62b start the slide movement toward the initial position at the same speed, and the slide movement is started at the same time. After that, the adjustment process for stopping the rotation is executed in step S2718, and then the synchronous control process is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2706, the synchronization control process ends after the return process is executed in step S2719.

Hereinafter, the adjustment process for stopping the rotation in step S2718 and the return process in step S2719 will be described.

<Adjustment process for stopping the rotation of the MPU 112 on the sound light side>
FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing an adjustment process for stopping rotation in step S2718 in the synchronous control process (FIG. 46).

First, in step S2801, by confirming the left side step number area and the right side step number area in the movable object data area 164 of the sound light side RAM 114, either one of the pair of left and right disk rotation drive units 67a and 67b can be stepped. Determine if the number is within the limits. If a negative determination is made in step S2801, the main adjustment process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S2801, the process proceeds to step S2802. In step S2802, the stop limit flag provided in the sound light side RAM 114 is set to "1", and in step S2803, the stop release determination area provided in the movable object data area 164 of the sound light side RAM 114 is set. After setting the number of steps for determining the stop release, the adjustment process ends.

Here, the limiting range is the number of steps for determining the stop release, even when a command corresponding to the stop command of the disk effect is received from the display side MPU 122, until the disk movable objects 62a and 62b rotate. Is a reference range for determining whether or not to execute a process that does not stop the rotation even if the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are detected by the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b. It is set as the number of steps including the number of steps corresponding to the detection range of 69b. Specifically, the limiting range is set so as to include the entire range of the number of steps corresponding to the detection range and to be wider than the range of the number of steps in both the forward direction and the reverse direction. There is. More specifically, the limited range is preferably ± 20%, more preferably ± 10%, and ± 5% of the maximum number of steps with respect to the number of steps at the initial rotation position. Is particularly preferable. In the pachinko machine 10, the limiting range is set to ± 5% (± 15 steps) of the maximum number of steps (300 steps) with respect to the number of steps at the initial rotation position.

The number of steps for determining the stop release is the number of steps for ensuring that the rotation position of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b is located away from the initial rotation position, and is a step equal to or greater than the number of steps included in the detection range. It is defined as a number. More specifically, it is defined as the number of steps equal to or greater than the number of steps included in the limit range, and more specifically, it is defined as 150 steps so that the position is rotated 180 ° with respect to the initial rotation position. ing. Then, as will be described later, by rotating the disk movable objects 62a and 62b by the number of steps for determining the stop release, the stop restriction flag is cleared to "0" and the monitoring of the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b is restarted. ..

<Process for restoring MPU 112 on the sound light side>
FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing a return process of step S2719 in the synchronous control process (FIG. 46).

First, in step S2901, it is determined whether or not the left slide initial position sensor 68a is ON, and if it is ON, the drive state of the left disk slide drive unit 66a is determined in step S2902. To stop. As a result, the slide movement of the left disk movable object 62a toward the initial position is stopped.

When a negative determination is made in step S2901 or when the process of step S2902 is executed, it is determined in step S2903 whether or not the slide initial position sensor 68b on the right side is ON. If it is ON, the drive state of the disk slide drive unit 66b on the right side is stopped in step S2904. As a result, the slide movement of the right disk movable object 62b toward the initial position is stopped.

If a negative determination is made in step S2903, or if the process of step S2904 is executed, it is determined in step S2905 whether or not at least one of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b is rotating. If a negative determination is made in step S2905, the main return process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S2905, the process proceeds to step S2906.

In step S2906, as in the case of step S2708, the step control process on the left side is executed and the update process for the number of steps on the left side is executed. Further, in step S2907, the step control process on the right side is executed and the update process for the number of steps on the right side is executed as in the case of step S2709.

In the following step S2908, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the stop limit flag of the sound / light side RAM 114. When an affirmative judgment is made in step S2908, by checking the left step number area and the right step number area in the movable object data area 164 of the sound light side RAM 114 in step S2909, each pair of left and right disk movable objects is confirmed. By grasping the current number of steps of 62a and 62b and confirming the stop release determination area in the movable object data area 164, the number of steps for stop release determination can be grasped. Then, it is determined whether or not the current number of steps of both disk movable objects 62a and 62b has reached the number of steps for determining the stop release. If a negative judgment is made in step S2909, the main return processing is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative judgment is made in step S2909, the main return processing is performed after clearing the stop restriction flag "0" in step S2910. finish.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2908, that is, if "1" is not set in the stop restriction flag, the rotation stop process is executed in step S2911, and then the return process is terminated.

In the rotation stop processing, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 49, first, in step S3001, it is determined whether or not the rotation initial position sensor 69a on the left side is ON. If a negative determination is made in step S3001, the initial position counter on the left side provided in the movable object data area 164 of the sound light side RAM 114 is cleared to "0" in step S3002. The initial position counter on the left side is a counter for measuring the number of times that the rotation initial position sensor 69a on the left side is confirmed to be ON.

If an affirmative judgment is made in step S3001, the numerical information of the initial position counter on the left side is added by 1 in step S3003, and the numerical information of the initial position counter on the left side becomes 2 or more in the subsequent step S3004. Determine if it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3004, the drive state of the disk rotation drive unit 67a on the left side is stopped in step S3005. As a result, the rotation of the left disk movable object 62a is stopped.

If the process of step S3002 is executed, if a negative determination is made in step S3004, or if the process of step S3005 is executed, whether or not the rotation initial position sensor 69b on the right side is turned on in step S3006. Is determined. If a negative determination is made in step S3006, the rotation stop process is performed after clearing "0" on the right initial position counter provided in the movable object data area 164 of the sound light side RAM 114 in step S3007. finish. The initial position counter on the right side is a counter for measuring the number of times that the rotation initial position sensor 69b on the right side is confirmed to be ON.

If an affirmative judgment is made in step S3006, the numerical information of the initial position counter on the right side is added by 1 in step S3008, and the numerical information of the initial position counter on the right side becomes 2 or more in the following step S3009. Determine if it is. If a negative determination is made in step S3009, the main rotation stop processing is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3009, the drive state of the disk rotation drive unit 67b on the right side is stopped in step S3010, and then the rotation stop process is terminated. As a result, the rotation of the movable disk 62b on the right side is stopped.

<Action by executing the adjustment process for stopping rotation>
Next, the operation of executing the adjustment process for stopping rotation (FIG. 47) and the process associated therewith as described above will be described.

First, with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 50, a problem when the adjustment process for stopping rotation and the process associated therewith are not executed will be described.

FIG. 50 (a) shows the reception status of the command from the display side MPU 122, FIG. 50 (b) shows the rotation position of the disk movable object 62a on the left side, and FIG. 50 (c) shows the rotation initial position sensor 69a on the left side. The detection status is shown, FIG. 50 (d) shows the rotation period of the left disk movable object 62a, FIG. 50 (e) shows the rotation position of the right disk movable object 62b, and FIG. 50 (f) shows the rotation of the right side. The detection status of the initial position sensor 69b is shown, and FIG. 50 (g) shows the rotation period of the disk movable object 62b on the right side.

As shown in FIG. 50 (a), by receiving a command from the display side MPU 122 indicating that the disk effect by synchronous control should be started at the timing of t1, the figures in FIGS. 50 (b) and 50 (d) are shown. As shown, the rotation of the left disk movable object 62a is started, and at the same time, the rotation of the right disk movable object 62b is started as shown in FIGS. 50 (e) and 50 (g). Further, in this case, although the description by illustration is omitted, the slide movement toward the limit position is started in the pair of left and right disk movable objects 62a and 62b.

After that, at the timing of t2, the timing of t3, and the timing of t4, as shown in FIGS. 50 (b) and 50 (c), the left disk movable object 62a makes one revolution, and the left initial rotation position. The sensor 69a is turned on at each timing, and as shown in FIGS. 50 (e) and 50 (f), the disk movable object 62a on the right side makes one round, and the rotation initial position sensor 69b on the right side is each. It turns on at the timing. Since the disk movable objects 62a and 62b have reached the limit positions by the timing of t4, the sliding movement of these disk movable objects 62a and 62b is stopped.

After that, at the timing of t5, which is immediately after the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 50 (a), a command indicating that the disk effect should be stopped is received from the display side MPU 122. In this case, the timing of t5 is the timing at which the movable discs 62a and 62b have passed the initial rotation positions.

Here, from the viewpoint of reducing the monitoring processing load, the monitoring of the detection results from the initial rotation position sensors 69a and 69b on the sound light side MPU 112 receives a command from the display side MPU 122 indicating that the disk effect should be stopped. Will be started later. Further, in the sound / light side MPU 112, after monitoring the detection result from the left rotation initial position sensor 69a, the detection result is monitored from the right rotation initial position sensor 69b. Then, as shown in FIGS. 50 (b) and 50 (e), the rotation of the left disk movable object 62a is immediately stopped depending on the timing of receiving the stop command command from the display side MPU 122, while the rotation is immediately stopped. A situation may occur in which the rotation of the disk movable object 62b on the right side is stopped after one lap. In this case, there is a possibility that the rotation periods of the left and right disk movable objects 62a and 62b are unintentionally different in the design of the pachinko machine 10, despite the disk effect produced by the synchronous control process. That is, as shown in FIGS. 50 (d) and 50 (g), the disk movable object 62a on the left side rotates from the timing of t1 to the timing of t5, whereas the disk movable object 62b on the right side rotates. It will rotate from the timing of t1 to the timing of t6, which is longer than that, and the stop timing will not be synchronized.

Next, with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 51, a disk effect by the synchronous control process when the adjustment process for stopping the rotation and the process associated therewith are executed will be described.

FIG. 51 (a) shows the reception status of the command from the display side MPU 122, FIG. 51 (b) shows the rotation position of the disk movable object 62a on the left side, and FIG. 51 (c) shows the rotation initial position sensor 69a on the left side. The detection status is shown, FIG. 51 (d) shows the limited range on the left side, FIG. 51 (e) shows the rotation position of the disk movable object 62b on the right side, and FIG. 51 (f) shows the rotation initial position sensor 69b on the right side. The detection status is shown, FIG. 51 (g) shows the restriction range on the right side, and FIG. 51 (h) shows the state of the stop restriction flag.

As shown in FIG. 51 (a), by receiving a command from the display side MPU 122 indicating that the disk effect by synchronous control should be started at the timing of t1, the disk on the left side as shown in FIG. 51 (b). At the same time as the rotation of the movable object 62a is started, the rotation of the disk movable object 62b on the right side is started as shown in FIG. 51 (e). Further, in this case, although the description by illustration is omitted, the slide movement toward the limit position is started in the pair of left and right disk movable objects 62a and 62b.

After that, at the timing of t2, the timing of t3, and the timing of t4, as shown in FIGS. 51 (b) and 51 (c), the left disk movable object 62a makes one round, and the left initial rotation position. The sensor 69a is turned on at each timing, and as shown in FIGS. 51 (e) and 51 (f), the disk movable object 62b on the right side makes one round, and the rotation initial position sensor 69b on the right side is each. It turns on at the timing. Since the disk movable objects 62a and 62b have reached the limit positions by the timing of t3, the sliding movement of these disk movable objects 62a and 62b is stopped.

In this case, at the timing of t4, which is the timing immediately before the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 51 (a), a command indicating that the disk effect should be stopped is received from the display side MPU 122. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 51 (c) and 51 (f), the timing of the t4 is not the timing at which the movable discs 62a and 62b have passed the initial rotation position, but FIG. 51 ( As shown in d) and FIG. 51 (g), it corresponds to the limited range of the movable discs 62a and 62b.

Here, the operation contents when the command of the stop command is received in the limited range and the limited range will be described again with reference to FIG. 52. 52 (a1) and 52 (a2) are schematic views showing the left disk movable object 62a, and FIGS. 52 (b1) and 52 (b2) are schematic views showing the right disk movable object 62b.

As shown in FIGS. 52 (a1) and 52 (b1), the limiting range Y includes all the number of steps corresponding to the detection range X of the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b, and is in the positive direction from the range of the number of steps. It is set to have a wide range for a predetermined number of steps for both the side and the reverse side. Specifically, the limited range Y is set as ± 5% (± 15 steps) of the maximum number of steps (300 steps) with respect to the number of steps at the initial rotation position.

When any of the movable disk objects 62a and 62b is present at the rotation position of the number of steps included in the limited range and a command corresponding to the stop command is received from the display side MPU 122, the step for determining the stop release is made. The monitoring of the detection result from the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b is not executed for several minutes or more. That is, until the disk movable objects 62a and 62b rotate for the number of steps for determining the stop release, even if the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are detected by the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b, the rotation is not stopped. The number of steps for determining the stop release is defined as the number of steps equal to or greater than the number of steps included in the limit range, and specifically, 150 to ensure that the position is rotated 180 ° with respect to the initial rotation position. It is defined in the steps. Therefore, when any of the movable disk objects 62a and 62b is present at the rotation position of the number of steps included in the limited range and the command corresponding to the stop command is received from the display side MPU 122, FIG. 52 (a2) ) And the rotation position shown in FIG. 52 (b2), the stop control of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b is restricted.

Returning to the description of FIG. 51, when a command corresponding to the stop command is received from the display side MPU 122 at the timing of t4, which is the timing included in the restriction range on the left side and the restriction range on the right side, as shown in FIG. 51 (h). , "1" is set in the stop restriction flag at the timing of t4. Since the state in which the stop restriction flag is set is maintained until the timing of t6, at the timing of t5, as shown in FIGS. 51 (c) and 51 (f), each rotation initial position sensor 69a, Even if 69b is ON, the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are not stopped.

After that, at the timing of t6, as shown in FIGS. 51 (b) and 51 (e), the left and right disk movable objects 62a and 62b advance in the rotation direction by the number of steps for determining the stop release, thereby limiting the stop. The flag is cleared to "0". Then, at the timing of t7, as shown in FIGS. 51 (c) and 51 (f), the initial rotation position sensors 69a and 69b are turned on, so that FIGS. 51 (b) and 51 (e) show. As shown, the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are stopped at the same time.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

Since the rotational movement of the movable discs 62a and 62b is stopped after being detected by the initial rotation position sensors 69a and 69b, the movable discs 62a and 62b have a mode when the rotation is stopped, a mode when the rotation is not performed, and a mode when the rotation is started. It is possible to unify the aspects. Further, the control modes for operating the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are start control, stop command flag setting control, and stop control when the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b detect after the stop command flag is set. Since it is standardized in each of the above modes, the processing can be simplified when the operating periods of the movable disk objects 62a and 62b are diversified.

By adjusting the setting timing of the stop command flag in relation to the timing when the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are detected by the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b, it is possible to adjust the number of laps of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b. Is. That is, it is possible to diversify the number of laps of the movable disk 62a, 62b while enabling the rotation to be stopped after being detected by the rotation initial position sensors 69a, 69b simply by adjusting the setting timing of the stop command flag. Become.

By adjusting the setting timing of the stop command flag in relation to the timing when the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are detected by the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b, the rotation stop timing of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b can be changed to the slide stop timing. It is possible to move it back and forth. That is, it is possible to diversify the operation modes of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b only by adjusting the setting timing of the stop command flag.

When the stop command flag is set to "1" when the number of steps of the movable disk 62a, 62b is included in the limit range, the movable disk 62a, 62b is detected by the initial rotation position sensors 69a, 69b. Even if it is done, the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are not stopped. As a result, if the stop control of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b is executed, the disk movable objects 62a and 62b cannot be stopped in synchronization with each other. It is possible to avoid the stop of the 62b, and it becomes easy to stop the movable disks 62a and 62b in a synchronized state.

In a configuration in which the disk rotation drive units 67a and 67b for driving the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are stepping motors, the rotation positions of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are grasped by using the number of steps of the stepping motor. As a result, the processing configuration for grasping the rotation positions of the movable disks 62a and 62b can be simplified.

When the stop command flag is set when the disk movable objects 62a, 62b are detected by the rotation initial position sensors 69a, 69b, or immediately after the stop command flag is set, the disk is possible by the rotation initial position sensors 69a, 69b. When animals 62a and 62b are detected and attempts to stop the movable disk 62a and 62b, only one movable disk 62a stops and the other movable disk 62b continues to rotate. Can occur. On the other hand, when the stop command flag is set in such a situation, the stop of the movable disk 62a and 62b is restricted, so that the movable disk 62a and 62b are stopped in a synchronized state. It will be easier.

Even if the stopping of the movable discs 62a and 62b is restricted, it is within the range of one lap, so that the rotation period of the movable discs 62a and 62b is not longer than necessary. It is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

By not executing the monitoring process of the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b, the stoppage of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b is restricted. In this case, the restriction is released when the number of steps of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b becomes the number of steps for determining the stop release. As a result, the processing configuration for grasping the rotation positions of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b and the processing configuration for releasing the restriction on stopping the disk movable objects 62a and 62b can be simplified.

When the third stage effect is performed as the curtain plate effect, when the curtain plate movable object 52 is lowered in the horizontal state after the end of the second stage operation in which the curtain plate movable object 52 is alternately tilted. Rather than individually controlling the drive units 56a and 56b for the curtain plate with the drive time to determine the start timing of the lowering operation, the pair of adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b detect the corresponding slide members 55a and 55b, respectively. On the condition that the curtain plate movable object 52 is lowered in the horizontal state, the curtain plate movable object 52 is configured to be lowered. As a result, when lowering the movable curtain plate 52, it becomes easier to secure the lowering operation in the horizontal state.

Further, in a configuration in which the speaker unit 45 performs sound output control corresponding to the start of the descending operation of the curtain plate movable object 52 in the horizontal state, and the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 perform light emission control accordingly. The condition is that the start timings of the sound output control and the light emission control are not specified by measuring the elapsed time, but the corresponding slide members 55a and 55b are detected by the pair of adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b, respectively. In addition, these sound output control and light emission control are started. As a result, in a configuration in which sound output control and light emission control are performed according to the lowering motion of the curtain plate movable object 52, the start timings of these sound output control and light emission control are synchronized with the start timing of the lowering motion of the curtain plate movable object 52. It will be easier.

Further, even when the second stage effect is performed, when the curtain plate movable object 52 is raised in the horizontal state after the end of the second stage operation in which the curtain plate movable object 52 is alternately tilted. Rather than individually controlling the drive units 56a and 56b for the curtain plate with the drive time to determine the start timing of the ascending operation, the pair of adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b detect the corresponding slide members 55a and 55b, respectively. On condition that this is done, the movable curtain plate 52 is configured to perform the ascending operation in the horizontal state. As a result, when raising the curtain plate movable object 52, it becomes easy to secure the raising operation in the horizontal state.

Further, the adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b are provided on the limit position side of the curtain plate initial position sensors 57a and 57b, and whether the curtain plate movable object 52 is in the horizontal state by using the detection result of the adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b. By determining whether or not the curtain plate is movable, it is not necessary to return the curtain plate movable object 52 to the initial position when switching to the operation mode of horizontally lowering after the operation mode of alternately tilting. This makes it possible to switch the operation mode at an early stage.

The sound light side MPU 112 controls the execution of the effect in the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 and the speaker unit 45 based on the command transmitted by the display side MPU 122, and the display side MPU 122 has a design based on the command transmitted by the sound light side MPU 112. Controls the execution of the effect on the display device 31. As a result, when the effects are executed in the same period by each of the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73, the speaker unit 45, and the symbol display device 31, the effects are less likely to be deviated. Therefore, it is possible to preferably perform an effect using a plurality of types of effect means.

In particular, when the main MPU 92 is used as a reference, the display side MPU 122 transmits a command in the sound light side MPU 112 even though the sound light side MPU 112 exists on the upstream side of the communication with respect to the display side MPU 122. Since the structure is such that the effect is executed after the effect is intentionally waited, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of deviation in each effect in the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73, the speaker unit 45, and the symbol display device 31. It becomes.

In the configuration in which when the effect operation device 48 is operated, the effect corresponding to the effect is executed by each of the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73, the speaker unit 45, and the symbol display device 31, the display side MPU 122 has a sound light side MPU 112. After the operation generation command is transmitted, the symbol display device 31 performs an operation-corresponding effect. Not only that, the sound / light side MPU 112 has various light emitting units 71 to 73 after the display side MPU 122 transmits the operation effect command. And the speaker unit 45 produces an operation-compatible effect. In the configuration in which the signal indicating whether or not the effect operation device 48 has been operated is input to the sound light side MPU 112 in this way, the sound light side MPU 112 dares to wait for the display side MPU 122 to transmit the operation effect command before operating. Since the configuration is such that the effect of the above is executed, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of deviation in each effect corresponding to the operation.

The processing load is lower in the sound output control of the speaker unit 45 and the light emission control of the various light emitting units groups 71 to 73 than in the display control of the symbol display device 31. In this case, the signal of the effect operating device 48 is input to the sound light side MPU 112. As a result, it is not necessary to monitor the effect operation device 48 on the display side MPU 122 on the side where the processing load is relatively high, and the processing load on the display side MPU 122 can be reduced.

Since the sound light side MPU 112 only needs to start monitoring whether or not the effect operation device 48 has been operated when the display side MPU 122 transmits an operation valid start command, the sound light side MPU 112 independently sets the start timing of the monitoring. No need to identify. As a result, the processing load of the sound-light side MPU 112 can be reduced in a configuration in which the effect corresponding to the operation is less likely to be deviated. Further, since the main body that determines the start timing of various processes in the sound light side MPU 112 is integrated in the display side MPU 122, the processing configuration can be simplified.

Whether or not the operation of the effect operation device 48 is during the valid period is determined not only on the sound light side MPU 112 but also on the display side MPU 122. As a result, the possibility that the operation-corresponding effect is executed even though the effect operation device 48 is not operated during the valid period is reduced.

When the sound / light side MPU 112 receives the operation valid command from the display side MPU 122, the sound / light side MPU 112 transmits an execution permission command to the display side MPU 122. Then, the display side MPU 122 starts the operation effect by receiving the execution permission command. As a result, it is possible to start the operation effect after confirming that the operation valid command is normally received by the sound light side MPU 112 on the display side MPU 122.

Since the sound light side MPU 112 may control the execution of the effects of the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 and the speaker unit 45 according to the execution timing of the effect determined by the display side MPU 122, the sound light side MPU 112 independently executes the effect. There is no need to identify. As a result, in a configuration in which deviations are less likely to occur in each effect, the processing load can be reduced as compared with the case where the execution timing of the effect can be independently specified for each of the sound light side MPU 112 and the display side MPU 122. Be done.

The sound-light side MPU 112 not only follows the execution timing of the effect determined by the display-side MPU 122, but also the content of the effect to be executed may follow the content determined by the display-side MPU 122. The processing load can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the content is determined.

In a configuration in which the execution timing of the effect is specified by the sound / light side MPU 112 according to the command transmitted from the display side MPU 122, the display side MPU 122 does not transmit a command each time the control execution timing is reached, but a predetermined control. Since the command is transmitted when the execution timing is reached, it is possible to reduce the frequency of command transmission on the display side MPU 122. As a result, the processing load on the display side MPU 122 can be reduced.

The table data corresponding to the entire effect executed in the game times and the open / close execution mode is read out by the display side MPU 122. On the other hand, the sound and light side MPU 112 does not read the table data corresponding to the whole, and responds to the command transmitted from the display side MPU 122 at each timing in the game times and the open / close execution mode during the period. The control data of a part of the effect to be executed is read out. As a result, the storage capacity required for reading the control data can be suppressed as compared with the configuration in which the sound light side MPU 112 and the display side MPU 122 each read the control data corresponding to the whole.

In particular, since the display side MPU 122 on the display control side of the symbol display device 31 reads out the table data corresponding to the entire effect executed in the game times and the open / close execution mode, even if some communication abnormality occurs. , It becomes possible to continue updating the display on the symbol display device 31. Since the effect on the symbol display device 31 is easily noticed by the player, the influence when a communication abnormality occurs is reduced by continuing to update the display on the symbol display device 31.

The series of effects of the game times and the opening / closing execution mode may include a plurality of effect ranges having different modes of effect, and the control data of a part of the above is set corresponding to the plurality of effect ranges. .. As a result, it is possible to prevent the unit of the control data from becoming too fragmented, and it is possible to appropriately suppress the reading frequency of the control data in the sound light side MPU 112.

By referring to the data table at each control execution timing on the display side MPU 122, it is possible to control the execution of a series of effects of the game times and the open / close execution mode, and also the command transmission timing for the sound light side MPU 112. It is possible to identify. Therefore, the information to be referred to on the display side MPU 122 is aggregated, and the processing load can be reduced.

In a configuration in which the sound-light side MPU 112 exists on the upstream side of the communication from the display-side MPU 122 with reference to the main-side MPU 92, and the execution content of those effects is determined by the sound-light side MPU 112 at the start of the game rotation or the opening / closing execution mode. Since the display side MPU 122 reads out the data table corresponding to the entire effect executed in the game times and the open / close execution mode, it is possible to disperse the processing load.

In the configuration in which the sound light side MPU 112 specifies the start trigger of the game rotation and the opening / closing execution mode production, the sound light side MPU 112 dares to wait for the display side MPU 122 to transmit a command, and then the production corresponding to these series of productions is performed. Since the configuration is such that the light emitting units are started by the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 and the speaker unit 45, it is possible to suppress a deviation in the start timing of the effect.

When starting a series of effects in the game round or open / close execution mode, it waits until a command is transmitted from the display side MPU 122, whereas when an abnormality occurs, it waits until a command is transmitted from the display side MPU 122. The sound and light side MPU 112 independently starts the notification. As a result, it is possible to start the notification at an early stage, and even if a communication abnormality occurs between the sound light side MPU 112 and the display side MPU 122, the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 and the speaker unit 45 notify the notification. Can be started.

In the configuration in which the display side MPU 122 reads out the data table corresponding to the entire effect executed in the game times, the sound light side MPU 112 has the game result information (information on whether or not it is a big hit result, or a big hit). The result type information) is stored in memory. As a result, in the configuration in which the sound / light side MPU 112 controls the execution of the effect according to the command transmitted by the display side MPU 122, it is possible to take into account the game result when controlling the execution of the effect.

Since the display-side MPU 122 may transmit a command to the sound-light side MPU 112 without taking into account the game result information, the configuration for transmitting the command can be optimized. Further, the sound / light side MPU 112 stores the information of the game result, and after determining whether or not the content of the effect to be executed corresponding to the command transmitted by the display side MPU 122 corresponds to the game result. In order to control the execution of the effect, when the configuration for transmitting the command to the display side MPU 122 is optimized as described above, the sound light side MPU 112 can control the execution of the effect corresponding to the game result. It will be possible.

When the final effect is performed by the symbol display device 31, the sound light side MPU 112 executes the effect corresponding to the content of the final effect regardless of whether or not the content of the final effect corresponds to the game result. Control is done. As a result, it is possible to prioritize the matching of the contents of the effect between the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73, the speaker unit 45, and the symbol display device 31, and it is possible to make it difficult for the effect to deviate.

The sound light side MPU 112 can read out control data corresponding to different start timing effects during the game rotation from one command transmitted by the display side MPU 122. This makes it possible to reduce the frequency of command transmission on the display side MPU 122.

By applying different start position numbers and durations to the palette data, the sound light side MPU 112 can derive a plurality of light emission data for controlling light emission of the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 in a predetermined period. Is. As a result, the storage required in the sound light side ROM 113 is compared with the configuration in which the light emission data different for each type of effect executed in the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 is stored in the sound light side ROM 113 at the pachinko machine 10 manufacturing stage. It is possible to reduce the capacity.

Since the light emission data is derived by applying at least the start position number and the duration to the palette data, it is possible to diversify the light emission data derived from one palette data. In this case, 151 g of a data selection table that defines the correspondence between the pallet data to be used and the type of start position number and the type of duration applied to the pallet data is stored in advance in the sound / light side ROM 113. Therefore, the process for specifying the correspondence between the palette data and the parameter data applied to the palette data can be simplified.

A plurality of palette data are stored, and a plurality of start position numbers are also stored. As a result, diversification of light emission data can be realized while suppressing the storage capacity required for the sound light side ROM 113. In this case, the start position data that defines the correspondence between the palette data and the start position number is stored in advance. This simplifies the process for specifying the correspondence between the pallet data and the start position number.

In the palette data, the content of the emission color of the switching destination when the emission colors of the LEDs 71a to 73a are sequentially switched is defined, and the start position number applied to the palette data is defined in the palette data. It is a parameter indicating from which emission color of the switching destination the emission control of the LEDs 71a to 73a is started from among the emission colors of the plurality of switching destinations. With such a configuration, it is possible to derive a plurality of light emission data from one palette data by a simple method of making the start position numbers different, and the light emission data while suppressing the storage capacity of the sound light side ROM 113. Diversification can be realized while facilitating design.

The palette data defines the content of the emission color of the switching destination when the emission colors of the LEDs 71a to 73a are sequentially switched, and the duration applied to the palette data is defined in the palette data. It is a parameter indicating the duration when the emission color of the replacement destination is continued. With such a configuration, it is possible to derive a plurality of light emission data from one palette data by a simple method of different durations, and various light emission data can be obtained while suppressing the storage capacity of the sound light side ROM 113. It is possible to realize this while facilitating the design.

The light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 include a plurality of LEDs 71a to 73a, and while using the same palette data for the plurality of LEDs 71a to 73a, the start position numbers and continuations applied to a part of these LEDs 71a to 73a. By making the time different, it is possible to derive different light emission data for a plurality of LEDs 71a to 73a while using the same palette data. As a result, the same palette data can be used even when different effects are executed among the plurality of LEDs 71a to 73a, so that it is possible to diversify the effects while suppressing the storage capacity.

The same palette data may be used for one light emitting unit group 71 to 73, or different palette data may be used. As a result, it is possible to switch between a simple light emitting effect mode and a complicated light emitting effect mode only by changing the number of palette data applied to the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73.

When applying different palette data to one light emitting unit group 71 to 73, list data and group data indicating the type of palette data corresponding to each LED 71a to 73a included in the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 are used. It is a configuration to be done. This simplifies the process for applying the pallet data corresponding to each of the LEDs 71a to 73a.

The light emission data area 162 is provided with a base area 162a, an interrupt area 162b, and a notification area 162c, and each of these areas 162a to 162c can store light emission data. As a result, it became necessary to control the light emission of the light emitting groups 71 to 73 by using other light emission data in the situation where the light emission control of the light emitting groups 71 to 73 is performed by using one light emission data. Even in this case, the other light emission data can be stored separately from the above-mentioned one light emission data. As a result, it is possible to generate various light emission patterns depending on the situation in one light emitting group group 71 to 73. Further, when switching from one light emission pattern to the next light emission pattern, it is possible to keep the light emission data corresponding to the former light emission pattern, so that the processing load when returning to the former light emission pattern can be reduced. It is planned.

When the use of the previously used light emission data is stopped and the use of other light emission data is started, the use of the other light emission data is terminated and the light emission data used earlier is used. In the case of recovery, at the recovery timing, the light emitting mode similar to the case where the light emitting data used earlier is continuously used is performed in the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73. As a result, even if interrupt use of other light emission data occurs, it is possible for the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 to perform the light emission mode according to the elapsed time. In particular, in a configuration in which the light emitting modes of the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 are associated with the display contents of the symbol display device 31, it is possible to secure a correspondence relationship with the display contents of the symbol display device 31.

The light emission data has a priority when the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 are to be used, and when a single light emission data is used when a plurality of light emission data are stored at the same time, the priority is high. It is a configuration that uses light emission data. As a result, in a configuration in which a plurality of light emission data are stored at the same time, the light emission data having a high priority is used, so that the light emission operation generated in the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 can be made appropriate. Further, even when a plurality of light emission data are stored at the same time, it is possible to easily select the light emission data to be used by comparing the priorities. Therefore, the process for selecting the light emission data to be used can be simplified.

The light emitting data area 162 of the sound light side RAM 114 is provided with a base area 162a, an interrupting area 162b, and a notification area 162c, and the priority of the light emitting data is set for each of these areas. As a result, when selecting the light emission data to be used, it is not necessary to compare the priorities for each light emission data. Therefore, the process for selecting the light emission data to be used can be simplified.

The interrupt area 162b has a configuration in which a new light emission data storage instruction can be generated in a situation where the light emission data is already stored in the interrupt area 162b, and the light emission data stored in the interrupt area 162b , The light emitting side priority for storing in the interrupting area 162b is defined, and when a new light emitting data storage instruction is issued in a situation where the light emitting data is already stored in the interrupting area 162b, the storage instruction has already been made. When the stored light emission data has a higher light emission side priority than the new light emission data, the already stored light emission data is stored without executing the storage process of the new light emission data. If the new light emission data is maintained and the light emission side priority is higher than the already stored light emission data, the new light emission data is overwritten in the interrupt area 162b.

With such a configuration, in a situation where one light emitting data is used to control light emission of the light emitting groups 71 to 73, another light emitting data is used to control the light emission of the light emitting groups 71 to 73. When the need arises, it is possible to switch to the light emission control using the other light emission data. This makes it possible for one light emitting group group 71 to 73 to perform various operations depending on the situation. Further, in a configuration in which new light emission data can be overwritten even when the light emission data is already stored in the interrupt area 162b, the light emission data having a high priority on the light emitting side is stored in the interrupt area 162b. Therefore, it is possible to make the light emitting operation in the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 appropriate. Furthermore, when determining the light emission data to be stored in the interrupt area 162b, it is only necessary to compare the light emitting side priorities, so that the process of storing the light emission data in the interrupt area 162b can be simplified. ..

The sound output data area 163 is provided with first sound output areas 171 to 16th sound output areas 186, and each of these areas 171 to 186 can store sound output data. As a result, in a situation where the sound output control of the speaker unit 45 is performed using one sound output data, it becomes necessary to perform the sound output control of the speaker unit 45 using other sound output data. Even if there is, the other sound output data can be stored separately from the above-mentioned one sound output data. This makes it possible for the speaker unit 45 to output various sounds depending on the situation. Furthermore, when switching from one sound output pattern to the next sound output pattern, it is possible to retain the sound output data corresponding to the former sound output pattern, so that when returning to the former sound output pattern, The processing load can be reduced.

When the use of the previously used sound output data is stopped and the use of other sound output data is started, the use of the other sound output data is terminated and the previously used sound output data is used. When returning to the state of being used, at the return timing, the speaker unit 45 performs the same sound output as in the case where the sound output data used earlier is continuously used. As a result, even if interrupt use of other sound output data occurs, it is possible for the speaker unit 45 to perform a sound output mode according to the elapsed time. In particular, in a configuration in which the sound output mode of the speaker unit 45 is associated with the display content of the symbol display device 31, it is possible to secure a correspondence relationship with the display content of the symbol display device 31.

The sound output data defines the priority on the sound output side when the speaker unit 45 is to be used, and when a single sound output data is used when a plurality of sound output data are stored at the same time, the sound is used. This configuration is intended for use with sound output data that has a high priority on the output side. As a result, in a configuration in which a plurality of sound output data are stored at the same time, the sound output data having a high priority on the sound output side is used, so that the sound output operation generated in the speaker unit 45 can be made appropriate. It becomes. Further, even when a plurality of sound output data are stored at the same time, it is possible to easily select the sound output data to be used by comparing the priority of the sound output side. Therefore, the process for selecting the sound output data to be used can be simplified.

<Second embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration for synchronizing the rotation stop timings of the pair of left and right disk movable objects 62a and 62b in the disk effect by the synchronization control processing is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the different configurations will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 53A is a flowchart showing the sensor monitoring process executed by the sound light side MPU 112. The sensor monitoring process is periodically executed in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) of the sound / light side MPU 112 regardless of whether or not a disc effect stop command is generated from the display side MPU 122. Further, since the sensor monitoring process is executed once each time the timer interrupt process is started, the synchronous control process described later is executed once, but at least once. It becomes.

In the sensor monitoring process, first, in step S3101, the history shift process on the left side is executed. Here, as shown in FIG. 53B, the movable object data area 164 of the sound / light side RAM 114 has the left side current area 164a as an area for storing the detection result of the left rotation initial position sensor 69a. , The previous area 164b on the left side and the front-end area 164c on the left side are provided. The latest detection result of the rotation initial position sensor 69a on the left side is stored in the current area 164a on the left side. In the previous area 164b on the left side, the detection result of the rotation initial position sensor 69a on the left side one process before the detection result stored in the current area 164a on the left side is stored. The detection result stored in the left-hand rotation initial position sensor 69a two times before the detection result stored in the left-side current area 164a is stored in the left-hand front-preliminary area 164c. In step S3101, after clearing the left pre-previous area 164c, the data stored in the left pre-previous area 164b is shifted to the left pre-previous area 164c, and the data stored in the left pre-previous area 164a is transferred to the left side. Shift to area 164b last time and clear area 164a this time on the left side. After that, in step S3102, the detection result of the rotation initial position sensor 69a on the left side is stored in the area 164a this time on the left side. In each area 164a to 164c, "1", which is one of the binary data, is stored when the detection result of the rotation initial position sensor 69a on the left side is in the ON state, and when it is in the OFF state, it is stored. The other "0" is stored.

In the following step S3103, the history shift process on the right side is executed. Here, as shown in FIG. 53 (b), the movable object data area 164 of the sound / light side RAM 114 has the right side area 164d as an area for storing the detection result of the rotation initial position sensor 69b on the right side. , The previous area 164e on the right side and the previous area 164f on the right side are provided. The latest detection result of the rotation initial position sensor 69b on the right side is stored in the area 164d this time on the right side. In the previous area 164e on the right side, the detection result in the rotation initial position sensor 69b on the right side one process before the detection result stored in the current area 164d on the right side is stored. The detection result stored in the area 164d this time on the right side is stored in the area 164f before the previous rotation on the right side, and the detection result in the rotation initial position sensor 69b on the right side two processing times before is stored. In step S3103, after clearing the previous area 164f on the right side, the data stored in the previous area 164e on the right side is shifted to the previous area 164f on the right side, and the data stored in the area 164d before the previous time on the right side is transferred to the right side. Shift to area 164e last time and clear area 164d this time on the right side. After that, in step S3104, the detection result of the rotation initial position sensor 69b on the right side is stored in the area 164d this time on the right side, and then the sensor monitoring process ends. In each area 164d to 164f, "1", which is one of the binary data, is stored when the detection result of the rotation initial position sensor 69b on the right side is in the ON state, and when it is in the OFF state, it is stored. The other "0" is stored.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the synchronization control process in the present embodiment executed in the sound light side MPU 112.

First, in step S3201, it is determined whether or not the movable disk objects 62a and 62b are after the start of rotation and before the return operation. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3201, it is determined in step S3202 whether or not "1" is set in the stop command flag of the sound / light side RAM 114. If a negative determination is made in step S3202, the synchronization control process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S3202, the process proceeds to step S3203.

In step S3203, the slide start process on the left side toward the initial position is executed as in step S2716 in the first embodiment, and in step S3204, the initial stage is performed as in step S2717 in the first embodiment. Executes the slide start process on the right side toward the position. After that, in step S3205, the history calculation process on the left side is executed, and in step S3206, the history calculation process on the right side is executed.

In the history calculation process on the left side, data is read from each of the left side current area 164a, the left side previous time area 164b, and the left side previous two times area 164c in the movable object data area 164 of the sound light side RAM 114, and the contents of those data are the initial rotation positions. Performs the arithmetic processing necessary to determine whether or not the content corresponds to. Specifically, the data read from the area 164c two times before the previous time is inverted (“0” → “1”, “1” → “0”), the inverted data, the data from the area 164a this time, and the previous area. AND processing with the data from 164b.

Further, in the history calculation process on the right side, data is read from each of the current area 164d on the right side, the previous area 164e on the right side, and the previous area 164f on the right side in the movable object data area 164 of the sound light side RAM 114, and the contents of those data are rotated. The arithmetic processing necessary for determining whether or not the content corresponds to the initial position is executed. Specifically, the data read from the area 164f two times before the previous time is inverted (“0” → “1”, “1” → “0”), the inverted data, the data from the area 164d this time, and the previous area. AND processing with the data from 164e.

In the following step S3207, it is determined whether or not the history calculation results of both the step S3205 and the step S3206 correspond to the stop results. Specifically, it is determined whether or not both history calculation results are "1". That is, in both the left and right history areas, it is determined whether or not the history state is such that the area before the previous time is "0" and the previous area and the current area are both "1". If a negative determination is made in step S3207, the present synchronization control process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S3207, the rotation stop process is executed in step S3208, and then the present synchronization control process is terminated. .. In the rotation stop process, the drive state of both the disk rotation drive unit 67a on the left side and the disk rotation drive unit 67b on the right side is stopped.

If a negative determination is made in step S3201, it is determined in step S3209 whether or not the return operation is in progress. When the return operation is in progress, in steps S321 to S3213, a process for stopping the slide movement of the movable disk 62a and 62b at the initial slide position is executed. The processing contents of steps S321 to S3213 are the same as the processing contents of steps S2901 to S2904 in the first embodiment.

In the following step S3214, it is determined whether or not at least one of the movable disk objects 62a and 62b is rotating. If a negative determination is made in step S3214, the synchronization control process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S3214, the process proceeds to step S3215.

In step S3215, the history calculation process on the left side is executed in the same manner as in step S3205, and in the subsequent step S3206, it is determined whether or not the history calculation result corresponds to the stop result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3216, the drive state of the disk rotation drive unit 67a on the left side is stopped by executing the rotation stop process on the left side in step S3217.

If a negative determination is made in step S3216, or if the process of step S3217 is executed, the history calculation process on the right side is executed in step S3218 in the same manner as in step S3206, and the history calculation is performed in subsequent step S3219. Determine if the result corresponds to a stop result. If a negative determination is made in step S3219, the synchronous control process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S3219, the rotation stop process on the right side is executed in step S3220 to obtain the right side. After stopping the drive state of the disk rotation drive unit 67b, the synchronous control process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S3209, the synchronization control process ends after executing other processes in step S3221. In the other processing, the processing of steps S2701 to S2712 of the synchronization control processing (FIG. 46) in the first embodiment is executed. However, in the synchronous control process in the present embodiment, the stop timing is not adjusted by monitoring the number of steps, so that the process corresponding to step S2708 and step S2709 does not execute the step number update process.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, unlike the first embodiment, the detection results of the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b are stored as a history, so that the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are stored. Even if a stop command for disc production is issued immediately after is placed in the initial rotation position, by checking the history, it can be accurately confirmed that the movable discs 62a and 62b are placed in the initial rotation position. It becomes possible to grasp. Therefore, both disk movable objects 62a and 62b do not have to adopt a configuration in which the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are rotated by an extra rotation or a configuration in which the number of steps is monitored as in the first embodiment. It is possible to stop at the initial rotation position in a synchronized state.

Further, when both the left and right history areas have data contents corresponding to the stop result, the rotation of the movable disk 62a and 62b is stopped, so that both the movable disk 62a and 62b are rotated. It is possible to stop at the initial position.

Further, when specifying the stop timing of each of the movable disk objects 62a and 62b, the left and right history areas are always referred to, and the same history calculation process is executed. Therefore, it is possible to standardize the processing configuration for specifying the stop timing, and the processing configuration can be simplified.

The sensor monitoring process may be executed twice or more for one execution of the synchronization control process. In this case, the detection results of the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b can be monitored in more detail.

<Third embodiment>
In the present embodiment, when the third stage operation is started in the curtain plate effect by the third stage effect, not only the light emission control and the sound output control but also the display control executes the display effect synchronized with the execution control. It is said. Hereinafter, the different configurations will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the pair waiting control process in the present embodiment, which is executed in the sound light side MPU 112.

First, in step S3301, similarly to step S2301 in the first embodiment, it is determined whether or not the drive has been started, and if a negative determination is made in step S3301, the first step S3302 is performed. Similar to step S2302 in the above embodiment, the pair waiting control process is terminated after the return start process is executed for the drive units 56a and 56b for both curtain plates.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S3301, it is determined in step S3303 whether or not any of the adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b is ON, as in step S2303 in the first embodiment. .. If a negative determination is made in step S3303, the pair waiting control process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S3303, in step S3304, as in step S2304 in the first embodiment, Stop processing of the corresponding curtain plate drive units 56a and 56b is executed.

In the following step S3305, similarly to step S2305 in the first embodiment, it is determined whether or not both the adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b are ON. If a negative determination is made in step S3305, the pair waiting control process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S3305, the process proceeds to step S3306.

In step S3306, as in step S2306 in the first embodiment, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the third stage effect flag. When an affirmative determination is made in step S3306, in step S3307, as in step S2307 in the first embodiment, the light emission data reading process for the third stage effect is executed, and in step S3308. , The sound output data reading process for the third stage effect is executed in the same manner as in step S2308 in the first embodiment. After that, in step S3309, a progress command is transmitted to the display side MPU 122. Then, in step S3310, similarly to step S2309 in the first embodiment, the pair wait control flag is cleared to "0", the third stage control flag is set to "1", and then the pair wait control is performed. End the process. If a negative determination is made in step S3306, the pair wait control flag is cleared to "0" and the return control flag is set to "1" in step S3311, as in step S2310 in the first embodiment. After setting, the pair wait control process ends.

FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing a command correspondence process in the present embodiment executed by the display side MPU 122.

In step S3401, it is determined whether or not a progress command is received from the sound light side MPU 112. If a progress command has been received, this command is supported after executing the skip process to the start pointer information of the effect range corresponding to the progress command in the currently set pattern data table in step S3402. End the process.

In the pattern data table, the contents of tasks corresponding to the execution of the curtain plate effect by the third stage effect are set. In this case, the content of the task is set to keep displaying the same image before the third stage operation, or to keep a predetermined moving image looping before the third stage operation, and progresses. When the command is received, the setting is canceled and the display effect corresponding to the third stage operation is started. As a result, the execution control of the display effect is based on the display control with the passage of time, and the start of the third stage operation is exceptionally controlled based on the start command from the sound / light side MPU 112. .. With such a configuration, in a configuration in which a display effect corresponding to the third stage operation is performed, the display effect can be easily synchronized with the operation of the curtain plate movable object 52.

If a negative determination is made in step S3401, the process corresponding to this command is terminated after executing other processes in step S3403. In the other processing, the same processing as in steps S801 to S811 of the command correspondence processing (FIG. 17) in the first embodiment is executed.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, as an effect for the game round, the symbol variation display is performed in a predetermined mode on the symbol display device 31 (specifically, the symbol variation display is started at high speed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3). The unit variation display in which the variation display is terminated and the predetermined stop symbol is stopped and displayed can occur a plurality of times after the start in. Along with this, the processing contents of the main command correspondence process and the display side command correspondence processing in the sound light side MPU 112 are different from those of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, each of these corresponding processes will be described. In the following description, the effect in which the unit variation display is performed a plurality of times in one game time is referred to as a pseudo game time effect, and each unit variation display time in the pseudo game time effect is referred to as a pseudo game time.

FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the main command correspondence process in the present embodiment.

First, in step S3501, it is determined whether or not a variation command and a type command have been received from the main MPU 92. When these commands are received, the game result and the display duration are stored in step S3502. The game result information is specified from the type command as in the first embodiment, and the display duration information is specified from the variation command.

In the following step S3503, it is determined whether or not the display duration of this time corresponds to the execution of the pseudo game rotation effect. That is, whether or not to execute the pseudo game rotation effect is uniquely determined by the display duration. In this case, in the main MPU 92, it is easier to select the display duration corresponding to the pseudo game times effect in the case of the game times that result in the jackpot result and the game times that result in the off-reach display than in the game times other than these. It is composed. Further, not only whether or not the pseudo game time effect is executed, but also the number of pseudo game times to be executed in the pseudo game time effect is uniquely determined by the display duration. In this case, the number of simulated game times is one of 2, 3, and 4, and the game times that result in a big hit and the game times that have a high expectation of a big hit result and have a missed reach display are the big hits. The number of pseudo-games is larger than the number of games in which the expected result is low and the reach is displayed.

In the following step S3504, the number of pseudo game times is stored in the holding data area 161 of the sound / light side RAM 114. After that, in step S3505, the advance notice lottery process is executed. The content of the process is the same as that of step S603 in the first embodiment.

In the following step S3506, the first stop symbol determination process is executed. In the stop symbol determination process, it corresponds to the stop result in which the combination of the same symbols is not established on all the effective lines L1 to L5, and the combination of the reach symbols is not established on all the effective lines L1 to L5. Information, and information on the stop result corresponding to the pseudo game times other than the final round (for example, information on the stop result in which a predetermined symbol combination such as "3.4.1" is established on one of the effective lines). It will be decided as the information of the result of this stop. Further, in step S3507, the first effect pattern determination process is executed. In this process, the effect pattern of the first pseudo-game time corresponding to the display duration of the current game time is selected. By the way, the display duration of the first pseudo-game round is shorter than the display duration of the current game round.

In the following step S3508, each information of the type of the effect pattern selected in the above step S3507 and the type of the stop symbol determined in the above step S3506 is written in the holding data area 161 of the sound light side RAM 114. After that, in step S3509, the stop result command and the pattern command are transmitted to the display side MPU 122 in the same manner as in step S607 in the first embodiment, and in step S3510, in step S608 in the first embodiment. Similarly, the update process of the number of games is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S3503, the same process as in steps S605 to S608 in the first embodiment is executed as a non-winning process in step S3511. Further, when a negative determination is made in step S3501, the process of step S3510 is executed, or the process of step S3511 is executed, the step in the first embodiment is described as another process in step S3512. The same process as in steps S609 to S629 is executed.

FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the display side command correspondence process in the present embodiment.

First, in step S3601, it is determined whether or not the variation end command is received from the display side MPU 122. The variable end command is transmitted from the display side MPU 122 to the sound light side MPU 112 when the display control using the pattern data table read when the display side MPU 122 receives the stop result command and the pattern command is completed. Command. Further, in step S3602, it is determined whether or not the pseudo game rotation effect is being executed in the current game rotation. Further, in step S3603, it is determined whether or not the number of pseudo games stored in the sound / light side RAM 114 in step S3504 of the main command correspondence process is larger than the number of executions of the pseudo game times completed in the current game times. judge.

If an affirmative determination is made in all of steps S3601 to S3603, the process proceeds to step S3604. In step S3604, the current game result and the display duration stored in the holding data area 161 of the sound / light side RAM 114 are read out. After that, in step S3605, the type of the effect pattern of the pseudo-game times so far of this game time is read out.

In the following step S3606, the stop symbol determination process corresponding to the number of executions is executed. In the stop symbol determination process, if the current pseudo game round is not the final round, the same stop result information as in the first stop symbol determination process is selected, and if the current pseudo game round is the final round. In the same manner as in step S604 in the first embodiment, information on the stop result corresponding to the game result of the current game round is selected.

In the following step S3607, the effect pattern determination process corresponding to the number of executions is executed. In the effect pattern determination process, if the current pseudo-game round is not the final round, a production pattern corresponding to the display duration of the current game round and the number of executions of the current pseudo-game round is selected. , When the pseudo game round this time is the final round, select an effect pattern in which the reach display of the type corresponding to the display duration of this time is executed. Further, in the effect pattern determination process, the effect pattern is selected so that a common effect is executed in each pseudo game time by referring to the information read in step S3605. Specifically, when the notice is displayed in the first pseudo game, the notice is also displayed in the pseudo game that is executed after that in the current game. In this case, the notice display with a higher expectation of the jackpot result may be performed in the pseudo game times on the rear side.

In the following step S3608, information on the type of effect pattern selected in step S3607 and the type of stop symbol determined in step S3606 is written in the holding data area 161 of the sound / light side RAM 114. After that, in step S3609, similarly to step S607 in the first embodiment, the stop result command and the pattern command are transmitted to the display side MPU 122, and in step S3610, the number of executions provided in the sound light side RAM 114 is performed. Add 1 to the counter value.

When a negative determination is made in any of step S3601, step S3602, and step S3603, or when the process of step S3610 is executed, the display side command in the first embodiment is described as another process in step S3611. The processes of steps S1201 to S1216 of the corresponding process (FIG. 22) are executed.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, even when the pseudo game round effect is performed, the data table for the entire pseudo game round is read by the display side MPU 122, and the sound light side MPU 112 is on the display side. The data for control is set according to the command transmitted from the MPU 122 during the simulated game rotation, and the light emission control of the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 45 are performed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the storage capacity required for setting the control data even when the pseudo game rotation effect is performed.

Further, at the start of each pseudo game round, the effect pattern is determined on the sound light side MPU 112 based on the game result of the corresponding game round and the contents of the pseudo game rounds digested up to that point. As a result, in a configuration in which the effect pattern of the pseudo game times is determined based on the game results of the game times and the contents of the pseudo game times digested up to that point, the processing load for making the determination is set to the sound light side MPU112. It becomes possible to distribute to. Therefore, the processing load can be distributed.

<Other Embodiments>
It should be noted that the description is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be made within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. Incidentally, the following configuration of another embodiment may be applied individually or in combination to the configuration of the above embodiment.

(1) As a movable object, similarly to the disk movable objects 62a and 62b, a movable object that is driven by a slide operation drive unit to perform a slide operation and is rotated by a rotary operation drive unit is provided, and the movable object slides. When the slide operation and the rotation operation are started at the same time from the respective predetermined positions after the operation and the rotation operation are executed individually, the respective predetermined position detection sensors detect that they are arranged at the respective predetermined positions. It may be configured to start both operations at the same time. This makes it easier to synchronize the start of both operations.

(2) When the rotation operations of the pair of left and right disk movable objects 62a and 62b are executed asynchronously and individually, and then the rotation operations of these disk movable objects 62a and 62b are started at the same time from the initial rotation positions, the initial positions are set. The configuration may be such that both rotation operations are started at the same time after the arrangement is detected by the respective rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b. This makes it easier to synchronize the start of both rotation operations.

(3) When the detection sensor detects that a movable object is placed at a predetermined position, a predetermined effect is produced by another effect means, which is at least one of a sound output effect, a light emission effect, and a display effect. When focusing on the effect that the movement of the movable object can be easily synchronized with the effect of other production means by executing the above, the configuration in which the movable object includes a plurality of driving targets is not essential, and the movable object is The configuration may have only a single drive target.

(4) When it is detected by the detection sensors corresponding to each of a plurality of drive targets arranged at predetermined positions, the drive targets are configured to perform predetermined operations in synchronization with each other. It may be applied to a configuration in which there are four or more driving targets.

(5) When the third stage operation is executed after the curtain plate movable object 52 executes the second stage operation, the pair of slide members 55a and 55b are detected by the adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b by being displaced to the initial position side. The third stage operation is started after the operation is performed. Instead, the adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b are provided at the limit position or near the limit position, and are displaced toward the limit position side by the adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b. After the pair of slide members 55a and 55b are detected, the curtain plate movable object 52 may operate in a horizontal state toward the initial position side or the limit position side as the third stage operation.

(6) When it is detected by the detection sensors corresponding to each of the plurality of drive targets that are arranged at the predetermined positions, the plurality of drive targets are configured to perform predetermined operations in synchronization with each other. This may be applied to a configuration in which each drive target operates an individual movable object, instead of a configuration in which one curtain plate movable object 52 is operated.

(7) When "1" is set in the stop command flag in a situation where each movable disk 62a, 62b is rotating, or when any of the initial rotation position sensors 69a, 69b is turned ON, The rotation operation of both disk movable objects 62a and 62b may be stopped. In this case, it is not necessary to set the limiting range as in the first embodiment, and it is not necessary to store the history of the detection results of the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b as in the second embodiment. ..

(8) In a configuration in which at least one of the outer edge shape and the decorative shape of each disk movable object 62a and 62b does not match between predetermined rotation positions, and both the outer edge shape and the decorative shape match between specific rotation positions. , Each of these specific rotation positions may be configured to be the initial rotation position of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b. In this case, the disk movable objects 62a and 62b have a plurality of initial rotation positions. In this configuration, a rotation initial position sensor may be provided at each rotation initial position. In this case, variations in the rotation period of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b according to the timing when "1" is set in the stop command flag. Can be increased.

Further, the limiting range may be set so as to include the detection range of each rotation initial position sensor, and the limiting range existing adjacently around the rotation axis may not be included in each limiting range. Further, by setting the number of steps for determining the stop release when the stop is restricted to the number of steps before the detection range of the rotation initial position sensor existing next to the rotation axis, the disk movable objects 62a and 62b It is possible to shorten the period during which the suspension is restricted.

(9) The number of disk movable objects 62a and 62b subject to the synchronous operation is not limited to two, and may be three, four, or five or more.

(10) The configuration for synchronously stopping each of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b is to reciprocate on a straight line or a curved line and to synchronize and stop a plurality of movable objects having an initial position on the reciprocating path. It may be applied as a configuration for making it.

(11) In the second embodiment, when "1" is set in the stop command flag and one of the history calculation results is the data content to be stopped, both disk movable objects. The rotation of 62a and 62b may be stopped. In this case, it is possible to shorten the period from when the stop command flag is set to "1" until the rotation of the movable disk objects 62a and 62b is stopped.

(12) In the second embodiment, for each of the movable disk objects 62a and 62b, the area for storing the detection result of the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b as a history is set to three, but one may be used. It may be two, or four or more. In this case, if there are two or more, it is possible to stop the rotation of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b when the state in which the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b are turned on is confirmed a plurality of times, so that noise When the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b are turned on due to such reasons, the occurrence of an event that the rotation of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b is stopped is suppressed. Further, if the number is three or more, it is possible to further specify the rising or falling edges of the signals of the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b while achieving the effect of the case where the number is two or more. However, in the configuration of three or more, when the data indicating that the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b are in the detection state are continuously set, the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b start up or rise. The rotation of each of the movable disk 62a and 62b may be stopped regardless of whether or not it corresponds to the falling edge.

Further, the number of areas for storing the detection result as a history is the monitoring of the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b that may occur in the situation where the disk movable objects 62a and 62b exist in the detection range of the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b. It is preferable that the number of treatments is within the range of the number of treatments. In this case, if the result corresponding to the non-detection of the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b is stored in the latest area, the stop control of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b is not performed. Therefore, even if the rotation of the movable disk objects 62a and 62b is stopped by checking the history, the stop position can be limited to the detection range of the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b.

(13) In the second embodiment, the configuration in which the detection results of the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b are constantly monitored by the sound light side MPU 112 is not essential. The monitoring of the detection results of the sensors 69a and 69b may be started, and when the return operation is started in the movable disk 62a and 62b, the monitoring of the detection results of the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b is started. It may be configured.

(14) Initial rotation position The sensors 69a and 69b are not provided, and the rotation position of each movable disk 62a and 62b is grasped only from the number of steps. May be configured to specify. In this case, if the number of steps when the stop command flag is set to "1" is a specific number of steps, the movable disks 62a and 62b are stopped in synchronization after being displaced by a predetermined number of steps. By doing so, for example, it is possible to synchronize and stop the movable discs 62a and 62b at the initial rotation position grasped from the number of steps.

(15) At the start of a series of effects such as game times and open / close execution modes, the sound and light side MPU 112 does not receive a command corresponding to the start of the series of effects from the display side MPU 122, and various light emitting units 71 to 73. The light emission control and the sound output control of the speaker unit 45 may be started. In particular, when the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24 is won and the game round is started in a situation where the hold information is not stored in the hold area RE, the start timing of the game round is arbitrary. Therefore, the display side MPU 122 cannot transmit the command corresponding to the start of the game round in advance. In this case, at the start of the series of effects as described above, the light emission control of the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 45 are performed without receiving the command from the display side MPU 122. These effects are less likely to be delayed with respect to the start timing of the game round.

(16) The display-side MPU 122 only outputs a command to the sound / light-side MPU 112 indicating that the timing corresponds to the switching of the production content, and the timing corresponding to the switching corresponds to any of the production content. Whether or not it may be specified in the sound light side MPU 112. For example, the sound / light side MPU 112 measures the number of transmission commands of the display side MPU 122 since the game times and the open / close execution mode are started, and from the measurement result, the command transmitted by the display side MPU 122 is assigned to any effect content. A configuration that specifies whether or not it corresponds to switching can be considered. Specifically, in the situation where the data table shown in FIG. 18 is read by the display side MPU 122, the sound light side MPU 112 identifies that the first command reception corresponds to the start of the fluctuation, and the second time. It is specified that the command reception of is corresponding to the start of the advance notice production. According to such a configuration, the content of the command transmitted from the display side MPU 122 can be simplified, and for example, the period required for command transmission can be shortened.

(17) Even if the target for which the relatively long side data is set in the RAM as the data for executing the series of effects of the game times and the opening / closing execution mode is not the display side MPU 122 but the sound light side MPU 112. good. In this case, the overall flow of the series of effects is controlled according to the data table set in the sound / light side MPU 112, and when the execution timing of each effect range included in the series of effects is reached, the sound / light side MPU 112 to the display side MPU 122 A command is transmitted to the display side MPU 122, and by receiving the command, the data for controlling the effect range corresponding to the command is read out, and the execution control of the effect of the effect range is performed.

(18) The sound / light side MPU 112 may be configured to constantly monitor whether or not the effect operating device 48 has been operated. In this case, when the effect operation device 48 is operated, an operation generation command is transmitted from the sound / light side MPU 112, and the display side MPU 122 determines whether or not the operation is during the operation valid period. Will be done. In this configuration, it is not necessary for the display side MPU 122 to transmit the operation valid start command and the operation valid end command.

(19) When the operation generation command of the effect operation device 48 is transmitted from the sound / light side MPU 112, and the operation generation command is during the operation valid period of the effect operation device 48, the display side MPU 122 issues the operation valid command. Instead of transmitting, the operation effect may be started and the operation effect command may be transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 112. In this configuration, the display side MPU 122 does not need to send an operation valid command, and the sound light side MPU 112 does not need to send an execution permission command.

(20) When an operation valid command is received from the display side MPU 122, the sound light side MPU 112 starts reading the light emission control data and the sound output control data corresponding to the operation effect, and the operation effect is started from the display side MPU 122. When a command is received, the sound / light side MPU 112 may be configured to perform light emission control or sound output control using the data whose reading has been completed.

(21) The effect operation device 48 may be configured to output an operation signal to a control means other than the sound light side MPU 112 and the display side MPU 122, for example, the main side MPU 92. Even in this case, in the configuration in which the information on whether or not the effect operating device 48 has been operated is transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 112 before the display side MPU 122, the configuration as described in each of the above embodiments. Is preferably applied.

Further, the effect operation device 48 may be configured to output an operation signal to the display side MPU 122 instead of the sound light side MPU 112. In this case, if the sound / light side MPU 112 is configured to determine the content of the operation effect, it is necessary to perform the operation effect after bidirectional communication is performed between the sound / light side MPU 112 and the display side MPU 122. Occurs.

(22) The timing at which the display-side MPU 122 transmits a command to the sound-light-side MPU 112 is not limited to the timing for indicating the change in the effect content, and each time the predetermined number of frames is exhausted, that is, the display-side MPU 122 The command may be transmitted from the display side MPU 122 to the sound light side MPU 112 every time the number of times the control execution timing of the symbol display device 31 is reached becomes a predetermined number of times. In this case, the command includes data corresponding to the current pointer information of the data table read by the display side MPU 122, for example, the type of the symbol displayed on the symbol display device 31, the content of the background image, and other than the symbol. The frame contents such as the type of the character and the operation contents of the character may be set. Then, the sound / light side MPU 112 may be configured to specify light emission data, sound output data, and the like to be set from the frame contents included in the command. According to this configuration, the display-side MPU 122 only needs to send a command periodically, and it is only necessary to set the frame contents for the command. Therefore, the processing contents of each time for sending the command are routinely set. It becomes possible to simplify the process.

It should be noted that the command is transmitted by configuring the command to be transmitted once to a specific number of frames such as 10 frames or 100 frames, instead of setting the timing of periodically transmitting the command to each frame. It is possible to reduce the frequency.

Further, in this configuration, since the command for setting the light emission data and the sound output data in advance is not transmitted to the sound light side MPU 112, the light emission data and the sound output data are stored at the timing when the command is received. The setting will be started.

(23) The timing at which the display-side MPU 122 transmits a command to the sound-light-side MPU 112 is not limited to the timing for indicating the change in the effect content, and the effect period of the data table read by the display-side MPU 122 is used. It is divided evenly, and a command is transmitted from the display side MPU 122 to the sound light side MPU 112 at each timing corresponding to the start of the division range, and the sound light side MPU 112 sets the control data corresponding to the division range. It may be configured as such. For example, when the production period of the above data table is divided into the first half and the second half, a command is transmitted at a timing corresponding to the start of the first half division range, and a command is sent at a timing corresponding to the start of the second half division range. Will be sent. According to this configuration, the process for specifying the command transmission timing on the display side MPU 122 can be simplified.

(24) The display side MPU 122 does not read out the entire data table corresponding to the series of effects of the game times and the opening / closing execution mode at once, but from the light emission data and the sound output data set at once in the sound light side MPU 112. Although the data table corresponding to a long period is read out, it may be configured to correspond to a shorter period than the whole corresponding to a series of effects. For example, when a command is transmitted from the sound light side MPU 112 to the display side MPU 122 in response to receiving a command from the main side MPU 92, the data table may be read out by the display side MPU 122 for each command.

In this case, during the game round, when the main MPU 92 sends a change command and a type command, the display side MPU 122 reads the data table from the start of the game round to the timing immediately before the final stop display of the symbol. Then, when the main MPU 92 transmits the final stop command, the display side MPU 122 may be configured to read the data table for the period of the final stop display of the game times.

Further, in the open / close execution mode, when the main MPU 92 transmits an opening command, the display side MPU 122 displays a data table from the start of the open / close execution mode to the start of the first opening of the special electric winning device 22. When it is read and the main MPU 92 sends an open command, the display MPU 122 reads the data table corresponding to the open times, and when the main MPU 92 sends a close command, the display MPU 122 reads the data table. When the data table corresponding to the interval is read and the main MPU 92 transmits the ending command, the display side MPU 122 reads the data table from the start of the ending effect to the end of the open / close execution mode.

Even with this configuration, in the sound / light side MPU 112, light emission data and sound output data corresponding to a shorter period than the data table read by the display side MPU 122 can be generated according to the command transmitted from the display side MPU 122 each time. By setting the configuration, it is possible to reduce the required storage capacity. In this configuration, for a part of the effect range, the correspondence period of the light emission data and the sound output data read by the sound light side MPU 112 may be the same as the correspondence period of the data table read out by the display side MPU 122. good.

(25) The command transmitted from the main MPU 92 may be received not only by the sound and light side MPU 112 but also by the display side MPU 122. In this case, when a command is transmitted from the main MPU 92, the sound and light side MPU 112 transmits a command to the effect that the command from the main MPU 92 has been normally received to the display side MPU 122, and the display side MPU 122 concerned. When the command is received from the sound light side MPU 112, the data table corresponding to the command received from the main side MPU 92 may be read out. In this case, the sound / light side MPU 112 may read the data table corresponding to the command received from the main side MPU 92, but the data table corresponding to the command is set as in each of the above embodiments. Instead, the required storage capacity can be reduced by setting the light emission data and the sound output data corresponding to the partial effect range according to the command transmitted from the display side MPU 122. Further, in the configuration, when a notification target event such as an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 10, a notification command is transmitted to both the sound light side MPU 112 and the display side MPU 122, and these sound light side MPU 112 and When the display side MPU 122 receives the notification command, the notification in the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 and the speaker unit 45 and the notification in the symbol display device 31 are started without waiting for the command transmission from the other side. May be good.

(26) In the holding data area 161 of the sound / light side RAM 114, the number of times a predetermined notice display or a predetermined reach display is performed may be measured. In this case, for example, when the predetermined advance notice display is not executed even though the predetermined number of game times have been digested, the predetermined advance notice display may be configured to increase the selection probability of the predetermined advance notice display. May be forcibly selected.

(27) When the information of the game result of the game times is stored and held in the holding data area 161 of the sound light side RAM 114, and the sound light side MPU 112 receives a command corresponding to the execution timing of the final effect from the display side MPU 122. The configuration is such that it is determined whether or not the final effect should be executed by referring to the information of the game result stored and stored in the retained data area 161. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display side MPU 122 By transmitting a command based on the information of the game result, the sound and light side MPU 112 may be configured to control the execution of the final effect when the command corresponding to the execution of the final effect is received from the display side MPU 122.

(28) In the sound light side MPU 112, even when the confirmation execution command is received from the display side MPU 122, the confirmation effect is produced by referring to the information of the game result of the game times stored and held in the holding data area 161. May be configured to determine whether or not to execute. In this case, even if some abnormality occurs and the final effect is executed by the symbol display device 31 even though it is not a big hit result, the final effect is executed by the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 and the speaker unit 45. It becomes possible to prevent it. Further, at this time, the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 and the speaker unit 45 may notify that the final effect of the symbol display device 31 is not a normal operation.

(29) In the sound / light side MPU 112, a configuration for reading a plurality of control data for one command from the display side MPU 122 is added to or in place of the sound output data reading process for the light emitting data reading process. May be applied. Further, the control data read for one command is not limited to two, and may be three or more.

(30) The display side MPU 122 reads out control data corresponding to a period longer than the control data set at one time in the sound light side MPU 112, and the sound light side MPU 112 transmits a command from the display side MPU 122. When the effect that the storage capacity for setting the control data is reduced when the control data corresponding to a part of the effect range is set according to the above, the sound light side MPU 112 The communication method between the display side MPU 122 and the display side MPU 122 does not have to be bidirectional communication. For example, when the main MPU 92 is used as a reference, the display side MPU 122 is configured to exist on the upstream side in the communication direction from the sound light side MPU 112, and a series of commands transmitted from the main side MPU 92 on the display side MPU 122. When the data table for the entire effect is read and the sound light side MPU 112 is configured to set control data corresponding to a partial effect range according to a command transmitted from the display side MPU 122, the sound The communication method between the optical side MPU 112 and the display side MPU 122 does not have to be bidirectional communication.

(31) Since the communication method between the sound light side MPU 112 and the display side MPU 122 is bidirectional communication, between the effect whose execution is controlled by the sound light side MPU 112 and the effect whose execution is controlled by the display side MPU 122. When paying attention to the effect that the deviation is less likely to occur, the data table corresponding to the entire series of effects may be read out on both the sound light side MPU 112 and the display side MPU 122. In this case, for example, one of the sound light side MPU 112 and the display side MPU 122 determines whether or not the execution control of the predetermined effect range should be started according to the command transmitted from the other, and it is the start timing. The pointer information about the entire data table that has already been read may be updated to the information corresponding to the start timing of the predetermined effect range.

(32) The configuration for deriving the control information group by applying the setting information to the original information may be applied to the sound output data in addition to or in place of the light emission data, and is used for moving object drive control. It may be applied to the driving data. For example, when applied to drive data for moving object drive control, the original data in which the operation content of the switching destination is defined when the operation content of the moving object is sequentially switched, and a plurality of cuts defined in the original data. Start reference data indicating from which of the operation contents of the switching destination the operation of the moving object is started from the operation contents of the switching destination, and continuation when the operation content of the switching destination defined in the original data is continued. At least the continuation reference data indicating the time may be prepared, and a combination thereof may be configured so that more driving data can be derived than the number of the original data, the start reference data, and the continuation reference data.

(33) In the light emitting data group 151, the list data group 151e and the group data group 151f may be inadequate. In this case, the process for creating the light emission data can be simplified.

(34) The sound output side priority may be set between the sound output data for notification. In this case, only the sound output data for notification having the highest priority may be output as the output target, and the sound output data for notification is sequentially controlled by sound output in the order according to the priority on the sound output side. It may be a target configuration. In this configuration, for example, among various events to be notified, the notification for the act of illegally receiving the privilege is notified that the lower plate 47a is full, and the gaming machine main body 12 is opened. It is possible to give priority to the status notification of the pachinko machine 10 such as notification that the pachinko machine is being used, and it is possible to promptly promptly deal with fraudulent acts.

(35) Instead of the notification area 162c of the light emitting data area 162, there is an abnormality notification area for performing an abnormality notification when an event corresponding to an illegal act on the pachinko machine 10 occurs, and a state of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, a status notification area for performing status notification when an event other than the event corresponding to the above fraudulent activity occurs may be provided separately. In this case, by setting the light emitting side priority of the abnormality notification area to be higher than the light emitting side priority of the state notification area, it is possible to execute the abnormality notification with the highest priority. Further, by setting the light emitting side priority of the state notification area to be higher than the light emitting side priority of the base area 162a and the interrupt area 162b, the state notification can be executed with priority over the effect. ..

(36) The display-side MPU 122 is limited to a configuration in which a command is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 112 according to the pattern data table at each timing during the period during which the effect according to the pattern data table is being executed. Instead, a command may be transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 112 after reading the pattern data table and before starting the effect according to the pattern data table. For example, the command for reading the control data when starting the effect corresponding to the pattern data table is transmitted in advance before the execution control of the effect is started on the display side MPU 122, and then, The command may be transmitted again at a predetermined timing during the period during which the effect corresponding to the pattern data table is being executed.

(37) The sound light side MPU 112 and the display side MPU 122 may be provided on the same substrate. In this case, the VDP 125, the character ROM 126, and the video RAM 127 may be provided on the same substrate or may be provided on a separate substrate.

(38) The special electric winning device 22 is completely closed while the special electric winning device 22 is closed, but a part of the special electric winning device 22 may not be closed. In this case, a game ball may be configured to win a prize in the special electric winning device 22 even when the special electric winning device 22 is closed through a part of the area, and the part of the area is closed because the area is narrower than the game ball. In the above, the game ball may not be awarded to the special electric winning device 22.

(39) Instead of the configuration in which the game ball cannot be won in the lower operating port 24 while the universal accessory 24a is closed, the game is played in the lower operating port 24 even when the universal accessory 24a is closed. It may be configured so that a winning ball can occur. However, the ease of winning the prize needs to be lower than that during the opening of the general electric accessory 24a.

(40) The hold information acquired due to the winning of the upper operating port 23 and the holding information acquired due to the winning of the lower operating port 24 are separately stored and stored, and the lower operating port 24 is stored separately. A configuration in which the hold information on the 24 side is preferentially digested may be applied, and conversely, a configuration in which the hold information on the upper operating port 23 side is preferentially digested may be applied. A configuration that is digested in the order of acquisition may be applied regardless of whether it is the mouth 23 or the lower actuating port 24.

Further, in the above configuration, the plurality of operating ports are not arranged vertically, but the first operating port corresponding to the upper operating port 23 and the second operating port corresponding to the lower operating port 24 are left and right. The configuration may be arranged side by side, or both of these operating ports may be arranged side by side at an angle. Furthermore, depending on the operation mode of the firing handle 41, both operating ports may be arranged apart from each other so that only the winning of the first operating port or the winning of the second operating port can be aimed at.

Further, in the above configuration, the special figure display unit 33 has a first display area for displaying the result of the determination of whether or not the hold information has been acquired based on the winning of the upper operating port 23, and based on the winning of the lower operating port 24. A second display area may be provided to display the result of the determination of whether or not the acquired hold information is correct. In this case, the variable display of the pattern in the first display area is based on the fact that the hold information acquired based on the winning of the upper operating port 23 is subject to the hit / fail judgment or is subject to the hit / fail judgment. Is started, the stop result corresponding to the hit / fail judgment is displayed, and the variation display of one game is terminated. In addition, the variable display of the pattern is displayed in the second display area prior to the holding information acquired based on the winning of the lower operating port 24 or based on the fact that the winning / failing judgment is made. At the same time as the start, the stop result corresponding to the hit / fail judgment is displayed, and the variation display of one game is terminated.

(41) The hold information acquired due to the winning of the upper operating port 23 is subject to the winning / failing judgment, and the holding information acquired due to the winning of the lower operating port 24 is correct or not. The profit that the player can obtain may be different depending on the case where the judgment is made. For example, when the hold information on the upper operating port 23 side is the target of the hit / fail judgment, the game result is distributed as in the above embodiment, but the hold information on the lower operating port 24 side is the target of the hit / fail judgment. If the jackpot is won, the result may be divided into the most advantageous jackpot result, the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result, and the low-accuracy jackpot result.

Further, in the configuration in which a plurality of operating ports are provided as in the above embodiment, the number of operating ports is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the configuration may be such that only one operating port is provided.

(42) Instead of the configuration in which the voice emission control device 103 is located upstream of the display control device 120 in the communication direction when the main control device 90 is used as a reference, the display control device 120 is the voice emission control device 103. It may be configured to exist on the upstream side in the communication direction. Further, instead of the configuration in which the voice emission control device 103 and the display control device 120 are separately provided, a configuration in which both control devices are provided as one control device may be used, and the function of one of the two control devices may be provided. May be integrated in the main control device 90, and both functions of both control devices may be integrated in the main control device 90. Further, the configuration of the command output from the main control device 90 to the voice emission control device 103 and the configuration of the command output from the voice emission control device 103 to the display control device 120 are also arbitrary.

(43) The device for executing the effect for the game round is not limited to the symbol display device 31, and the effect for the game round is executed by the operation of the movable decorative member. However, the effect for game rounds may be executed by turning on a predetermined light emitting unit, or the effect for game rounds may be executed by a combination of all or a part of each of the above modes. good.

(44) In each of the above embodiments, the special figure display unit 33 is configured to display the stop result corresponding to each game result, but instead of this, the special figure display unit 33 may not be provided. Even if it is the game result of, the special figure display unit 33 may display a common stop result, and the stop result is randomly displayed on the special figure display unit 33, resulting in the special figure display unit. The configuration may be such that it is not possible to identify which game result is from the display of 33.

(45) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, for example, pachinko machines in which a general electric accessory is opened a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game in a specific area of a special device. The present invention can also be applied to pachinko machines that generate a right when a ball enters and become a big hit, pachinko machines equipped with other accessories, arrange ball machines, and game machines such as sparrow balls.

In addition, a non-ballistic gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction is provided, the reels are started to rotate by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. After the reels have stopped after a predetermined time has passed, if a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line that can be seen from the display window, a privilege such as a medal payout is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

In addition, the gaming machine body supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a take-in device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are taken in by the take-in device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, which starts the rotation of the reel.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in each of the above embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic A group>
Features A1. The first control means (sound light side MPU 112) for controlling the first effect means (speaker unit 45, curtain plate movable unit 51, disk movable units 61a, 61b, light emitting unit groups 71 to 73), and
A second control means (display side MPU 122) that controls the second effect means (design display device 31), and
With
Bidirectional communication is possible between the first control means and the second control means.
The first control means is a first side execution means (in the sound light side MPU 112) that causes the first effect means to execute the effect in a predetermined period based on the transmission information transmitted by the second control means. Equipped with a function to execute light emission control processing, sound output control processing, and moving object control processing)
The second control means is such that the second effect means executes the effect for a period overlapping with at least a part of the predetermined period based on the transmission information transmitted by the first control means. A gaming machine characterized by having a side execution means (a function of executing task processing in the display side MPU 122).

According to the feature A1, the first control means controls the execution of the effect in the first effect means based on the transmission information transmitted by the second control means, and the second control means uses the transmission information transmitted by the first control means. Based on this, the execution of the effect in the second effect means is controlled. As a result, when the first effect means and the second effect means each execute the effect during the same period, it is difficult for the two effects to be out of sync with each other. From the above, it is possible to perform good control in a configuration using a plurality of control means.

Feature A2. Equipped with an operation receiving means (directing operation device 48) for accepting a player's input operation.
The information on whether or not the input operation is accepted by the operation accepting means is input to the first control means.
The first control means can transmit operation-corresponding transmission information (operation generation command) corresponding to the acceptance of an input operation by the operation-accepting means.
The second-side execution means is a second-side operation-corresponding execution means (in which, after the first control means transmits the operation-corresponding transmission information, the corresponding effect is executed by the second effect means. A function of executing the process of step S909 on the display side MPU 122) is provided.
When the effect corresponding to the input operation being accepted by the operation accepting means is executed by the second effect means, the second control means provides execution transmission information (operation effect command) corresponding to the effect. Can be sent and
The first-side execution means is a first-side operation-corresponding execution means (sound) that causes the first effect means to execute the corresponding effect after the second control means transmits the execution transmission information. The gaming machine according to feature A1, wherein the gaming machine is provided with a function of executing the process of step S1306 in the optical side MPU 112.

According to the feature A2, in the configuration in which when the input operation is accepted by the operation receiving means, the corresponding effect is executed by each of the first effect means and the second effect means, the second control means is the first. After the control means transmits the operation-corresponding transmission information, the operation-corresponding effect is performed by the second effect means, and not only that, the first control means is the first after the second control means transmits the execution transmission information. Operate the production by the production means. In the configuration in which the information on whether or not the input operation is accepted by the operation receiving means is input to the first control means in this way, the first control means dares to wait for the second control means to transmit the execution transmission information. Since the configuration is such that the operation-corresponding effect is executed from the above, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of deviation in each operation-corresponding effect.

Feature A3. The first control means starts monitoring whether or not an input operation is accepted by the operation acceptance means when the second control means transmits operation monitoring transmission information (operation valid start command). The gaming machine according to feature A2, wherein the operation-corresponding transmission information can be transmitted when an input operation is accepted by the operation acceptance means during the monitoring period.

According to the feature A3, when the second control means transmits the operation monitoring transmission information, the first control means may start monitoring whether or not the input operation is accepted by the operation acceptance means, so that the first control It is not necessary to specify the start timing of the monitoring independently in the means. As a result, the processing load of the first control means can be reduced in a configuration in which the production corresponding to the operation is less likely to be deviated. Further, since the main body that determines the start timing of various processes in the first control means is integrated in the second control means, the process configuration can be simplified.

Feature A4. The second control means is such that when the first control means transmits the operation-corresponding transmission information, the acceptance of the input operation by the operation-accepting means corresponding to the operation-corresponding transmission information is during the valid period of the input operation. It is provided with valid determination means (a function of executing the process of step S906 in the display side MPU 122) for determining whether or not the information is satisfied.
In the second-side operation-corresponding execution means, after the validity determination means determines that the effect is received, the second effect means produces an effect corresponding to the input operation being accepted by the operation-accepting means. The gaming machine according to feature A3, characterized in that it is to be executed.

According to the feature A4, it is determined not only in the first control means but also in the second control means whether or not the acceptance of the input operation in the operation acceptance means is during the valid period of the input operation. As a result, the possibility that the operation-corresponding effect is executed even though the input operation for the operation accepting means is not performed during the valid period is reduced.

Feature A5. The second control means can transmit effective transmission information (operation valid command) when it is determined that the valid determination means is valid.
The first control means can transmit permission transmission information (execution permission command) when the second control means transmits the effective transmission information.
In the second-side operation-corresponding execution means, when the first control means transmits the permission transmission information, the second effect means receives an effect corresponding to the input operation being accepted by the operation-accepting means. The gaming machine according to feature A4, which is characterized in that it is to be executed.

According to the feature A5, the operation-corresponding effect is started in a situation where it is clear that the two-way communication between the first control means and the second control means is normal, and therefore, during the valid period. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the operation-corresponding effect is executed even though the input operation for the operation accepting means is not performed.

Feature A6. The game according to any one of features A1 to A5, wherein the second control means can transmit transmission information capable of specifying the timing for executing the effect for the predetermined period in the first effect means. Machine.

According to the feature A6, since the first control means may control the execution of the effect of the first effect means according to the execution timing of the effect determined by the second control means, the execution timing of the effect is unique to the first control means. Eliminates the need to identify. As a result, the processing load is reduced as compared with the case where the execution timing of the effect can be independently specified by each of the first control means and the second control means in the configuration in which the effects of the two are less likely to be deviated from each other. Is planned.

Feature A7. In the first effect means, any one of a plurality of types of effect contents can be executed as the effect for the predetermined period.
The gaming machine according to feature A6, wherein the second control means can transmit transmission information in a manner capable of specifying the type of effect content to be executed as the effect for the predetermined period.

According to the feature A7, the first control means not only follows the execution timing of the effect determined by the second control means, but also the content of the effect to be executed may follow the content determined by the second control means. The processing load can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the content of the effect is independently determined by one control means.

Feature A8. The second-side execution means controls the execution of the effect in the second effect means each time the control execution timing is reached.
The second control means does not transmit the transmission information to the first control means each time the control execution timing is reached, but transmits the transmission information to the first control means at a timing corresponding to a predetermined control execution timing. The gaming machine according to feature A6 or A7, which is characterized by transmitting information.

According to the feature A8, in the configuration in which the execution timing of the effect is specified by the first control means according to the transmission information transmitted from the second control means, the second control means sends the transmission information each time the control execution timing is reached. Is not transmitted, but the transmission information is transmitted when a predetermined control execution timing is reached, so that it is possible to reduce the transmission frequency of the transmission information in the second control means. As a result, the processing load of the second control means can be reduced.

Feature A9. The first control means includes a lottery execution means for executing a lottery process (a function of executing the processes of steps S603 to S605 in the sound light side MPU 112).
In the first effect means, the effect in the predetermined period is performed with the content corresponding to the result of the lottery process.
In the second effect means, any one of features A1 to A8 is characterized in that the effect in a period overlapping at least a part of the predetermined period is performed with the content corresponding to the result of the lottery process. The described gaming machine.

According to the feature A9, although the lottery process is executed in the first control means, the first control means dares to wait for the second control means to transmit the transmission information before the effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of deviation in each of the effects in the first effect means and the second effect means.

Feature A10. Equipped with a progress control means (main side MPU92) that controls the progress of the game
The gaming machine according to feature A9, wherein the lottery execution means executes the lottery process based on the content of transmission information transmitted by the progress control means.

According to the feature A10, although the first control means exists on the upstream side of the communication with respect to the second control means when the progress control means is used as a reference, the first control means has the second control means. Since the configuration is such that the effect is executed after waiting for the transmission information to be transmitted, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of deviation in each effect in the first effect means and the second effect means. It becomes.

Feature A11. A progress control means (main side MPU 92) that transmits transmission information toward the first control means and does not transmit the transmission information toward the second control means is provided.
In the first effect means, the effect in the predetermined period is performed with the content corresponding to the transmission information transmitted by the first control means.
The game according to any one of features A1 to A10, wherein the second effect means is configured such that the effect in the predetermined period is performed with the content corresponding to the transmission information transmitted by the first control means. Machine.

According to the feature A11, although the first control means exists on the upstream side of the communication with respect to the second control means when the progress control means is used as a reference, the first control means has the second control means. Since the configuration is such that the effect is executed after waiting for the transmission information to be transmitted, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of deviation in each effect in the first effect means and the second effect means. It becomes.

Feature A12. The second side executing means, when a predetermined start trigger occurs, is the second effect means during a specific continuation period (during the game, during the opening / closing execution mode), which is a period overlapping with at least a part of the predetermined period. To execute a specific range effect (effect for game times, effect for open / close execution mode)
The second control means is a specific control information group (pattern data table, opening data) used to execute the specific range effect by the second effect means when the predetermined start trigger is reached. It is provided with a second side setting means (a function of executing the processes of steps S802 and S806 in the display side MPU 122) for setting the table).
The first-side execution means causes the first effect means to execute an effect corresponding to the specific range effect during the specific continuation period.
The first control means is a first-side setting means (sound light) for setting a control information group (light emission data, sound output data) used for executing the effect by the first effect means during the specific continuation period. It is equipped with a function to execute the light emission data reading process and the sound output data reading process on the side MPU 112).
The first-side setting means does not set a group of control information corresponding to the entire effect executed during the specific continuation period at a time, but each of the second control means during the specific continuation period. A means for setting a control information group corresponding to a part of the effect executed during the specific continuation period when the transmission information is transmitted at the timing (light emission data is set in the interrupt area 162b in the sound / light side MPU 112). The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A11, which comprises a function and a function of setting sound output data from the final production data group 152f).

According to the feature A12, the control information group corresponding to the entire effect executed in the specific continuation period is set on the second control means side. On the other hand, on the first control means side, the control information group corresponding to the whole is not set, and the specific continuation is performed according to the transmission information transmitted from the second control means at each timing during the specific continuation period. A group of control information for a part of the effect executed during the period is set. As a result, the storage capacity required in the storage means for setting the control information group can be suppressed as compared with the configuration in which the control information group corresponding to the whole is set on each of the first control means side and the second control means side. Is possible.

Feature A13. The specific range effect may include a plurality of effect ranges (notice display, reach display, etc.) having different modes of effect.
The gaming machine according to feature A12, wherein the control information group corresponding to the partial portion is set corresponding to the plurality of effect ranges.

According to the feature A13, it is possible to prevent the unit of the control information group from becoming too fragmented, and it is possible to appropriately suppress the setting frequency of the control information group in the first control means.

Feature A14. The specific control information group includes information that can specify the control content at each control execution timing during the specific continuation period, and corresponds to these control execution timings toward the first control means. The gaming machine according to feature A12 or A13, wherein the transmission timing of transmission information to be transmitted is included.

According to the feature A14, the second control means can control the execution of the specific range effect by referring to the specific control information group at each control execution timing, and the transmission information directed to the first control means. It is also possible to specify the execution timing of. Therefore, the information to be referred to in the second control means is aggregated, and the processing load can be reduced.

Feature A15. When the first control means transmits transmission information due to the predetermined start trigger, the second side executing means executes the specific range effect by the second effect means during the specific continuation period. To make you
The second side setting means is characterized in that the specific control information group is set when the first control means transmits transmission information due to the predetermined start trigger. The gaming machine according to any one of A14.

According to the feature A15, in the configuration for specifying that the first control means side has a predetermined start trigger, the second control information group is set for the entire effect executed in the specific continuation period. It is possible to disperse the processing load by configuring the control means side.

Feature A16. The first-side setting means provides transmission information corresponding to the start of the specific range effect in response to the transmission information transmitted by the first control means due to the predetermined start trigger. 2 Means for setting a predetermined control information group (light emission data at the start of fluctuation, sound output data at the start of fluctuation) corresponding to the start of the specific range effect when transmitted by the control means (step S1202 in the sound light side MPU 112). It has a function to execute the processing of
The game according to feature A15, wherein the first-side executing means starts an effect corresponding to the specific range effect after the first-side setting unit sets the predetermined control information group. Machine.

According to the feature A16, in the configuration for specifying that the first control means has a predetermined start trigger, the first control means dares to wait for the second control means to transmit the transmission information, and then the specific range effect is produced. Since the configuration is such that the effect corresponding to the above is executed, it is possible to suppress that the start timing of the specific range effect is deviated.

Feature A17. The first control means
A notification specific means for identifying the occurrence of a notification target event (a function of executing the process of step S622 in the sound / light side MPU 112) and
A function of executing the process of step S625 in the sound light side MPU 112 to transmit the notification generation information to the second control means when the occurrence of the notification target event is specified by the notification specific means. )When,
When the occurrence of a notification target event is specified by the notification specific means, the notification execution means causes the first effect means to notify the event regardless of whether or not the second control means has transmitted the transmission information. (Functions for executing the processes of step S623, step S624, step S1602, and step S1809 in the sound light side MPU 112).
The gaming machine according to the feature A16, which is characterized by the above.

According to the feature A17, at the start of the specific range effect, the second control means waits until the transmission information is transmitted, whereas when the notification target event occurs, the transmission information is transmitted from the second control means. The first control means independently starts the notification without waiting until the notification is performed. As a result, it is possible to start the notification at an early stage, and even if a communication abnormality occurs between the first control means and the second control means, the notification can be started on the first effect means side. It will be possible.

Feature A18. It is provided with a privilege lottery execution means (a function of executing the processing of steps S301 and S403 in the main MPU 92) for executing the privilege lottery process of whether or not to grant the privilege to the player.
The predetermined start trigger is when the privilege lottery process is executed, and the specific range effect is executed when the privilege lottery process is executed.
The first control means is characterized in that it stores and retains information on the result of the privilege lottery process that triggered the execution of the specific range effect of the specific continuation period in the specific continuation period. The gaming machine according to any one of.

According to the feature A18, in the configuration in which the control information group corresponding to the entire effect executed in the specific continuation period is set by the second control means, the result of the privilege lottery process in the first control means Information is stored in memory. As a result, in the configuration in which the first control means controls the execution of the effect according to the transmission information transmitted by the second control means, it is possible to take into account the result of the privilege lottery process when controlling the execution of the effect.

Feature A19. The second control means transmits transmission information to the first control means when a predetermined output timing of the specific continuation period is reached regardless of the result of the privilege lottery process.
When the first control means receives the transmission information, the first control means determines whether or not the execution of the privilege corresponding effect (fixed effect) corresponds to the result of the privilege lottery process (sound light). The function of executing the process of step S1205 in the side MPU 112) is provided.
The first-side setting means is a means (sound-light side MPU 112) for setting a control information group corresponding to the privilege-corresponding effect when it is determined by the correspondence-determining means that the result of the privilege lottery process is supported. The gaming machine according to feature A18, which comprises a function of making an affirmative determination in step S1207 and executing the process of step S1208).

According to the feature A19, since the second control means may transmit the transmission information to the first control means without taking into account the result of the privilege lottery process, the configuration for transmitting the transmission information is optimized. Be done. In addition, the first control means stores the information of the result of the privilege lottery process, and after determining whether or not the transmission information transmitted by the second control means corresponds to the result of the privilege lottery process. In order to control the execution of the effect, when the configuration for transmitting the transmission information is optimized for the second control means as described above, the effect corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process is performed on the first control means side. Execution control can be performed.

Feature A20. The second control means can transmit transmission information corresponding to the content of the effect to be performed by the second effect means.
When the first side setting means transmits transmission information corresponding to the second control means causing the second effect means to perform a specific effect (fixed effect), the first side setting means executes the effect corresponding to the specific effect. Is a means for setting a control information group corresponding to the transmission information regardless of whether or not corresponds to the result of the privilege lottery process (a positive determination is made in step S1203 in the sound light side MPU 112 and step S1208). The gaming machine according to feature A19, which is characterized by having a function of executing the processing of the above.

According to the feature A20, when the specific effect is performed by the second effect means, the first control means side is concerned regardless of whether or not the content of the specific effect corresponds to the result of the privilege lottery process. Execution control of the effect corresponding to the content of the specific effect is performed. As a result, it is possible to prioritize the matching of the contents of the effect between the first effect means and the second effect means, and it is possible to make it difficult for the effect to deviate.

Feature A21. The first-side setting means can set control information groups corresponding to different start timing effects during the specific continuation period from the contents of one transmission information transmitted by the second control means. The gaming machine according to any one of features A12 to A20.

According to the feature A21, it is possible to suppress the transmission frequency of the transmission information in the second control means.

Feature A22. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A21, wherein the second effect means is a display means (design display device 31) having a display surface.

In a configuration in which the effect is executed by the display means having a display surface, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described above.

In particular, when the configuration of the above feature A12 is provided, a group of control information corresponding to the entire effect executed in a specific continuation period is set in the second control means on the side that controls the display of the display means. Therefore, even if some kind of communication abnormality occurs, it is possible to continue updating the display in the display means. Since the effect on the display means is easily noticed by the player, the influence when a communication abnormality occurs is reduced by continuing to update the display on the display means.

Feature A23. The gaming machine according to feature A22, wherein the first effect means is at least one of a sound output means (speaker unit 45) and a light emitting means (light emitting unit groups 71 to 73).

In a configuration in which the effect is executed by the display means having a display surface and the effect is executed by at least one of the sound output means and the light emitting means, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described above.

Here, the processing load is lower in the sound output control of the sound output means or the light emission control of the light emitting means than in the display control of the display means. In this case, in the configuration provided with the above feature A2, information on whether or not the input operation is accepted by the operation receiving means is input to the first control means side that controls at least one of the sound output means and the light emitting means. .. As a result, it is not necessary to monitor the operation receiving means in the second control means on the side where the processing load is relatively high, and the processing load of the second control means can be reduced.

<Characteristic B group>
Feature B1. The first control means (sound light side MPU 112) for controlling the first effect means (speaker unit 45, curtain plate movable unit 51, disk movable units 61a, 61b, light emitting unit groups 71 to 73), and
A second control means (display side MPU 122) that controls the second effect means (design display device 31), and
With
The second control means
When a predetermined start trigger is reached, a specific range effect (effect for game times, effect for open / close execution mode) is executed by the second effect means during a specific continuation period (during game rotation, during open / close execution mode). Second side execution means (function to execute task processing in display side MPU 122) and
A second setting of a specific control information group (pattern data table, opening data table) used for executing the specific range effect by the second effect means when the predetermined start trigger is reached. Side setting means (function to execute the processing of step S802 and step S806 in the display side MPU 122) and
With
The first control means
During the specific continuation period, the first effect means executes an effect corresponding to the specific range effect (light emission control process, sound output control process, and movable object control process in the sound light side MPU 112). Function) and
Reading of light emission data by the first side setting means (sound light side MPU 112) for setting the control information group (light emission data, sound output data) used for executing the effect by the first effect means during the specific continuation period. Function to execute processing and reading processing of sound output data) and
With
The first-side setting means does not set a group of control information corresponding to the entire effect executed during the specific continuation period at a time, but each of the second control means during the specific continuation period. A means for setting a control information group corresponding to a part of the effect executed during the specific continuation period when the transmission information is transmitted at the timing (light emission data is set in the interrupt area 162b in the sound / light side MPU 112). A gaming machine characterized by having a function and a function of setting sound output data from the final production data group 152f).

According to the feature B1, since the first control means is configured to control the execution of the effect of the first effect means according to the transmission information output from the second control means each time, the first effect means and the second effect means When the effects are executed in the same period for each, it is difficult for the two effects to deviate from each other.

In this case, the control information group corresponding to the entire effect executed in the specific continuation period is set on the second control means side. On the other hand, on the first control means side, the control information group corresponding to the whole is not set, and the specific continuation is performed according to the transmission information transmitted from the second control means at each timing during the specific continuation period. A group of control information for a part of the effect executed during the period is set. As a result, the storage capacity required in the storage means for setting the control information group can be suppressed as compared with the configuration in which the control information group corresponding to the whole is set on each of the first control means side and the second control means side. Is possible.

From the above, it is possible to perform good control in a configuration using a plurality of control means.

Feature B2. The specific range effect may include a plurality of effect ranges (notice display, reach display, etc.) having different modes of effect.
The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the control information group corresponding to the partial portion is set corresponding to the plurality of effect ranges.

According to the feature B2, it is possible to prevent the unit of the control information group from becoming too fragmented, and it is possible to appropriately suppress the setting frequency of the control information group in the first control means.

Feature B3. The specific control information group includes information that can specify the control content at each control execution timing during the specific continuation period, and corresponds to these control execution timings toward the first control means. The gaming machine according to feature B1 or B2, wherein the transmission timing of transmission information to be transmitted is included.

According to the feature B3, the second control means can control the execution of the specific range effect by referring to the specific control information group at each control execution timing, and the transmission information directed to the first control means. It is also possible to specify the execution timing of. Therefore, the information to be referred to in the second control means is aggregated, and the processing load can be reduced.

Feature B4. When the first control means transmits transmission information due to the predetermined start trigger, the second side executing means executes the specific range effect by the second effect means during the specific continuation period. To make you
The second side setting means sets the specific control information group when the first control means transmits transmission information due to the predetermined start trigger. Feature B1 The gaming machine according to any one of B3.

According to the feature B4, in the configuration for specifying that the predetermined start trigger has been generated on the first control means side, the setting of the control information group corresponding to the entire effect executed in the specific continuation period is set as the second. By configuring the control means side, it is possible to distribute the processing load.

Feature B5. The first-side setting means provides transmission information corresponding to the start of the specific range effect in response to the transmission information transmitted by the first control means due to the predetermined start trigger. 2 Means for setting a predetermined control information group (light emission data at the start of fluctuation, sound output data at the start of fluctuation) corresponding to the start of the specific range effect when transmitted by the control means (step S1202 in the sound light side MPU 112). It has a function to execute the processing of
The game according to feature B4, wherein the first-side executing means starts an effect corresponding to the specific range effect after the first-side setting means sets the predetermined control information group. Machine.

According to the feature B5, in the configuration for specifying that the first control means has triggered a predetermined start, the first control means dares to wait for the second control means to transmit the transmission information, and then the specific range effect is produced. Since the configuration is such that the effect corresponding to the above is executed, it is possible to suppress that the start timing of the specific range effect is deviated.

Feature B6. The first control means
A notification specific means for identifying the occurrence of a notification target event (a function of executing the process of step S622 in the sound / light side MPU 112) and
A function of executing the process of step S625 in the sound light side MPU 112 to transmit the notification generation information to the second control means when the occurrence of the notification target event is specified by the notification specific means. )When,
When the occurrence of a notification target event is specified by the notification specific means, the notification execution means causes the first effect means to notify the event regardless of whether or not the second control means has transmitted the transmission information. (Functions for executing the processes of step S623, step S624, step S1602, and step S1809 in the sound light side MPU 112).
The gaming machine according to the feature B5, which is characterized by having.

According to the feature B6, at the start of the specific range effect, the second control means waits until the transmission information is transmitted, whereas when the notification target event occurs, the transmission information is transmitted from the second control means. The first control means independently starts the notification without waiting until the notification is performed. As a result, it is possible to start the notification at an early stage, and even if a communication abnormality occurs between the first control means and the second control means, the notification can be started on the first effect means side. It will be possible.

Feature B7. It is provided with a privilege lottery execution means (a function of executing the processing of steps S301 and S403 in the main MPU 92) for executing the privilege lottery process of whether or not to grant the privilege to the player.
The predetermined start trigger is when the privilege lottery process is executed, and the specific range effect is executed when the privilege lottery process is executed.
The first control means is characterized in that it stores and retains information on the result of the privilege lottery process that triggered the execution of the specific range effect of the specific continuation period in the specific continuation period. The gaming machine according to any one of.

According to the feature B7, in the configuration in which the control information group corresponding to the entire effect executed in the specific continuation period is set by the second control means, the result of the privilege lottery process in the first control means Information is stored in memory. As a result, in the configuration in which the first control means controls the execution of the effect according to the transmission information transmitted by the second control means, it is possible to take into account the result of the privilege lottery process when controlling the execution of the effect.

Feature B8. The second control means transmits transmission information to the first control means when a predetermined output timing of the specific continuation period is reached regardless of the result of the privilege lottery process.
When the first control means receives the transmission information, the first control means determines whether or not the execution of the privilege corresponding effect (fixed effect) corresponds to the result of the privilege lottery process (sound light). The function of executing the process of step S1205 in the side MPU 112) is provided.
The first-side setting means is a means (sound-light side MPU 112) for setting a control information group corresponding to the privilege-corresponding effect when it is determined by the correspondence-determining means that the result of the privilege lottery process is supported. The gaming machine according to feature B7, which comprises a function of making an affirmative determination in step S1207 and executing the process of step S1208).

According to the feature B8, since the second control means may transmit the transmission information to the first control means without taking into account the result of the privilege lottery process, the configuration for transmitting the transmission information is optimized. Be done. In addition, the first control means stores the information of the result of the privilege lottery process, and after determining whether or not the transmission information transmitted by the second control means corresponds to the result of the privilege lottery process. In order to control the execution of the effect, when the configuration for transmitting the transmission information is optimized for the second control means as described above, the effect corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process is performed on the first control means side. Execution control can be performed.

Feature B9. The second control means can transmit transmission information corresponding to the content of the effect to be performed by the second effect means.
When the first side setting means transmits transmission information corresponding to the second control means causing the second effect means to perform a specific effect (fixed effect), the first side setting means executes the effect corresponding to the specific effect. Is a means for setting a control information group corresponding to the transmission information regardless of whether or not corresponds to the result of the privilege lottery process (a positive determination is made in step S1203 in the sound light side MPU 112 and step S1208). The gaming machine according to feature B8, which is characterized by having a function of executing the processing of the above.

According to the feature B9, when the specific effect is performed by the second effect means, the first control means side concerned whether or not the content of the specific effect corresponds to the result of the privilege lottery process. Execution control of the effect corresponding to the content of the specific effect is performed. As a result, it is possible to prioritize the matching of the contents of the effect between the first effect means and the second effect means, and it is possible to make it difficult for the effect to deviate.

Feature B10. The first-side setting means can set control information groups corresponding to different start timing effects during the specific continuation period from the contents of one transmission information transmitted by the second control means. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B9.

According to the feature B10, it is possible to suppress the transmission frequency of the transmission information in the second control means.

Feature B11. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B10, wherein the second effect means is a display means (design display device 31) having a display surface.

In a configuration in which the effect is executed by the display means having a display surface, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described above.

In particular, since the control information group corresponding to the entire effect executed in the specific continuation period is set in the second control means on the display control side of the display means, even if some communication abnormality occurs, even if some communication abnormality occurs. It becomes possible to continue updating the display in the display means. Since the effect on the display means is easily noticed by the player, the influence when a communication abnormality occurs is reduced by continuing to update the display on the display means.

Feature B12. The gaming machine according to feature B11, wherein the first effect means is at least one of a sound output means (speaker unit 45) and a light emitting means (light emitting unit groups 71 to 73).

In a configuration in which the effect is executed by the display means having a display surface and the effect is executed by at least one of the sound output means and the light emitting means, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described above.

<Characteristic C group>
Feature C1. The first control means (sound light side MPU 112) for controlling the first effect means (speaker unit 45, curtain plate movable unit 51, disk movable units 61a, 61b, light emitting unit groups 71 to 73), and
A second control means (display side MPU 122) that controls the second effect means (design display device 31), and
With
The first control means is a first-side execution means (sound light) that causes the first effect means to execute an effect during a specific continuation period (during game rotation, during open / close execution mode) when a predetermined start trigger is reached. It has a function to execute light emission control processing, sound output control processing, and moving object control processing in the side MPU 112).
The second control means
The second side setting means (in the display side MPU 122) for setting the specific control information group (pattern data table, opening data table) used to execute the effect during the specific continuation period in the second effect means. (Function to execute the processing of step S802 and step S806) and
A second-side execution means that causes the second effect means to execute an effect during the specific continuation period by using information corresponding to the control execution timing in the specific control information group each time the control execution timing is reached. (Function to execute task processing on the display side MPU 122) and
A command setting process on the display side MPU 122 is executed on the second side transmission means (display side MPU 122) for transmitting transmission information to the first control means in accordance with the progress of the production during the specific continuation period in the second effect means. Function) and
With
The first-side executing means uses the transmission information transmitted by the second-side transmitting means to display the content of the effect to be executed by the first effect means in the second effect means during the specific continuation period. It is possible to correspond to the content,
The second-side transmission means does not transmit transmission information to the first control means each time the control execution timing is reached, but transmits information to the first control means at a timing corresponding to a predetermined control execution timing. A gaming machine characterized in that it transmits information.

According to the feature C1, in the first control means, the transmission information transmitted from the second control means is used, and the content of the effect to be executed by the first effect means during the specific continuation period is the content of the effect in the second effect means. Therefore, when the first effect means and the second effect means each execute the effect in the same period, it is difficult for the two effects to be out of sync with each other.

In this case, since the second control means is configured to transmit the transmission information when the predetermined control execution timing is reached, instead of transmitting the transmission information each time the control execution timing is reached, the second control means is used. It is possible to reduce the transmission frequency of the transmission information in. As a result, the processing load of the second control means can be reduced.

From the above, it is possible to perform good control in a configuration using a plurality of control means.

Feature C2. The specific control information group includes information that can specify the control content at each control execution timing during the specific continuation period, and corresponds to these control execution timings toward the first control means. The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein the transmission timing of transmission information to be transmitted is included.

According to the feature C2, the second control means can control the execution of the effect during the specific continuation period by referring to the specific control information group at each control execution timing, and is directed toward the first control means. It is also possible to specify the execution timing of the transmitted information. Therefore, the information to be referred to in the second control means is aggregated, and the processing load can be reduced.

Feature C3. In the specific range effect (effect for game rounds, effect for open / close execution mode) executed during the specific continuation period in the second effect means, a plurality of effect ranges (notice display, reach) having different modes of effect. It is a configuration that can include display etc.)
The game according to feature C1 or C2, wherein the second-side transmission means transmits the transmission information so that the start timing of each effect range can be specified by the first control means. Machine.

According to the feature C3, since the second control means may transmit the transmission information according to each effect range, it is possible to suppress the transmission frequency of the transmission information. Further, in the first control means, when the content of the effect to be executed by the first effect means corresponds to the content of the effect in the second effect means according to the transmission information transmitted by the second control means, each effect range. Since the adjustment may be made in units, the adjustment can be easily performed.

Feature C4. Any of the features C1 to C3, wherein the first-side executing means grasps the content of the effect to be executed during the specific continuation period from the transmission information transmitted by the second-side transmitting means. The gaming machine described in 1.

According to the feature C4, the first control means not only makes the content of the effect to be executed by the first effect means correspond to the content of the effect in the second effect means according to the transmission information transmitted by the second control means. Since the content of the effect to be executed may also follow the content determined by the second control means, the processing load can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the content of the effect is independently determined by the first control means.

Feature C5. The first control means does not set a group of control information corresponding to the entire effect executed during the specific continuation period at a time, but the second control means performs each timing during the specific continuation period. With the transmission information transmitted in The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4, characterized in that it has a function of setting a function and a function of setting sound output data from the final production data group 152f).

According to the feature C5, the control information group corresponding to the entire effect executed in the specific continuation period is set on the second control means side. On the other hand, on the first control means side, the control information group corresponding to the whole is not set, and the specific continuation is performed according to the transmission information transmitted from the second control means at each timing during the specific continuation period. A group of control information for a part of the effect executed during the period is set. As a result, the storage capacity required in the storage means for setting the control information group can be suppressed as compared with the configuration in which the control information group corresponding to the whole is set on each of the first control means side and the second control means side. Is possible.

Feature C6. In the specific range effect (effect for game rounds, effect for open / close execution mode) executed during the specific continuation period in the second effect means, a plurality of effect ranges (notice display, reach) having different modes of effect. It is a configuration that can include display etc.)
The gaming machine according to feature C5, wherein the control information group corresponding to the partial portion is set corresponding to the plurality of effect ranges.

According to the feature C6, it is possible to prevent the unit of the control information group from becoming too fragmented, and it is possible to appropriately suppress the setting frequency of the control information group in the first control means.

Feature C7. When the first control means transmits transmission information due to the predetermined start trigger, the second side executing means causes the second effect means to execute a specific range effect during the specific continuation period. Is a thing
The feature C5 is characterized in that the second side setting means sets the specific control information group when the first control means transmits transmission information due to the predetermined start trigger. Or the gaming machine according to C6.

According to the feature C7, in the configuration for specifying that the predetermined start trigger has been generated on the first control means side, the setting of the control information group corresponding to the entire effect executed in the specific continuation period is set as the second. By configuring the control means side, it is possible to distribute the processing load.

Feature C8. The first-side setting means provides transmission information corresponding to the start of the specific range effect in response to the transmission information transmitted by the first control means due to the predetermined start trigger. 2 Means for setting a predetermined control information group (light emission data at the start of fluctuation, sound output data at the start of fluctuation) corresponding to the start of the specific range effect when transmitted by the control means (step S1202 in the sound light side MPU 112). It has a function to execute the processing of
The game according to feature C7, wherein the first-side executing means starts an effect corresponding to the specific range effect after the first-side setting unit sets the predetermined control information group. Machine.

According to the feature C8, in the configuration for specifying that the first control means has a predetermined start trigger, the first control means dares to wait for the second control means to transmit the transmission information, and then the specific range effect is produced. Since the configuration is such that the effect corresponding to the above is executed, it is possible to suppress that the start timing of the specific range effect is deviated.

Feature C9. The first control means
A notification specific means for identifying the occurrence of a notification target event (a function of executing the process of step S622 in the sound / light side MPU 112) and
A function of executing the process of step S625 in the sound light side MPU 112 to transmit the notification generation information to the second control means when the occurrence of the notification target event is specified by the notification specific means. )When,
When the occurrence of a notification target event is specified by the notification specific means, the notification execution means causes the first effect means to notify the event regardless of whether or not the second control means has transmitted the transmission information. (Functions for executing the processes of step S623, step S624, step S1602, and step S1809 in the sound light side MPU 112).
The gaming machine according to the feature C8, which is characterized by the above.

According to the feature C9, at the start of the specific range effect, the second control means waits until the transmission information is transmitted, whereas when the notification target event occurs, the transmission information is transmitted from the second control means. The first control means independently starts the notification without waiting until the notification is performed. As a result, it is possible to start the notification at an early stage, and even if a communication abnormality occurs between the first control means and the second control means, the notification can be started on the first effect means side. It will be possible.

Feature C10. It is provided with a privilege lottery execution means (a function of executing the processing of steps S301 and S403 in the main MPU 92) for executing the privilege lottery process of whether or not to grant the privilege to the player.
The predetermined start trigger is when the privilege lottery process is executed, and the effect during the specific continuation period is executed when the privilege lottery process is executed.
Any of the features C5 to C9, wherein the first control means stores and retains information on the result of the privilege lottery process that triggered the execution of the effect of the specific continuation period in the specific continuation period. The gaming machine described in 1.

According to the feature C10, in the configuration in which the control information group corresponding to the entire effect executed in the specific continuation period is set by the second control means, the result of the privilege lottery process in the first control means Information is stored in memory. As a result, in the configuration in which the first control means controls the execution of the effect according to the transmission information transmitted by the second control means, it is possible to take into account the result of the privilege lottery process when controlling the execution of the effect.

Feature C11. The second control means transmits transmission information to the first control means when a predetermined output timing of the specific continuation period is reached regardless of the result of the privilege lottery process.
When the transmission information is received, the first control means determines whether or not executing the privilege corresponding effect (fixed effect) corresponds to the result of the privilege lottery process (correspondence determining means ( A function of executing the process of step S1205 in the sound light side MPU 112) is provided.
When the correspondence determination means determines that the content of the corresponding effect of the transmission information corresponds to the result of the privilege lottery process, the first side setting means corresponds to the control information corresponding to the transmission information. The gaming machine according to feature C10, which comprises means for setting a group (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S1207 of the sound light side MPU 112 and executing the process of step S1208).

According to the feature C11, since the second control means may transmit the transmission information to the first control means without taking into account the result of the privilege lottery process, the configuration for transmitting the transmission information is optimized. Be done. In addition, the first control means stores the information of the result of the privilege lottery process, and after determining whether or not the transmission information transmitted by the second control means corresponds to the result of the privilege lottery process. In order to control the execution of the effect, when the configuration for transmitting the transmission information is optimized for the second control means as described above, the effect corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process is performed on the first control means side. Execution control can be performed.

Feature C12. The second control means can transmit transmission information corresponding to the content of the effect to be performed by the second effect means.
When the first side setting means transmits transmission information corresponding to the second control means causing the second effect means to perform a specific effect (fixed effect), the first side setting means executes the effect corresponding to the specific effect. Is a means for setting a control information group corresponding to the transmission information regardless of whether or not corresponds to the result of the privilege lottery process (a positive determination is made in step S1203 in the sound light side MPU 112 and step S1208). The gaming machine according to feature C11, which is characterized by having a function of executing the processing of the above.

According to the feature C12, when the specific effect is performed by the second effect means, the first control means side concerned whether or not the content of the specific effect corresponds to the result of the privilege lottery process. Execution control of the effect corresponding to the content of the specific effect is performed. As a result, it is possible to prioritize the matching of the contents of the effect between the first effect means and the second effect means, and it is possible to make it difficult for the effect to deviate.

Feature C13. The first-side setting means can set control information groups corresponding to different start timing effects during the specific continuation period from the contents of one transmission information transmitted by the second control means. The gaming machine according to any one of features C5 to C12.

According to the feature C13, it is possible to suppress the transmission frequency of the transmission information in the second control means.

Feature C14. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C13, wherein the second effect means is a display means (design display device 31) having a display surface.

In a configuration in which the effect is executed by the display means having a display surface, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described above.

In particular, when the configuration of the above feature C5 is provided, a group of control information corresponding to the entire effect executed in a specific continuation period is set in the second control means on the side that controls the display of the display means. Therefore, even if some kind of communication abnormality occurs, it is possible to continue updating the display in the display means. Since the effect on the display means is easily noticed by the player, the influence when a communication abnormality occurs is reduced by continuing to update the display on the display means.

Feature C15. The gaming machine according to feature C14, wherein the first effect means is at least one of a sound output means (speaker unit 45) and a light emitting means (light emitting unit groups 71 to 73).

In a configuration in which the effect is executed by the display means having a display surface and the effect is executed by at least one of the sound output means and the light emitting means, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described above.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. The first control means (sound light side MPU 112) for controlling the first effect means (speaker unit 45, curtain plate movable unit 51, disk movable units 61a, 61b, light emitting unit groups 71 to 73), and
A second control means (display side MPU 122) that controls the second effect means (design display device 31), and
With
The second control means is a second side transmission means (display side MPU 122) that transmits predetermined transmission information to the first control means as the effect being executed by the second effect means progresses. Has a function to execute command setting processing in
The first control means
When the second-side transmitting means transmits the predetermined transmission information, the specific means for identifying the predetermined timing (the function of executing the process of step S1204 in the sound light side MPU 112) and
When it is specified that the specific means is at a predetermined timing, at least information different from the information included in the predetermined transmission information (information on the game result stored in the retained data area 161) is used to produce a predetermined effect. Content determining means for determining whether or not to execute (fixed effect) and at least one of the contents of the predetermined effect (fixed effect) (a function of executing the processes of steps S1205 and S1206 in the sound light side MPU 112).
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature D1, in the first control means, the predetermined timing is determined by the predetermined transmission information transmitted from the second control means in accordance with the progress of the effect being executed by the second effect means. Since the configuration is such that the execution control of the effect of the first effect means is performed by specifying the above, when the effect is executed in the same period by each of the first effect means and the second effect means, there is a difference between the two effects. It becomes difficult to occur.

In this case, when the first control means specifies that the timing is predetermined, whether or not to execute the predetermined effect by using at least information different from the information included in the transmission information, and whether or not the predetermined effect is executed, and the predetermined effect Determine at least one of the contents. As a result, the predetermined transmission information need only include information for causing the first control means to recognize that the predetermined timing is set, and includes information on whether or not to execute the predetermined effect and information on the content of the predetermined effect. No need. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the data capacity of the predetermined transmission information, reduce the processing load of the second control means, and facilitate the design while making the content of the effect in the first effect means appropriate. ..

From the above, it is possible to perform good control in a configuration using a plurality of control means.

Feature D2. It is provided with a privilege lottery execution means (a function of executing the processing of steps S301 and S403 in the main MPU 92) for executing the privilege lottery process of whether or not to grant the privilege to the player.
Described in feature D1, the information different from the information included in the predetermined transmission information includes information on the result of the privilege lottery process (information on the game result stored in the retained data area 161). Game machine.

According to the feature D2, in the configuration in which the first control means determines whether or not to execute the predetermined effect in response to the transmission information transmitted from the second control means, and at least one of the contents of the predetermined effect. It is possible to take into account the result of the privilege lottery process when controlling the execution of the effect.

Feature D3. The content determination means
Correspondence determination means for determining whether or not executing a privilege corresponding effect (fixed effect) as the predetermined effect corresponds to the result of the privilege lottery process when the specific means is specified to be at a predetermined timing. (Function to execute the process of step S1205 in the sound light side MPU 112) and
When it is determined in the corresponding determination means that the result of the privilege lottery process is supported, the first side setting means (step S1208 in the sound light side MPU 112) for setting the control information group corresponding to the privilege correspondence effect. Function to execute processing) and
The first side execution means (light emission control processing, sound output control processing, and movable object in the sound light side MPU 112) that performs execution control of the production of the first production means using the control information group set by the first side setting means. Function to execute control processing) and
The gaming machine according to feature D2, characterized in that the machine is equipped with.

According to the feature D3, since the second control means may transmit the transmission information to the first control means without taking into account the result of the privilege lottery process, the configuration for transmitting the transmission information is optimized. Be done. Further, in the first control means, since it is determined whether or not the transmission information transmitted by the second control means corresponds to the result of the privilege lottery process, the execution control of the effect is performed, so that the second control means is performed as described above. When the configuration for transmitting transmission information is optimized for the control means, the first control means side can control the execution of the effect corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process.

Feature D4. When the first-side setting means transmits transmission information corresponding to the second-side transmitting means causing the second effect means to perform a specific effect (fixed effect), the first-side setting means produces an effect corresponding to the specific effect. A means for setting a control information group corresponding to the transmission information regardless of whether or not the execution corresponds to the result of the privilege lottery process (a positive determination is made in step S1203 in the sound light side MPU 112 and a step). The gaming machine according to feature D3, which comprises a function of executing the process of S1208).

According to the feature D4, when the specific effect is performed by the second effect means, the first control means side concerned whether or not the content of the specific effect corresponds to the result of the privilege lottery process. Execution control of the effect corresponding to the content of the specific effect is performed. As a result, it is possible to prioritize the matching of the contents of the effect between the first effect means and the second effect means, and it is possible to make it difficult for the effect to deviate.

Feature D5. The specific means according to any one of features D1 to D4, wherein it is possible to specify from the content of the predetermined transmission information that the timing corresponds to the execution of an effect different from the predetermined effect. Amusement machine.

According to the feature D5, it is possible to consolidate the information into one predetermined transmission information, and it is possible to suppress the transmission frequency of the predetermined transmission information.

Feature D6. The second control means
When a predetermined start trigger is reached, a specific range effect (effect for game times, effect for open / close execution mode) is executed by the second effect means during a specific continuation period (during game rotation, during open / close execution mode). Second side execution means (function to execute task processing in display side MPU 122) and
A second setting of a specific control information group (pattern data table, opening data table) used for executing the specific range effect by the second effect means when the predetermined start trigger is reached. Side setting means (function to execute the processing of step S802 and step S806 in the display side MPU 122) and
With
The specific control information group includes information that can specify the control content at each control execution timing during the specific continuation period, and corresponds to these control execution timings toward the first control means. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D5, wherein the transmission timing of transmission information to be transmitted is included.

According to the feature D6, the second control means can control the execution of the effect during the specific continuation period by referring to the specific control information group at each control execution timing, and is directed toward the first control means. It is also possible to specify the execution timing of the transmitted information. Therefore, the information to be referred to in the second control means is aggregated, and the processing load can be reduced.

Feature D7. The specific range effect executed during the specific continuation period in the second effect means may include a plurality of effect ranges (notice display, reach display, etc.) having different modes of effect.
The gaming machine according to feature D6, wherein the second-side transmission means transmits the transmission information so that the start timing of each effect range can be specified by the first control means.

According to the feature D7, since the second control means may transmit the transmission information according to each effect range, it is possible to suppress the transmission frequency of the transmission information. Further, in the first control means, when the content of the effect to be executed by the first effect means corresponds to the content of the effect in the second effect means according to the transmission information transmitted by the second control means, each effect range. Since the adjustment may be made in units, the adjustment can be easily performed.

Feature D8. The first control means does not set a group of control information corresponding to the entire effect executed during the specific continuation period at a time, but the second control means performs each timing during the specific continuation period. The first-side setting means (sound-light side MPU 112) that sets the control information group (light emission data, sound output data) corresponding to a part of the effect executed during the specific continuation period, triggered by the transmission of the transmission information in The gaming machine according to feature D6 or D7, characterized in that it has a function of setting light emission data in the interrupt area 162b and a function of setting sound output data from the final production data group 152f).

According to the feature D8, the control information group corresponding to the entire effect executed in the specific continuation period is set on the second control means side. On the other hand, on the first control means side, the control information group corresponding to the whole is not set, and the specific continuation is performed according to the transmission information transmitted from the second control means at each timing during the specific continuation period. A group of control information for a part of the effect executed during the period is set. As a result, the storage capacity required in the storage means for setting the control information group can be suppressed as compared with the configuration in which the control information group corresponding to the whole is set on each of the first control means side and the second control means side. Is possible.

Feature D9. The specific range effect executed during the specific continuation period in the second effect means may include a plurality of effect ranges (notice display, reach display, etc.) having different modes of effect.
The gaming machine according to feature D8, wherein the control information group corresponding to the partial portion is set corresponding to the plurality of effect ranges.

According to the feature D9, it is possible to prevent the unit of the control information group from becoming too fragmented, and it is possible to appropriately suppress the setting frequency of the control information group in the first control means.

Feature D10. When the first control means transmits transmission information due to the predetermined start trigger, the second side executing means causes the second effect means to execute a specific range effect during the specific continuation period. Is a thing
The feature D8 is characterized in that the second side setting means sets the specific control information group when the first control means transmits transmission information due to the predetermined start trigger. Or the gaming machine according to D9.

According to the feature D10, in the configuration for specifying that the predetermined start trigger has been generated on the first control means side, the setting of the control information group corresponding to the entire effect executed in the specific continuation period is set as the second. It is possible to disperse the processing load by configuring the control means side.

Feature D11. The first-side setting means provides transmission information corresponding to the start of the specific range effect in response to the transmission information transmitted by the first control means due to the predetermined start trigger. 2 Means for setting a predetermined control information group (light emission data at the start of fluctuation, sound output data at the start of fluctuation) corresponding to the start of the specific range effect when transmitted by the control means (step S1202 in the sound light side MPU 112). It has a function to execute the processing of
The game according to feature D10, wherein the first-side executing means starts an effect corresponding to the specific range effect after the first-side setting means sets the predetermined control information group. Machine.

According to the feature D11, in the configuration for specifying that the first control means has a predetermined start trigger, the first control means dares to wait for the second control means to transmit the transmission information, and then the specific range effect is produced. Since the configuration is such that the effect corresponding to the above is executed, it is possible to suppress that the start timing of the specific range effect is deviated.

Feature D12. The first control means
A notification specific means for identifying the occurrence of a notification target event (a function of executing the process of step S622 in the sound / light side MPU 112) and
A function of executing the process of step S625 in the sound light side MPU 112 to transmit the notification generation information to the second control means when the occurrence of the notification target event is specified by the notification specific means. )When,
When the occurrence of a notification target event is specified by the notification specific means, the notification execution means causes the first effect means to notify the event regardless of whether or not the second control means has transmitted the transmission information. (Functions for executing the processes of step S623, step S624, step S1602, and step S1809 in the sound light side MPU 112).
The gaming machine according to feature D11.

According to the feature D12, at the start of the specific range effect, the second control means waits until the transmission information is transmitted, whereas when the notification target event occurs, the transmission information is transmitted from the second control means. The first control means independently starts the notification without waiting until the notification is performed. As a result, it is possible to start the notification at an early stage, and even if a communication abnormality occurs between the first control means and the second control means, the notification can be started on the first effect means side. It will be possible.

Feature D13. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D12, wherein the second effect means is a display means (design display device 31) having a display surface.

In a configuration in which the effect is executed by the display means having a display surface, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described above.

In particular, when the configuration of the above feature D6 is provided, a group of control information corresponding to the entire effect executed in a specific continuation period is set in the second control means on the side that controls the display of the display means. Therefore, even if some kind of communication abnormality occurs, it is possible to continue updating the display in the display means. Since the effect on the display means is easily noticed by the player, the influence when a communication abnormality occurs is reduced by continuing to update the display on the display means.

Feature D14. The gaming machine according to feature D13, wherein the first effect means is at least one of a sound output means (speaker unit 45) and a light emitting means (light emitting unit groups 71 to 73).

In a configuration in which the effect is executed by the display means having a display surface and the effect is executed by at least one of the sound output means and the light emitting means, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described above.

The inventions of the feature A group, the feature B group, the feature C group, and the feature D group can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of game machine. As these gaming machines, there is known a configuration in which a plurality of types of production devices are used to produce a production.

For example, a configuration is known in which a display device such as a liquid crystal display device and a speaker are used at least to perform an effect. In this case, a sound corresponding to the display content on the display device is output from the speaker. Further, for example, a configuration is known in which a light emitting unit such as an LED and a speaker are used at least to produce an effect. In this case, the light emitting unit is controlled by a lighting pattern according to the content of the sound output from the speaker. .. Further, for example, a configuration is known in which the display device and the movable object are used at least to perform an effect. In this case, the operation of the movable object is started according to the display content on the display device.

In a configuration in which a plurality of types of effect devices are used to perform an effect as in the above example, the processing load is distributed by differently different control means for controlling the execution of the effect between a predetermined effect device and a specific effect device. It becomes possible. In this case, in a configuration using a plurality of control means, a configuration capable of performing good control is required.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. Production means (light emitting groups 71 to 73) capable of executing production, and
Information setting means (in the sound light side MPU 112) that sets the control information group (light emission data) used for executing the effect in the effect means so that it can be used when the execution control of the effect of the effect means is performed. Function to execute the reading process of light emission data) and
When the control execution timing is reached, the control information group uses the information corresponding to the control execution timing to execute the effect by the effect means during a predetermined period (in the sound / light side MPU 112). Function to execute light emission control processing) and
With
The information setting means is
Of the source information reading means (step S1402, step S1406, step S1409 and step S1415 in the sound light side MPU 112) for reading the original information (pallet data) used for setting the control information group from the storage means (sound light side ROM 113). Function to execute processing) and
Derivation means (data expansion processing in the sound light side MPU 112) for deriving the control information group by applying setting information (start position information, duration data) to the original information read by the original information reading means is executed. Function to do) and
With
The derivation means is a gaming machine characterized in that different control information groups can be derived by applying different setting information to the original information.

According to the feature E1, different control information groups are derived by applying different setting information to the original information. As a result, the storage capacity required for the storage means can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the control information group different for each type of effect executed during the predetermined period is stored in the storage means at the game machine manufacturing stage. Is possible. From the above, it is possible to suitably control the execution of the effect.

Feature E2. The derivation means
Means for applying the first setting information (start position number) to the original information (a function of executing the process of step S1504 in the sound light side MPU 112) and
A means for applying the second setting information (duration data) to the original information (a function of executing the process of step S1505 in the sound light side MPU 112) and
With
In the storage means, the type relationship information (data selection table) that defines the correspondence between the original information to be used, the type of the first setting information applied to the original information, and the type of the second setting information. The gaming machine according to feature E1, wherein 151 g) is stored.

According to the feature E2, since at least the first setting information and the second setting information are applied to the original information to derive the control information group, the control information derived from one original information is derived. It is possible to diversify the group. In this case, the type relationship information that defines the correspondence between the original information to be used and the type of the first setting information and the type of the second setting information applied to the original information is stored in advance in the storage means. Since it is configured, the process for specifying the correspondence between the original information and the information for each setting can be simplified.

Feature E3. A plurality of the original information is stored in the storage means, and the original information is stored in the storage means.
The gaming machine according to feature E1 or E2, wherein the setting information applicable to the original information is plural.

According to the feature E3, it is possible to realize the diversification of the control information group while suppressing the storage capacity required for the storage means.

Feature E4. The storage means is characterized in that the correspondence relationship information (start position data group 151b) that defines the correspondence relationship between the original information to be used and the setting information applied to the original information is stored. The gaming machine described in E3.

According to the feature E4, the process for specifying the correspondence between the original information and the setting information can be simplified.

Feature E5. The original information defines the content of the switching destination when the production content in the production means is sequentially switched.
The derivation means is a start reference indicating from which of the contents of the plurality of switching destinations defined in the original information the production in the production means is started as the setting information. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4, which comprises means for applying information (start position number) (a function of executing the process of step S1504 in the sound light side MPU 112).

According to the feature E5, it is possible to derive a plurality of control information groups from one original information by a simple method of making the start reference information different, and diversify the control information groups while suppressing the storage capacity. It is possible to realize this while facilitating the design.

Feature E6. The original information defines the content of the switching destination when the production content in the production means is sequentially switched.
The derivation means is a means (sound light side) that applies continuation reference information (duration data) indicating a duration when each content of the switching destination defined in the original information is continued as the setting information. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, which comprises a function of executing the process of step S1505 in the MPU 112).

According to the feature E6, it is possible to derive a plurality of control information groups from one original information by a simple method of making the continuation reference information different, and diversify the control information groups while suppressing the storage capacity. It is possible to realize this while facilitating the design.

Feature E7. The effect means includes a plurality of unit effect means (LEDs 71a to 73a).
The derivation means is used for the setting, which is different between at least the first unit effect means and the second unit effect means among the plurality of unit effect means while using the same original information for the plurality of unit effect means. The feature is that it is provided with a first derivation means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1502 to S1508 in the sound light side MPU 112) so that different control information groups are derived by applying the information. The gaming machine according to any one of E1 to E6.

According to the feature E7, it is possible to derive different control information groups in a plurality of unit effect means while using the same original information. As a result, the same original information can be used even when different effects are executed among the plurality of unit effect means, so that it is possible to diversify the effects while suppressing the storage capacity.

Feature E8. The effect means includes a plurality of unit effect means (LEDs 71a to 73a).
The derivation means
A first derivation means (a function of executing the processes of steps S1502 to S1508 in the sound light side MPU 112) that uses the same original information for the plurality of unit effect means, and
A second derivation means (a function of executing the processing of steps S151 to S1518 in the sound light side MPU 112) that uses different source information for some of the unit effect means among the plurality of unit effect means.
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E7.

According to the feature E8, it is possible to switch between a simple production mode and a complicated production mode only by changing the number of original information used for the plurality of unit production means.

Feature E9. The second derivation means is a means (sound / light side MPU 112) for applying application target information (list data, group data) indicating the type of the original information applied to each of the plurality of unit effect means as the setting information. The gaming machine according to feature E8, which comprises a function of executing the processes of steps S1511 and S1512 in the above.

According to the feature E9, when different source information is applied between the plurality of unit effect means, it is only necessary to refer to the application target information, so that the application process can be simplified.

Feature E10. The effect means is a light emitting means,
The control information group is for determining the light emission pattern of the light emitting means during the predetermined period.
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E9, wherein the original information defines the content of the switching destination when the light emitting content of the light emitting means is sequentially switched.

According to the feature E10, it is possible to obtain an excellent effect as described above regarding the light emission control of the light emitting means.

The invention of the feature E group can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of game machine. These game machines include a control device having a CPU, a ROM, or a CPU, a ROM, or the like in a single chip, and the control device causes a display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device) and a light emitting unit (for example, an LED). ), A configuration is known in which an effect is executed by controlling an effect device such as a speaker.

The control device controls the execution of the effect by reading the data that determines the content of the effect and executing the process corresponding to the read data. Specifically, in the display control of the display device, for example, data corresponding to the content of the effect to be executed by the control device is read out, and the read data is used to cause the display device to perform a predetermined display. , A configuration for controlling the display effect can be considered. Further, in the light emission control of the light emitting unit, for example, data corresponding to the content of the effect to be executed in the control device is read out, and the light emitting unit is made to emit light in a predetermined pattern by using the read data, thereby performing the light emitting effect. A control configuration is conceivable. Further, in the sound output control of the speaker, for example, the sound output effect is produced by reading the data corresponding to the content of the effect to be executed in the control device and using the read data to output a predetermined sound from the speaker. A control configuration is conceivable.

Here, it is preferable that there are many types of effects executed by the predetermined effect device, and there is room for improvement in the control method in increasing the types of effects.

<Characteristic F group>
Features F1. An output means (speaker unit 45, light emitting unit groups 71 to 73) capable of executing at least one of production and notification, and
In the information setting means (sound light side MPU 112), the control information group (sound output data, light emission data) used for operating the output means is set so as to be available when the output control of the output means is performed. A function to execute the sound output data read processing, a function to execute the light emission data read processing in the sound light side MPU 112), and
When the control execution timing is reached, the control information group uses the information corresponding to the control execution timing to execute the execution means for operating the output means (the function of executing the sound output control process in the sound light side MPU 112). , A function to execute light emission control processing in the sound light side MPU 112),
With
A plurality of storage areas (first sound output area 171 to 16th sound output area 186, base area 162a, interrupt area 162b, and notification area 162c) in which the control information group can be set are provided.
When the control information group is stored in a plurality of the storage areas, the execution means operates the output means by using some of the control information groups among the control information groups. A game machine characterized by being there.

According to the feature F1, in the situation where the output control of the output means is performed by using one control information group, it becomes necessary to perform the output control of the output means by using the other control information group. Also, the other control information group can be stored separately from the above-mentioned one control information group. This makes it possible for one output means to perform various operations depending on the situation. Further, when switching from one operation to the next operation, it is possible to leave a control information group corresponding to the former operation, so that the processing load when returning to the former operation can be reduced. From the above, it is possible to preferably use the output means.

Feature F2. The control information group includes designated information (pointer information) that enables identification of information corresponding to each control execution timing.
The executing means operates the output means in a manner corresponding to the control information group by reading information corresponding to the designated information from the control information group and using the information.
Of the control information groups stored in the plurality of storage areas, the designated information of the control information group that is not the target of use of the execution means is also the designated information of the control information group that is the target of use. Feature F1 characterized by having an update means for updating when an update is performed (a function of executing the process of step S1610 in the sound light side MPU 112, a function of executing the process of step S1814 in the sound light side MPU 112). The game machine described in.

According to the feature F2, when the use of the previously used control information group is stopped and the use of another control information group is started, the use of the other control information group is terminated and the other control information group is used earlier. When returning to the state of using the existing control information group, the output means performs the same operation as when the previously used control information group is continuously used at the return timing. As a result, even if an interrupt of another control information group is used, the output means can perform an operation according to the elapsed time.

In particular, in a configuration in which the operation of the output means is performed in association with another output means, it is possible to secure a correspondence relationship with the operation of the other output means.

Feature F3. The control information group stored in the plurality of storage areas has a priority when the output means is to be used.
When the control information group is stored in a plurality of the storage areas and a part of the control information group is used, the execution means targets the control information group having a high priority. The gaming machine according to the feature F1 or F2.

According to the feature F3, in the configuration in which a plurality of control information groups are stored at the same time, the control information group having a high priority is used, so that the operation in the output means can be made appropriate. Further, even when a plurality of control information groups are stored at the same time, it is possible to easily select the control information group to be used by comparing the priorities. Therefore, the process for selecting the control information group to be used can be simplified.

Feature F4. The gaming machine according to feature F3, wherein the plurality of storage areas are provided in correspondence with the priority.

According to the feature F4, since the priority is set in the unit of the storage area, it is not necessary to compare the priority for each control information group when selecting the control information group to be used. Therefore, the process for selecting the control information group to be used can be simplified.

Feature F5. The execution means is
A notification executing means (a function of executing the process of step S1602 in the sound light side MPU 112) that causes the output means to execute the notification when the control information group for the notification is the target of use, and
An effect executing means for executing an effect by the output means when the control information group for the effect is used (a function of executing the processes of steps S1604 and S1605 in the sound light side MPU 112). When,
With
The gaming machine according to feature F3 or F4, wherein the control information group for notification has a higher priority than the control information group for production.

According to the feature F5, the execution of the notification can be prioritized over the execution of the effect, and when the execution of the notification is prioritized, it is only necessary to compare the priorities, so that the processing can be simplified.

Feature F6. The execution means is
A base execution means (a function of executing the process of step S1605 in the sound light side MPU 112) that enables the base operation to be performed by the output means when the control information group for the base is used.
An interrupt execution means (a function of executing the process of step S1604 in the sound light side MPU 112) that causes the output means to perform an interrupt operation when the control information group for interruption is used.
With
The gaming machine according to any one of features F3 to F5, wherein the control information group for interruption has a higher priority than the control information group for the base.

According to the feature F6, the interrupt operation can be executed with priority over the base operation, and the design of the operation in the output means can be facilitated. Further, when the interrupt operation is prioritized, it is only necessary to compare the priorities, so that the processing can be simplified.

Feature F7. Of the plurality of storage areas, at least the specific storage area (interrupt area 162b) has a configuration in which a new control information group storage instruction can be generated in a situation where the control information group is already stored in the specific storage area. can be,
In the control information group stored in the specific storage area, a storage priority (light emitting side priority) for storing in the specific storage area is defined.
When a storage instruction for a new control information group is generated in a situation where the control information group is already stored in the specific storage area, the already stored control information group is said to be more than the new control information group. When the memory priority is high, the already stored control information group is maintained in the stored state without executing the storage process of the new control information group, and the new control information group is the said. When the storage priority is higher than the already stored control information group, the processing of the writing means (steps S1412 to S1416 in the sound light side MPU 112) for overwriting the new control information group in the specific storage area is executed. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F6, characterized in that it has a function of performing.

According to the feature F7, when determining the control information group to be stored in the specific storage area, it is only necessary to compare the storage priorities, so that the process of storing the control information group in the specific storage area can be simplified. It is planned.

Feature F8. It is provided with a privilege lottery execution means (a function of executing the processing of steps S301 and S403 in the main MPU 92) for executing the privilege lottery process of whether or not to grant the privilege to the player.
The execution means is
When the control information group for confirming the occurrence of the privilege is the target of use, the output means is used to execute the effect for confirming the occurrence of the privilege, and the confirmation execution means.
When the control information group for expecting privilege occurrence is targeted for use, the expected execution means for executing the effect for expecting privilege occurrence by the output means, and the expected execution means.
With
The gaming machine according to feature F7, wherein the control information group for confirming privilege generation has a higher memory priority than the control information group for expecting privilege generation.

According to the feature F8, it is possible to prioritize the execution of the effect for confirming the occurrence of the privilege. Further, when the execution of the effect for confirming the occurrence of the privilege is prioritized, it is only necessary to compare the storage priorities, so that the processing when the control information group is stored in the specific storage area can be simplified.

Feature F9. The effect means is a light emitting means,
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F8, wherein the control information group is for determining a light emitting pattern of the light emitting means during the predetermined period.

According to the feature F9, it is possible to obtain an excellent effect as described above regarding the light emission control of the light emitting means.

<Characteristic G group>
Features G1. Output means (light emitting groups 71 to 73) capable of executing at least one of production and notification, and
Information setting means for storing a control information group (light emitting data) used for operating the output means in a specific storage area (interrupt area 162b) so that it can be used when performing output control of the output means. (A function to execute the reading process of the light emission data in the sound light side MPU 112) and
When the control execution timing is reached, the execution means (sound-light side MPU 112) that operates the output means by using the information corresponding to the control execution timing in the control information group set in the specific storage area. Function to execute light emission control processing in
With
In the control information group stored in the specific storage area, a storage priority (light emitting side priority) for storing in the specific storage area is defined.
When a storage instruction for a new control information group is generated in a situation where the control information group is already stored in the specific storage area, the already stored control information group is said to be more than the new control information group. When the memory priority is high, the already stored control information group is maintained in the stored state without executing the storage process of the new control information group, and the new control information group is the said. When the storage priority is higher than the already stored control information group, the processing of the writing means (steps S1412 to S1416 in the sound light side MPU 112) for overwriting the new control information group in the specific storage area is executed. A game machine characterized by having a function to perform.

According to the feature G1, when it becomes necessary to control the output of the output means by using another control information group in the situation where the output control of the output means is performed by using one control information group, the other It is possible to switch to output control using the control information group of. This makes it possible for one output means to perform various operations depending on the situation.

Further, in a configuration in which a new control information group can be overwritten even when the control information group is already stored in the specific storage area, the control information group having a high storage priority is stored in the specific storage area. Therefore, it is possible to make the operation in the output means appropriate. Furthermore, when determining the control information group to be stored in the specific storage area, it is only necessary to compare the storage priorities, so that the process of storing the control information group in the specific storage area can be simplified. From the above, it is possible to preferably use the output means.

Feature G2. It is provided with a privilege lottery execution means (a function of executing the processing of steps S301 and S403 in the main MPU 92) for executing the privilege lottery process of whether or not to grant the privilege to the player.
The execution means is
When the control information group for confirming the occurrence of the privilege is the target of use, the output means is used to execute the effect for confirming the occurrence of the privilege, and the confirmation execution means.
When the control information group for expecting privilege occurrence is targeted for use, the expected execution means for executing the effect for expecting privilege occurrence by the output means, and the expected execution means.
With
The gaming machine according to feature G1, wherein the control information group for determining privilege generation has a higher memory priority than the control information group for expecting privilege generation.

According to the feature G2, it is possible to prioritize the execution of the effect for confirming the occurrence of the privilege. Further, when the execution of the effect for confirming the occurrence of the privilege is prioritized, it is only necessary to compare the storage priorities, so that the processing when the control information group is stored in the specific storage area can be simplified.

Feature G3. The effect means is a light emitting means,
The gaming machine according to feature G1 or G2, wherein the control information group is for determining a light emitting pattern of the light emitting means during the predetermined period.

According to the feature G3, it is possible to obtain an excellent effect as described above regarding the light emission control of the light emitting means.

The inventions of the feature F group and the feature G group can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of game machine. These game machines include a control device having a CPU, a ROM, or a CPU, a ROM, or the like in a single chip, and the control device causes a display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device) and a light emitting unit (for example, an LED). ), A configuration is known in which an effect or notification is executed by controlling an output device such as a speaker.

The control device controls the execution of the effect and the notification by reading the data that determines the content of the effect and the notification and executing the processing corresponding to the read data. Specifically, in the display control of the display device, for example, data corresponding to the content of the effect or notification to be executed by the control device is read, and the read data is used to cause the display device to perform a predetermined display. Therefore, a configuration for controlling the display effect and the execution of the notification display can be considered. Further, in the light emission control of the light emitting unit, for example, data corresponding to the content of the effect or notification to be executed in the control device is read out, and the light emitting unit is made to emit light in a predetermined pattern by using the read data to emit light. A configuration that controls the execution of light emission for production and notification can be considered. Further, in the sound output control of the speaker, for example, data corresponding to the content of the effect or notification to be executed in the control device is read out, and the read data is used to output a predetermined sound from the speaker to output the sound. A configuration that controls the execution of production and sound output for notification can be considered.

Here, a suitable control method is required for the execution of the effect and the notification.

<Characteristic H group>
Features H1. A plurality of drive means (curtain plate drive units 56a, 56b) used for driving the movable effect means (curtain plate movable object 52), and
A plurality of position detecting means (adjustment position sensors 58a, 58b) provided corresponding to each driving means and used for detecting that the driving target of each driving means is arranged at a corresponding predetermined position, and
Each of these position detecting means has a predetermined operation (third) corresponding to each of the driving targets, provided that it is detected that the driving target of each driving means is arranged at the corresponding predetermined position. A drive control means (a function of executing the processes of step S2003, step S2005, step S2007, step S2009, and step S2010 in the sound light side MPU 112) that drives and controls each of the drive means so as to perform a stepwise operation or a return operation).
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature H1, the timing for causing each drive target to perform a predetermined operation is not specified by measuring the time, but the predetermined operation is performed after it is detected that each drive target is arranged at a predetermined position. Because of this configuration, it is possible to synchronize the operations of each drive target when executing a predetermined operation. Therefore, it is possible to suitably control the execution of the effect using a movable object.

Feature H2. The drive control means
A first drive control means (a function of executing the process of step S2005 in the sound light side MPU 112) that drives and controls each of the drive means so that a specific operation corresponding to each of the drive targets is performed.
It is at least one that the plurality of position detecting means detects that each of the driving targets is arranged at the corresponding predetermined position after the corresponding specific operation is performed on each of the driving targets. As a condition, a second drive control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S2009 and S2010 in the sound light side MPU 112) that drives and controls each of the drive means so that each drive target performs the corresponding predetermined operation.
The gaming machine according to the feature H1, wherein the gaming machine is characterized by the above.

According to the feature H2, when the predetermined operation is performed after the specific operation is performed in each drive target, the start timing of the predetermined operation can be synchronized.

Feature H3. The drive control means is an intermediate drive control that drives and controls each of the drive means so that each of the drive targets is arranged at the corresponding predetermined position after the corresponding specific operation is performed on each of the drive targets. The gaming machine according to feature H2, which comprises means (a function of executing the process of step S2007 in the sound light side MPU 112).

According to the feature H3, even after the specific operation, after each drive target is arranged at a predetermined position, the predetermined operation can be started in synchronization with each of the drive targets.

Feature H4. Each of the drive targets is configured to operate by being displaced from the initial position to the effect position side when the effect is executed.
The gaming machine according to feature H3, wherein the predetermined position exists on the initial position side with respect to the position when the specific operation is performed.

According to the feature H4, in order to start a predetermined operation in synchronization with each drive target, in a configuration in which the predetermined operation is started after each drive target is arranged at a predetermined position, each drive target is arranged at a predetermined position. It is possible to make the player recognize that the operation is a return operation to the initial position. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize the operation for arranging the predetermined position without discomfort, and it is possible to provide the player with unexpectedness when the predetermined operation is performed.

Feature H5. The drive control means is a return control means (return control means) that drives and controls each of the drive means so that each of the drive means is arranged at the corresponding initial position after each drive target is arranged at the corresponding predetermined position. The gaming machine according to feature H3 or H4, which comprises a function of executing the process of step S2010 in the sound light side MPU 112).

According to the feature H5, even when returning to the initial position without performing the predetermined operation after the specific operation, the return to the initial position is started after each drive target is arranged at the predetermined position, so that the initial position is started. It is possible to synchronize the return operation to the position in each drive target. In addition, the player pays attention to whether the return operation to the initial position is performed after being placed in the predetermined position or whether the predetermined operation occurs, and the player's attention to the movable effect means is increased. It becomes possible.

Feature H6. Each of the drive targets is configured to operate by being displaced from the initial position to the effect position side when the effect is executed.
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H5, wherein the predetermined position is located closer to the effect position side than the initial position.

According to the feature H6, when each drive target is arranged at a predetermined position in order to start the predetermined operation in synchronization, it is not necessary to return to the initial position. This makes it possible to suppress the amount of displacement for arranging at a predetermined position.

Feature H7. On condition that at least one condition is that each of the position detecting means detects that the driving target of each driving means is arranged at the corresponding predetermined position, the effect corresponding to the predetermined operation is the effect executing means (design). Display device 31, speaker unit 45, various light emitting units groups 71 to 73) are provided with effect control means (function for executing light emission control processing and sound output control processing in the sound light side MPU 112, display side MPU 122). The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H6, characterized in that it is provided.

According to the feature H7, it is possible to perform the corresponding effect in the effect means in synchronization with the start of the predetermined operation.

Feature H8. It is a configuration in which the effect by the movable effect means can be performed in the middle of the first effect range.
The effect control means
In the first effect range, means for controlling the effect execution means (a function of executing task processing on the display side MPU 122) so that the effect content changes with the passage of time, and
In the first effect range, after it is detected in each of the position detecting means that the drive target of each drive means is arranged at the corresponding predetermined position, the effect corresponding to the predetermined operation is performed. A means for controlling the effect executing means so as to be performed (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S3401 in the display side MPU 122 and executing the process of step S3402).
The gaming machine according to the feature H7, which is characterized by having.

According to the feature H8, while the execution control of the effect in the effect execution means is basically performed according to the elapsed time, the effect corresponding to the predetermined operation can be easily synchronized with the operation of the movable effect means.

Feature H9. The effect control means is on standby until at least each of the position detection means detects that the drive target of each drive means is arranged at the corresponding predetermined position in the first effect range. The feature H8 is characterized by having a means for controlling the effect executing means (a function of making a negative determination in step S3401 in the display side MPU 122 and executing the process of step S3403) so that the effect of the above is performed. Described gaming machine.

According to the feature H9, since the effect for standby is performed by the effect executing means even during the period of waiting until the predetermined operation is started in the movable effect means, the player feels uncomfortable with the effect in the effect execution means. It becomes difficult.

Feature H10. The first effect execution control means (sound light side MPU 112) having the drive control means, and
A second effect execution control means (display side MPU 122) having the effect control means,
With
The first effect execution control means starts drive control of each of the drive means when the second effect execution control means transmits transmission information corresponding to the need to start drive control.
The first control means corresponds to the effect control means, subject to at least one condition that each of the position detection means detects that the drive target of each drive means is arranged at the corresponding predetermined position. The gaming machine according to any one of features H7 to H9, characterized in that the effect executing means is controlled so that an effect corresponding to the predetermined operation is performed when the transmitted information is transmitted.

According to the feature H10, while it is possible to execute the effect in the movable effect means according to the progress of the effect in the effect execution means, when a predetermined operation is performed in the movable effect means, the effect in the effect execution means is synchronized with it. It becomes possible to make it.

Features H11. The effect executing means is a display means having a display unit, and is
The game according to any one of features H7 to H10, wherein the movable effect means includes a range in which the operating range faces the display unit from the direction in which the display unit faces. Machine.

According to the feature H11, it is possible to obtain an excellent effect as described above in a configuration in which a predetermined operation is performed by the movable effect means in association with the display effect on the display unit.

Feature H12. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H11, wherein the movable effect means is a movable object that operates integrally, and each drive target is connected to the movable object.

According to the feature H12, it is possible to exert an excellent effect as described above in a movable object that operates integrally.

The invention of the feature H group can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of game machine. As these gaming machines, those provided with movable objects that are driven and operated by a driving device such as a solenoid or a rotary motor are known.

For example, as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed based on the game ball entering the ball entry portion provided in the game area, a variable display of a pattern is performed on the display surface of the display device, and the winning result is obtained by the lottery. In the case of, the combination of specific patterns and the like is finally stopped and displayed on the display surface, and it is known that the player shifts to a special gaming state which is advantageous for the player. Then, when the state shifts to the special gaming state, for example, the opening and closing of the ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the entry into the ball entry device. In this case, for example, when a movable object operates in a situation where a variable display of a pattern is performed, a transition to a special game state occurs with a relatively high probability after that. I try to enhance the interest of the game.

Here, there is a demand for a configuration that enables the execution control of an effect using a movable object to be suitably performed, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature I group>
Feature I1. The first effect execution control means (sound light side MPU 112) that controls the first effect execution means (curtain plate movable object 52), and
A second effect execution control means (display side MPU 122) that controls the second effect execution means (design display device 31), and
With
The first effect execution control means is a corresponding information setting means (sound) that sets information corresponding to the effect content of the first effect execution means when it becomes a predetermined effect content or becomes a predetermined effect content. The function of executing the process of step S3309 in the optical side MPU 112) is provided.
The second effect execution control means is such that when the corresponding information is set by the corresponding information setting means, the effect content of the second effect execution means becomes a specific effect content. A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature I1, when the effect content of the first effect execution means becomes a predetermined effect content or becomes a predetermined effect content, the information corresponding to the setting is set, and the second effect execution means responds to the setting. The production content of is a specific production content. As a result, it becomes easy to synchronize a predetermined effect content in the first effect execution means with a specific effect content in the second effect execution means. Therefore, it is possible to preferably perform an effect using a plurality of types of effect execution means.

Feature I2. In the middle of the first effect range, the effect content of the first effect execution means can be a predetermined effect content.
The second effect execution control means is
In the first effect range, a means for controlling the second effect execution means (a function of executing task processing on the display side MPU 122) so that the effect content changes with the passage of time, and
In the first effect range, after the corresponding information is set by the corresponding information setting means, the means for controlling the second effect executing means (step on the display side MPU 122) so as to have the specific effect content. A function of making an affirmative judgment in S3401 and executing the process of step S3402)
The gaming machine according to the feature I1, wherein the gaming machine is characterized by the above.

According to the feature I2, while the execution control of the effect in the second effect execution means is basically performed according to the elapsed time, the predetermined effect content in the first effect execution means and the specific effect in the second effect execution means are performed. It becomes easier to synchronize with the contents.

Feature I3. The second effect execution control means provides the second effect execution means so that a standby effect is performed in the first effect range until at least the corresponding information is set by the corresponding information setting means. The gaming machine according to feature I2, characterized in that it includes means for controlling (a function of making a negative determination in step S3401 on the display side MPU 122 and executing the process of step S3403).

According to the feature I3, even during the period of waiting until the information is set by the corresponding information setting means, the second effect executing means performs the standby effect, so that the effect of the second effect executing means is played. It becomes difficult for people to feel uncomfortable.

Feature I4. The first effect execution control means corresponds to the transmission information when the second effect execution control means transmits transmission information corresponding to the fact that the effect execution control of the first effect execution means should be started. The execution control of the effect in the first effect execution means is started so that the effect according to the mode is performed.
In the second effect execution control means, when the effect content of the first effect execution means becomes a predetermined effect content or becomes a predetermined effect content, the corresponding information setting means transmits the transmission information corresponding to the predetermined effect content. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I3, wherein the effect content of the second effect execution means is such that the effect content is a specific effect content.

According to the feature I4, the predetermined effect content in the first effect execution means and the second effect execution means can be executed while the effect can be executed in the first effect execution means according to the progress content of the effect in the second effect execution means. It becomes easy to synchronize with the specific production content in.

Feature I5. The first effect executing means is a movable effect means, and is
The corresponding information setting means sets the corresponding information when the position detecting means (adjustment position sensors 58a, 58b) detects that the movable effect means has reached a predetermined position. Characteristic The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I4.

According to the feature I5, when it is detected by the position detecting means that the movable effect means has reached a predetermined position, the effect content of the second effect execution means is set as a specific effect content, so that the movable effect means operates. Even if there is a deviation or the like, it is possible to set the effect content of the second effect execution means to a specific effect content in synchronization with the predetermined operation being performed by the movable effect means.

Feature I6. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I5, wherein the first effect executing means and the second effect executing means are different types of effect executing means.

According to the feature I6, in a configuration in which the first effect executing means and the second effect executing means are different types of effect executing means, it is possible to obtain an excellent effect as described above.

Feature I7. The second effect executing means is a display means having a display unit, and is a display means.
Any one of features I1 to I6, wherein the first effect executing means is a movable effect means whose operating range includes a range facing the display unit from the direction in which the display unit faces. The gaming machine described in.

According to the feature I7, in a configuration in which a predetermined operation is performed by the movable effect means in association with the display effect on the display unit, it is possible to obtain an excellent effect as described above.

The invention of the feature I group can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of game machine. As these gaming machines, there is known a configuration in which a plurality of types of production devices are used to produce a production.

For example, a configuration is known in which a display device such as a liquid crystal display device and a speaker are used at least to perform an effect. In this case, a sound corresponding to the display content on the display device is output from the speaker. Further, for example, a configuration is known in which a light emitting unit such as an LED and a speaker are used at least to produce an effect. In this case, the light emitting unit is controlled by a lighting pattern according to the content of the sound output from the speaker. .. Further, for example, a configuration is known in which the display device and the movable object are used at least to perform an effect. In this case, the operation of the movable object is started according to the display content on the display device.

In a configuration in which a plurality of types of effect devices are used to produce an effect as in the above example, a configuration capable of performing good control is required.

<Characteristic J group>
Features J1. The effect executing means (disk movable objects 62a, 62b) that operate so as to be in a predetermined operation state at least once for one execution of the operation times, and
A start control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S2603, S2704, and S2705 in the sound light side MPU 112) that executes the start control of the effect executing means so as to start the operation, and
In the situation where the effect executing means is operating, the stop information setting means for setting the stop information (stop command flag) (the function of executing the process of step S1212 in the sound light side MPU 112) and
When the stop information is set, the stop control means for stopping the operation of the effect execution means after the effect execution means has reached the predetermined operation state (in the first embodiment, step S2615 in the sound light side MPU 112). , The function of executing the processing of step S3005 and step S3010, and in the second embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S3208, step S3217 and step S3220 in the sound light side MPU 112).
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature J1, since the effect executing means is stopped after reaching a predetermined operation state, it is possible to unify the mode when the effect executing means is stopped. Further, the control modes for operating the effect executing means are standardized into each mode of start control, stop information setting control, and stop control when a predetermined operation state is reached after the stop information setting control. Therefore, the processing can be simplified when the operation period of the effect executing means is diversified. From the above, it is possible to suitably control the execution of the effect.

Feature J2. As the timing at which the stop information is set by the stop information setting means, there are a plurality of types of timings such that the elapsed period from the execution of the start control by the start control means is different.
The plurality of types of timings include the timing at which the stop information is set when the operation times of the effect executing means are the specific number of times, and the stop information when the number of times is different from the specific number of times. The gaming machine according to feature J1, characterized in that the timing to be set is included.

According to the feature J2, it is possible to diversify the number of operations of the effect executing means while enabling the operation to be stopped after the predetermined operation state is reached only by adjusting the setting timing of the stop information.

Features J3. The effect executing means is a movable effect means capable of simultaneously executing a first operation (rotational operation) and a second operation (sliding operation) different from the first operation.
The operation in which the operation times occur is configured to be performed as the first operation.
Depending on the setting timing of the stop information, there may be a case where the first operation is stopped before the second operation and a case where the first operation is stopped after the second operation. The gaming machine according to feature J1 or J2, which is characterized by having a configuration.

According to the feature J3, it is possible to diversify the operation mode of the effect executing means only by adjusting the setting timing of the stop information.

Features J4. The stop information setting means is characterized in that the stop information is set according to the progress of the effect in another effect execution means (symbol display device 31) different from the effect execution means. The gaming machine according to any one of J3.

According to the feature J4, it is possible to perform the production in the production execution means so as to be in time with the progress content of the production in the other production means, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the production. In this case, by providing the configuration of the above-mentioned feature J1, even if the operation of the effect executing means is stopped according to the progress of the effect in another effect executing means, the effect executing means has a predetermined operation. Since the operation is stopped after the state is reached, it is possible to unify the mode when the effect executing means is stopped.

Feature J5. The effect executing means is a movable effect means,
The predetermined operating state is described in any one of features J1 to J4, which is a state in which the movable effect means is detected by the predetermined detecting means (rotation initial position sensors 69a, 69b). Gaming machine.

According to the feature J5, since the operation of the movable effect means is stopped after the state is detected by the predetermined detection means, it is possible to unify the appearance of the movable effect means at the time of non-operation and the movable effect. It is possible to unify the mode at the start of operation of the means.

Features J6. The stop control means
An operation position grasping means for grasping the operation position of the movable effect means (a function of executing the processes of step S2708, step S2709, step S2713, step S2714, step S2906 and step S2907 in the sound light side MPU 112).
When the stop information is set, if the grasping result of the operation position grasping means is a predetermined grasping result, even if the movable effect means is detected by the predetermined detecting means, the operation of the movable effect means is performed. A limiting means (a function of executing the process of step S2802 in the sound light side MPU 112) and a limiting state that does not stop.
The gaming machine according to the feature J5, which is characterized by having.

According to the feature J6, when the stop information is set when the grasping result of the operation position grasping means is a predetermined grasping result, even if the movable effect means is detected by the predetermined detecting means, the movable effect means. Is not stopped. As a result, when it is inconvenient to stop the movable effect means, it is possible to avoid stopping the movable effect means, and it is possible to stop the movable effect means at a preferable timing.

Feature J7. A stepping motor (disk rotation drive units 67a, 67b) for driving the movable effect means is provided.
The gaming machine according to feature J6, wherein the operating position grasping means grasps the operating position of the movable effect means by utilizing the number of steps of the stepping motor.

According to the feature J7, the processing configuration for grasping the operating position of the movable effect means can be simplified.

Feature J8. The predetermined grasping result of the operating position grasping means exists in a limited range in which the operating position of the movable effect means is a part range of the entire operating position and includes a range detected by the predetermined detecting means. The gaming machine according to feature J6 or J7, which is characterized in that it is a grasping result corresponding to what is being done.

When the stop information is set in a situation where the movable effect means is detected by the predetermined detection means, or when the movable effect means is detected by the predetermined detection means immediately after the stop information is set, the movable effect means is used. If an attempt is made to stop the movable effect means, the stopping mode of the movable effect means may be unfavorable. On the other hand, according to the feature J8, when the stop information is set in such a situation, the stop of the movable effect means is restricted. Therefore, the stop mode of the movable effect means is preferable. It becomes possible to do.

Features J9. When the limit state is reached, the stop control means is detected by the predetermined detection means after the movable effect means exceeds the limit range when the stop information is set. The gaming machine according to feature J8, which is provided with a restriction releasing means (a function of executing the process of step S2910 in the sound light side MPU 112) for releasing the restricted state.

According to the feature J9, even if the movable effect means is restricted from being stopped, it is within the range of one operation, so that the operation period of the movable effect means does not become longer than necessary. However, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

Features J10. A stepping motor (disk rotation drive units 67a, 67b) for driving the movable effect means is provided.
The operating position grasping means grasps the operating position of the movable effect means by utilizing the number of steps of the stepping motor.
The restriction release means is limited when the number of steps grasped by the operation position grasping means becomes the number of restriction release steps (the number of steps for determining stop release) after exceeding the restriction range. The gaming machine according to feature J9, which is characterized in that the state is released.

According to the feature J10, the processing configuration for grasping the operating position of the movable effect means and the processing configuration for releasing the restriction on the stop of the movable effect means can be simplified.

Features J11. The stop control means
A detection result confirmation means for executing a detection result confirmation process for confirming the detection result of the predetermined detection means (a function for executing the processes of steps S3102 and S3104 in the sound light side MPU 112) and
The history storage execution means (sound-light side MPU 112) that stores the confirmation result of the detection result confirmation means in the history storage means (each area 164a to 164f of the movable object data area 164) at least until the next processing time of the detection result confirmation process. (Function to execute the processing of step S3101 and step S3103) in
When the history information stored in the history storage means is information corresponding to the stop position of the movable effect means, the stop means for stopping the movable effect means (step S3208 in the sound light side MPU 112, step S3208, step. (Function to execute the processing of S3217 and step S3220) and
The gaming machine according to any one of J5 to J10, characterized in that

According to the feature J11, the stop control of the movable effect means is executed according to the content of the history information stored in the history storage means at the timing when the stop information is set. Therefore, when the stop information is set, it is predetermined. It is possible to execute the stop control of the movable effect means without waiting for the execution of the confirmation process for the detection result of the detection means.

Features J12. The stop control means includes a stop information confirmation means (a function of executing the process of step S3202 in the sound light side MPU 112) that executes a stop information confirmation process for confirming whether or not the stop information is set.
The gaming machine according to feature J11, wherein the detection result confirmation means executes the detection result confirmation process at least once before the stop information confirmation process is executed once.

According to the feature J12, a time lag is less likely to occur between the history information of the history storage means at the timing when the stop information confirmation process is executed and the detection result of the predetermined detection means at that time, and the history information of the history storage means can be stored. In the configuration in which the movable effect means is stopped with reference to the reference, it becomes easy to perform stop control according to the operation position of the movable effect means.

Feature J13. The history storage means includes a plurality of storage areas that can store the confirmation results of the detection result confirmation means.
The stop means is stored in the history storage means when a plurality of predetermined detection results corresponding to the detection of the movable effect means by the predetermined detection means are continuously stored in the plurality of storage areas. The gaming machine according to feature J11 or J12, wherein the stored history information is determined to be information corresponding to the stop position of the movable effect means, and the movable effect means is stopped. ..

According to the feature J13, even when an abnormality such as noise occurs in the detection result of the predetermined detection means, the stop control of the movable effect means can be accurately performed.

Feature J14. The movable effect means includes a first movable effect means (left disk movable object 62a) and a second movable effect means (right disk movable object 62b).
The predetermined detecting means is provided so as to be able to detect that the first movable effect means has reached a predetermined initial position and to detect that the second movable effect means has reached a predetermined initial position.
When the stop information is set, the stop control means causes at least the first movable effect means and the second movable effect means to be stopped synchronously at corresponding predetermined initial positions. (In the first embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2718 in the sound-light side MPU 112, and in the second embodiment, the function of executing the sensor monitoring process in the sound-light side MPU 112) is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of features J5 to J13.

According to the feature J14, in a configuration provided with a plurality of movable effect means, these movable effect means can be synchronously stopped, and the operations of the plurality of movable effect means can be interleaved.

Feature J15. The means for stopping synchronization is
The first operation position grasping means (function of executing the processing of step S2708, step S2713 and step S2906 in the sound light side MPU 112) for grasping the operation position of the first movable effect means.
A second operation position grasping means for grasping the operation position of the second movable effect means (a function of executing the processes of step S2709, step S2714, and step S2907 in the sound light side MPU 112) and
When the stop information is set, at least when the grasping result of the first operating position grasping means or the second operating position grasping means is a predetermined grasping result, or at least the first operating position grasping means and the first (2) When both grasping results of the operation position grasping means are predetermined grasping results, the operation of the first movable effect means is not stopped even if the first movable effect means is detected by the predetermined detection means. The limiting means (step S2802 in the sound light side MPU 112) is set to a limiting state in which the operation of the second movable effect means is not stopped even if the second movable effect means is detected by the predetermined detection means. Function to execute processing) and
The gaming machine according to the feature J14, which is characterized in that it is provided with.

According to the feature J15, when the grasping result of any of the operating position grasping means or each operating position grasping means is a predetermined grasping result, each movable effect means by the predetermined detecting means in the situation where the stop information is set. Is detected, the movable effect means is not stopped. As a result, if the stop control of each movable effect means is executed, it is possible to avoid the stop of each movable effect means in a situation where the movable effect means cannot be stopped in synchronization. Therefore, it becomes easy to stop each movable effect means in a synchronized state.

Feature J16. A first stepping motor (disk rotation drive unit 67a) for driving the first movable effect means and a second stepping motor (disk rotation drive unit 67b) for driving the second movable effect means are provided.
The first operating position grasping means grasps the operating position of the first movable effect means by utilizing the number of steps of the first stepping motor.
The gaming machine according to feature J15, wherein the second operating position grasping means grasps the operating position of the second movable effect means by utilizing the number of steps of the second stepping motor.

According to the feature J16, the processing configuration for grasping the operating position of each movable effect means can be simplified.

Feature J17. The predetermined grasping result of the first operating position grasping means includes a range in which the operating position of the first movable effect means is a part of the entire operating position and is detected by the predetermined detecting means. It is a grasping result corresponding to the existence in the first restriction range,
The predetermined grasping result of the second operating position grasping means includes a range in which the operating position of the second movable effect means is a part of the entire operating position and is detected by the predetermined detecting means. The gaming machine according to feature J15 or J16, which is a grasping result corresponding to the presence in the second limited range.

When the stop information is set in a situation where the movable effect means is detected by the predetermined detection means, or when the movable effect means is detected by the predetermined detection means immediately after the stop information is set, each movable effect means is set. If an attempt is made to stop the movable effect means, the stop mode in which the movable effect means are synchronized may be unfavorable. On the other hand, according to the feature J17, when the stop information is set in such a situation, the stop of each movable effect means is restricted, so that it is easy to stop each movable effect means in a synchronized state. Become.

Features J18. When the restricted state is reached, at least both the first movable effect means and the second movable effect means exceed the restricted range when the stop information is set. The feature J17 is characterized in that it is provided with a restriction releasing means (a function of executing the process of step S2910 in the sound light side MPU 112) before the next detection by the predetermined detecting means. The gaming machine described in.

According to the feature J18, even if each movable effect means is restricted from being stopped, it is within the range of one operation, so that the operation period of each movable effect means does not become longer than necessary. While doing so, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

Features J19. A first stepping motor (disk rotation drive unit 67a) for driving the first movable effect means and a second stepping motor (disk rotation drive unit 67b) for driving the second movable effect means are provided.
The first operating position grasping means grasps the operating position of the first movable effect means by utilizing the number of steps of the first stepping motor.
The second operating position grasping means grasps the operating position of the second movable effect means by utilizing the number of steps of the second stepping motor.
The restriction releasing means is used when at least the number of steps grasped by the first operating position grasping means and the second operating position grasping means becomes the number of limiting releasing steps after exceeding the limiting range. The gaming machine according to feature J18, wherein the restricted state is released.

According to the feature J19, the processing configuration for grasping the operating position of each movable effect means and the processing configuration for releasing the restriction on the stop of each movable effect means can be simplified.

Features J20. The means for stopping synchronization is
The first detection result confirmation means (function of executing the process of step S3102 in the sound light side MPU 112) for executing the first detection result confirmation process for confirming the detection result of the predetermined detection means for the first movable effect means, and
A second detection result confirmation means (a function of executing the process of step S3104 in the sound light side MPU 112) for executing a second detection result confirmation process for confirming the detection result of the predetermined detection means for the second movable effect means, and
First history storage execution in which the confirmation result of the first detection result confirmation means is stored in the first history storage means (each area 164a to 164c of the movable object data area 164) at least until the next processing time of the first confirmation process. Means (a function of executing the process of step S3101 in the sound light side MPU 112) and
Second history storage execution in which the confirmation result of the second detection result confirmation means is stored in the second history storage means (each area 164d to 164f of the movable object data area 164) at least until the next processing time of the second confirmation process. Means (a function of executing the process of step S3103 in the sound light side MPU 112) and
Stop means for controlling the stop of each movable effect means according to the content of the history information stored in each history storage means (function of executing the processes of steps S3208, S3217, and S3220 in the sound light side MPU 112). When,
The gaming machine according to any one of features J14 to J19.

According to the feature J20, when the stop information is set, the stop control of each movable effect means is executed according to the content of the history information stored in each history storage means at the timing when the stop information is set. Can execute the stop control of each movable effect means without waiting for the execution of the confirmation process for the detection result of the predetermined detection means. This makes it easier to stop each movable effect means in a synchronized state.

Features J21. In the stop means, both the history information stored in the first history storage means and the history information stored in the second history storage means correspond to the stop position of the corresponding movable effect means. The gaming machine according to the feature J20, wherein both the first movable effect means and the second movable effect means are stopped in the case of.

According to the feature J21, in a state where both of the movable effect means are detected by the predetermined detection means, it is possible to stop the movable effect means in a synchronized state.

The invention of the feature J group can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of game machine. As these gaming machines, a configuration is known in which a production device is used to produce a production.

For example, there is known a configuration in which a display effect is performed by a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. Further, for example, there is known a configuration in which a light emitting unit such as an LED produces light according to a predetermined light emitting pattern. Further, for example, there is known a configuration in which a movable object is used to perform a predetermined operation to produce an effect.

Here, there is a demand for a configuration that enables the execution control of the effect to be suitably performed, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic K group>
Features K1. Movable effect means (disk movable objects 62a, 62b) that operate so as to be detected at least once by predetermined detection means (rotation initial position sensors 69a, 69b) for one execution of the operation time.
A start control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S2704 and S2705 in the sound light side MPU 112) that executes the start control of the movable effect means so as to start the operation, and
In the situation where the movable effect means is operating, the stop information setting means for setting the stop information (stop command flag) (the function of executing the process of step S1212 in the sound light side MPU 112) and
When the stop information is set, the stop control means (step S3208, step S3217 and step S3220 in the sound light side MPU 112) for stopping the operation of the movable effect means after the movable effect means is detected by the predetermined detection means. (Function to execute the processing of) and
With
The stop control means
A detection result confirmation means for executing a detection result confirmation process for confirming the detection result of the predetermined detection means (a function for executing the processes of steps S3102 and S3104 in the sound light side MPU 112) and
The history storage executing means (step in the sound light side MPU 112) stores the confirmation result of the detection result confirmation means in the history storage means (each area 164a to 164f of the movable object data area 164) until at least the next processing time of the confirmation process. (Function to execute the processing of S3101 and step S3103) and
When the history information stored in the history storage means is information corresponding to the stop position of the movable effect means, the stop means for stopping the movable effect means (step S3208 in the sound light side MPU 112, step S3208, step. (Function to execute the processing of S3217 and step S3220) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature K1, since the operation of the movable effect means is stopped after being detected by the predetermined detection means, it is possible to unify the appearance of the movable effect means at the time of non-operation and the movable effect. It is possible to unify the mode at the start of operation of the means. Further, the control modes for operating the movable effect means are standardized into each mode of start control, stop information setting control, and stop control when detected by a predetermined detection means after the stop information setting control. Therefore, the processing can be simplified when the operation period of the movable effect means is diversified. Furthermore, since the stop control of the movable effect means is executed according to the content of the history information stored in the history storage means at the timing when the stop information is set, when the stop information is set, the predetermined detection means It is possible to execute the stop control of the movable effect means without waiting for the execution of the confirmation process for the detection result. From the above, it is possible to suitably perform the execution control of the effect using the movable effect means.

Feature K2. The stop control means includes a stop information confirmation means (a function of executing the process of step S3202 in the sound light side MPU 112) that executes a stop information confirmation process for confirming whether or not the stop information is set.
The gaming machine according to feature K1, wherein the detection result confirmation means executes the detection result confirmation process at least once before the stop information confirmation process is executed once.

According to the feature K2, a time lag is less likely to occur between the history information of the history storage means at the timing when the stop information confirmation process is executed and the detection result of the predetermined detection means at that time, and the history information of the history storage means can be stored. In the configuration in which the movable effect means is stopped with reference to the reference, it becomes easy to perform stop control according to the operation position of the movable effect means.

Feature K3. The history storage means includes a plurality of storage areas that can store the confirmation results of the detection result confirmation means.
The stop means is stored in the history storage means when a plurality of predetermined detection results corresponding to the detection of the movable effect means by the predetermined detection means are continuously stored in the plurality of storage areas. The gaming machine according to feature K1 or K2, wherein the stored history information is determined to be information corresponding to the stop position of the movable effect means, and the movable effect means is stopped. ..

According to the feature K3, even when an abnormality such as noise occurs in the detection result of the predetermined detection means, the stop control of the movable effect means can be accurately performed.

Features K4. The movable effect means includes a first movable effect means (left disk movable object 62a) and a second movable effect means (right disk movable object 62b).
The predetermined detecting means is provided so as to be able to detect that the first movable effect means has reached a predetermined initial position and to detect that the second movable effect means has reached a predetermined initial position.
The detection result confirmation means
The first detection result confirmation means (function of executing the process of step S3102 in the sound light side MPU 112) for executing the first detection result confirmation process for confirming the detection result of the predetermined detection means for the first movable effect means, and
A second detection result confirmation means (a function of executing the process of step S3104 in the sound light side MPU 112) for executing a second detection result confirmation process for confirming the detection result of the predetermined detection means for the second movable effect means, and
With
The history storage execution means is
First history storage execution in which the confirmation result of the first detection result confirmation means is stored in the first history storage means (each area 164a to 164c of the movable object data area 164) at least until the next processing time of the first confirmation process. Means (a function of executing the process of step S3101 in the sound light side MPU 112) and
Second history storage execution in which the confirmation result of the second detection result confirmation means is stored in the second history storage means (each area 164d to 164f of the movable object data area 164) at least until the next processing time of the second confirmation process. Means (a function of executing the process of step S3103 in the sound light side MPU 112) and
With
The stop means according to any one of features K1 to K3, characterized in that the stop means controls the stop of each movable effect means according to the content of the history information stored in each of the history storage means. Gaming machine.

According to the feature K4, when the stop information is set, the stop control of each movable effect means is executed according to the content of the history information stored in each history storage means at the timing when the stop information is set. Can execute the stop control of each movable effect means without waiting for the execution of the confirmation process for the detection result of the predetermined detection means. This makes it easier to stop each movable effect means in a synchronized state.

Feature K5. In the stop means, both the history information stored in the first history storage means and the history information stored in the second history storage means correspond to the stop position of the corresponding movable effect means. The gaming machine according to the feature K4, wherein both the first movable effect means and the second movable effect means are stopped in the case of.

According to the feature K5, in a state where both of the movable effect means are detected by the predetermined detection means, it is possible to stop the movable effect means in a synchronized state.

<Characteristic L group>
Feature L1. Movable effect means (disk movable objects 62a, 62b) that operate so as to be detected at least once by predetermined detection means (rotation initial position sensors 69a, 69b) for one execution of the operation time.
A start control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S2603, S2704, and S2705 in the sound light side MPU 112) that executes the start control of the movable effect means so as to start the operation, and
In the situation where the movable effect means is operating, the stop information setting means for setting the stop information (stop command flag) (the function of executing the process of step S1212 in the sound light side MPU 112) and
When the stop information is set, the stop control means (step S2615, step S3005 and step S3010 in the sound light side MPU 112) for stopping the operation of the movable effect means after the movable effect means is detected by the predetermined detection means. (Function to execute the processing of) and
With
The stop control means
An operation position grasping means for grasping the operation position of the movable effect means (a function of executing the processes of step S2708, step S2709, step S2713, step S2714, step S2906 and step S2907 in the sound light side MPU 112).
When the stop information is set, if the grasping result of the operation position grasping means is a predetermined grasping result, even if the movable effect means is detected by the predetermined detecting means, the operation of the movable effect means is performed. A limiting means (a function of executing the process of step S2802 in the sound light side MPU 112) and a limiting state that does not stop.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature L1, since the operation of the movable effect means is stopped after being detected by the predetermined detection means, it is possible to unify the appearance of the movable effect means at the time of non-operation and the movable effect. It is possible to unify the mode at the start of operation of the means. In this case, if the grasping result of the operation position grasping means is a predetermined grasping result, even if the movable effect means is detected by the predetermined detecting means in the situation where the stop information is set, the movable effect means is Not stopped. As a result, when it is inconvenient to stop the movable effect means, it is possible to avoid stopping the movable effect means, and it is possible to stop the movable effect means at a preferable timing. From the above, it is possible to suitably perform the execution control of the effect using the movable effect means.

Feature L2. A stepping motor (disk rotation drive units 67a, 67b) for driving the movable effect means is provided.
The gaming machine according to feature L1, wherein the operating position grasping means grasps the operating position of the movable effect means by utilizing the number of steps of the stepping motor.

According to the feature L2, the processing configuration for grasping the operating position of the movable effect means can be simplified.

Feature L3. The predetermined grasping result of the operating position grasping means exists in a limited range in which the operating position of the movable effect means is a part range of the entire operating position and includes a range detected by the predetermined detecting means. The gaming machine according to feature L1 or L2, which is characterized in that it is a grasping result corresponding to what is being done.

When the stop information is set in a situation where the movable effect means is detected by the predetermined detection means, or when the movable effect means is detected by the predetermined detection means immediately after the stop information is set, the movable effect means is used. If an attempt is made to stop the movable effect means, the stopping mode of the movable effect means may be unfavorable. On the other hand, according to the feature L3, when the stop information is set in such a situation, the stop of the movable effect means is restricted. Therefore, the stop mode of the movable effect means is preferable. It becomes possible to do.

Feature L4. When the limit state is reached, the stop control means is detected by the predetermined detection means after the movable effect means exceeds the limit range when the stop information is set. The gaming machine according to feature L3, which is provided with a restriction releasing means (a function of executing the process of step S2910 in the sound light side MPU 112) for releasing the restricted state.

According to the feature L4, even if the movable effect means is restricted from being stopped, it is within the range of one operation, so that the operation period of the movable effect means does not become longer than necessary. However, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described above.

Feature L5. A stepping motor (disk rotation drive units 67a, 67b) for driving the movable effect means is provided.
The operating position grasping means grasps the operating position of the movable effect means by utilizing the number of steps of the stepping motor.
The restriction release means releases the restriction state when the number of steps grasped by the operation position grasping means reaches the number of restriction release steps after exceeding the restriction range. Characteristic The gaming machine according to the feature L4.

According to the feature L5, the processing configuration for grasping the operating position of the movable effect means and the processing configuration for releasing the restriction on the stop of the movable effect means can be simplified.

Feature L6. The first movable effect means (left disk movable object 62a) capable of performing movable effect, and
The second movable effect means (the disk movable object 62b on the right side) capable of performing the movable effect, and
Start control means (step S2704 and step in the sound light side MPU 112) that executes the start control of the first movable effect means so as to start the operation and executes the start control of the second movable effect means so as to start the operation. Function to execute the processing of S2705) and
In the situation where each of the movable effect means is operating, the stop information setting means for setting the stop information (stop command flag) (the function of executing the process of step S1212 in the sound light side MPU 112) and
After the stop information is set, the stop control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S3005 and S3010 in the sound light side MPU 112) for stopping the operation of the first movable effect means and the second movable effect means, and
With
The stop control means
The first operation position grasping means (function of executing the processing of step S2708, step S2713 and step S2906 in the sound light side MPU 112) for grasping the operation position of the first movable effect means.
A second operation position grasping means for grasping the operation position of the second movable effect means (a function of executing the processes of step S2709, step S2714, and step S2907 in the sound light side MPU 112) and
When the stop information is set, at least when the grasping result of the first operating position grasping means or the second operating position grasping means is a predetermined grasping result, or at least the first operating position grasping means and the first (2) When the grasping result of both of the operation position grasping means is a predetermined grasping result, the restriction that both the first movable effect means and the second movable effect means are stopped after being displaced by a predetermined amount. Means (a function of executing the process of step S2802 in the sound light side MPU 112) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature L6, in a configuration provided with a plurality of movable effect means, these movable effect means can be synchronously stopped, and the operations of the plurality of movable effect means can be interleaved. Further, when the grasping result of any of the operating position grasping means or each operating position grasping means is a predetermined grasping result, each movable effect means is displaced by a predetermined amount even in the situation where the stop information is set. It will be stopped after being done. As a result, if the stop control of each movable effect means is executed, it is possible to avoid the stop of each movable effect means in a situation where the movable effect means cannot be stopped in synchronization. Therefore, it becomes easy to stop each movable effect means in a synchronized state. From the above, it is possible to suitably perform the execution control of the effect using the movable effect means.

Feature L7. A first stepping motor (disk rotation drive unit 67a) for driving the first movable effect means and a second stepping motor (disk rotation drive unit 67b) for driving the second movable effect means are provided.
The first operating position grasping means grasps the operating position of the first movable effect means by utilizing the number of steps of the first stepping motor.
The gaming machine according to feature L6, wherein the second operating position grasping means grasps the operating position of the second movable effect means by utilizing the number of steps of the second stepping motor.

According to the feature L7, the processing configuration for grasping the operating position of each movable effect means can be simplified.

Feature L8. The predetermined grasping result of the first operating position grasping means includes a range in which the operating position of the first movable effect means is a part of the entire operating position and is detected by the predetermined detecting means. It is a grasping result corresponding to the existence in 1 limit range,
The predetermined grasping result of the second operating position grasping means includes a range in which the operating position of the second movable effect means is a part of the entire operating position and is detected by the predetermined detecting means. 2. The gaming machine according to feature L6 or L7, which is characterized in that it is a grasping result corresponding to the presence in the limited range.

When the stop information is set in a situation where the movable effect means is detected by the predetermined detection means, or when the movable effect means is detected by the predetermined detection means immediately after the stop information is set, each movable effect means is set. If an attempt is made to stop the movable effect means, the stop mode in which the movable effect means are synchronized may be unfavorable. On the other hand, according to the feature L8, when the stop information is set in such a situation, the stop of each movable effect means is restricted, so that it is easy to stop each movable effect means in a synchronized state. Become.

Feature L9. When the limiting state is reached, at least both the first movable effect means and the second movable effect means exceed the limited range when the stop information is set. The gaming machine according to feature L8, wherein the gaming machine is stopped when it is detected by the predetermined detection means.

According to the feature L9, even if each movable effect means is restricted from being stopped, it is within the range of one operation, so that the operation period of each movable effect means does not become longer than necessary. While doing so, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

Feature L10. Movable production means (disk movable objects 62a, 62b) capable of performing movable production, and
A start control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S2704 and S2705 in the sound light side MPU 112) that executes the start control of the movable effect means so as to start the operation, and
In the situation where the movable effect means is operating, the stop information setting means for setting the stop information (stop command flag) (the function of executing the process of step S1212 in the sound light side MPU 112) and
After the stop information is set, the stop control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S3005 and S3010 in the sound light side MPU 112) for stopping the operation of the movable effect means, and
With
The stop control means
An operation position grasping means for grasping the operation position of the movable effect means (a function of executing the processes of step S2708, step S2709, step S2713, step S2714, step S2906 and step S2907 in the sound light side MPU 112).
When the stop information is set and the grasping result of the operation position grasping means is a predetermined grasping result, the limiting means (sound light) for stopping the movable effect means after being displaced by a predetermined amount. (Function to execute the process of step S2802 in the side MPU 112) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature L10, when the grasping result of the operation position grasping means is a predetermined grasping result, the movable effect means is stopped after being displaced by a predetermined amount even in a situation where stop information is set. NS. As a result, when it is inconvenient to stop the movable effect means, it is possible to avoid stopping the movable effect means, and it is possible to stop the movable effect means at a preferable timing. From the above, it is possible to suitably perform the execution control of the effect using the movable effect means.

The inventions of the feature K group and the feature L group can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of game machine. As these gaming machines, those provided with movable objects that are driven and operated by a driving device such as a solenoid or a rotary motor are known.

For example, as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed based on the game ball entering the ball entry portion provided in the game area, a variable display of a pattern is performed on the display surface of the display device, and the winning result is obtained by the lottery. In the case of, the combination of specific patterns and the like is finally stopped and displayed on the display surface, and it is known that the player shifts to a special gaming state which is advantageous for the player. Then, when the state shifts to the special gaming state, for example, the opening and closing of the ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the entry into the ball entry device. In this case, for example, when a movable object operates in a situation where a variable display of a pattern is performed, a transition to a special game state occurs with a relatively high probability after that. I try to enhance the interest of the game.

Here, there is a demand for a configuration that enables the execution control of an effect using a movable object to be suitably performed, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or applied to each feature is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: An operating means operated by a player, a game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game. A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area and gives a privilege to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

Rotating machine such as a slot machine: Equipped with a picture display device that variably displays a plurality of pictures, the variable display of the plurality of pictures is started due to the operation of the start operation means, and is caused by the operation of the stop operation means. A gaming machine in which the variable display of the plurality of symbols is stopped after a lapse of a predetermined time, and a privilege is given to the player according to the symbols after the stop.

10 ... Pachinko machine, 31 ... Symbol display device, 45 ... Speaker unit, 51 ... Curtain plate movable unit, 52 ... Curtain plate movable object, 53a, 53b ... Curtain plate drive unit, 54a, 54b ... Curtain plate rail, 55a , 55b ... Slide member, 56a, 56b ... Drive unit for curtain plate, 57a, 57b ... Curtain plate initial position sensor, 58a, 58b ... Adjustment position sensor, 61a, 61b ... Disk movable unit, 62a, 62b ... Disk movable object, 63a, 63b ... Disk drive unit, 64a, 64b ... Disk rail, 65a, 65b ... Shafted guide member, 66a, 66b ... Disk slide drive unit, 67a, 67b ... Disk rotation drive unit, 68a, 68b ... Slide initial position sensor, 69a, 69b ... Rotation initial position sensor, 71-73 ... Light emitting unit group, 111 ... Sound light emission control board, 112 ... Sound light side MPU, 113 ... Sound light side ROM, 114 ... Sound light side RAM, 121 ... Display control board, 122 ... Display side MPU, 123 ... Display side ROM, 124 ... Display side RAM, 164 ... Movable object data area.

Claims (1)

A light emitting means that can perform an effect using light,
Information setting means for the emission pattern information used in order to execute the effect in the light emitting means is set to be available in the case of performing the execution control of the effect of the light emitting means,
When the control execution timing is reached, by using the information corresponding to the control execution timing in the light emission pattern information , the execution means for causing the light emission means to execute the effect during a predetermined period, and the execution means.
With
The information setting means is
The original information reading means for reading the original information used for setting the light emission pattern information from the storage means, and the original information reading means.
Derivation means for deriving the light emission pattern information by applying the setting information to the original information read by the original information reading means, and
With
The original information includes
Execution order information corresponding to the execution order of the effect in the light emitting means,
Correspondence information that is set in correspondence with the execution order information and is used by the execution means to control the execution of the effect of the light emitting means, and
Is set,
In the execution order information, a plurality of specific information including the first information and the second information are set in a predetermined order.
The execution means is set at the next control execution timing with respect to the control execution timing in which the effect is executed by the light emitting means using the correspondence information corresponding to the specific information set in the last order. , The effect is executed by the light emitting means by using the corresponding information corresponding to the specific information set in the first order.
The derivation means
By applying the first setting information as the setting information, the effect of the light emitting means is started from the content corresponding to the corresponding information set in the original information corresponding to the first information. And the means for deriving the light emission pattern information
By applying the second setting information as the setting information, the effect of the light emitting means is started from the content corresponding to the corresponding information set in the original information corresponding to the second information. And the means for deriving the light emission pattern information
With
The information used for controlling the light emission of the light emitting means includes information to be used in preference to the light emitting pattern information derived based on the original information.
The light emitting means is characterized in that the light emitting pattern information to be used for light emitting control is derived by using different original information in the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means in a predetermined period. A game machine to be.

Images